Index: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/book.xml =================================================================== --- head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/book.xml (revision 50084) +++ head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/book.xml (revision 50085) @@ -1,8790 +1,8493 @@ ]> - FreeBSD 文件計畫入門書 + 給新貢獻人員的 FreeBSD 說明文件計畫入門書 - FreeBSD 文件計劃 + FreeBSD 說明文件計劃 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 DocEng $FreeBSD$ $FreeBSD$ 版權 Redistribution and use in source (XML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms (XML, HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code (XML DocBook) must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs, converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD DOCUMENTATION PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD DOCUMENTATION PROJECT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - 感謝您參與 FreeBSD 文件計劃，您的點滴貢獻，都相當寶貴。 + 感謝您參與 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃，您的點滴貢獻，都相當寶貴。 - 本入手書內容包括：如何開始著手貢獻FreeBSD 文件計劃 (簡稱： FDP )的各項細節，以及會用到的一些工具、軟體 ，以及文件計畫的宗旨。 + 本入手書內容包括：如何開始著手貢獻 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃 (FreeBSD Documentation Project, FDP) 的各項細節，以及會用到的一些工具、軟體 ，以及文件計畫的宗旨。 本入門書仍在持續撰寫中。任何修正或新增內容的建議都非常歡迎。 序 - Shell 提示符號(Prompts) + Shell 提示符號 下表顯示出一般使用者帳號與 root 的提示符號，在所有的文件例子中會用提示符號(prompt) ，來提醒您該用哪種帳號才對。 帳號 提示符號 一般使用者 % root # 書中所用的編排風格 下表為本書中所使用編排風格方式 代表意義 - 舉例 + 範例 指令 使用 ls -l 來列出所有的檔案。 檔名 編輯 .login 。 螢幕上會出現的訊息 You have mail. 輸入指令後，螢幕上會出現的對應內容。 % date +"The time is %H:%M" The time is 09:18 要參考的線上手冊 使用 su1 來切換帳號。 使用者名稱和群組名稱 只有 root 才可以做這件事。 語氣的強調。 使用者必須這樣做 打指令時，可替換的部份 要搜尋線上手冊的關鍵字，請輸入 man -k 關鍵字 環境變數。 $HOME 是指帳號的家目錄所在處。 - 注意、技巧、重要訊息、警告、與範例的運用。 + 注意、提示、重要、警告與範例 出現在本文中的注意、警告、與範例。 注意：表示需要注意的事項，其中包括您需要注意的事情，因為這些事情可能會影響到操作結果。 提示：提供可能對您有用的資訊，例如簡化操作方式的技巧說明。 重要：表示要特別注意的事情。一般來說，它們會包括操作指令時需要加的額外參數。 警告：表示警告事項，比如如果您不則可能導致的損失。這些損失可能是對您或硬體造成實際傷害， 也可能是無法估計的損害，例如一時疏忽而刪除重要檔案...。 - 一個範例 + 範例的範本 這是舉例說明而已，通常包含應遵循的指令範例，或顯示某些特定動作所可能發生的結果。 感謝 在此要感謝 Sue Blake, Patrick Durusau, Jon Hamilton, Peter Flynn, Christopher Maden 這些人的協助與閱讀初期草稿，並提供許多寶貴的潤稿意見與評論。 概論 - 歡迎參與 FreeBSD 文件計劃( 簡稱 FDP ) 。維持優秀質量的文件對 FreeBSD 的成功來說十分重要，您的點滴貢獻都是十分寶貴的。 + 歡迎參與 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃 (FreeBSD Documentation Project, FDP)。維持優秀質量的文件對 FreeBSD 的成功來說十分重要，您的點滴貢獻都是十分寶貴的。 本文件描述：『 FDP 的架構有哪些』、『如何撰寫並提交文件』、 『如何有效運用工具來協助撰稿』。 歡迎大家對 FDP 做出貢獻。唯一的成員要求就有貢獻的意願。 本入門書指出如何： 瞭解有哪些文件是由 FDP 所維護的。 - 安裝所需的文件工具和檔案 + 安裝所需的說明文件工具和檔案。 - 修改文件 + 修改說明文件。 - 提交修改以供審核並納入 FreeBSD 文件 + 提交修改以供審核並納入 FreeBSD 說明文件。 快速上手 - 在編輯 FreeBSD 文件之前，有一些準備工作要做。 首先，請訂閱 FreeBSD 文件計劃郵件論壇。 有些團隊成員也會出現在EFnet的#bsddocs IRC 頻道。這些人可以幫忙解決文件相關的問題。 + 在編輯 FreeBSD 說明文件之前，有一些準備工作要做。 首先，請訂閱 FreeBSD 文件計劃郵件論壇。 有些團隊成員也會出現在 EFnet 的#bsddocs IRC 頻道。這些人可以幫忙解決文件相關的問題。 - 安裝 textproc/docproj 套件或 port。這個meta-port 會安裝所有編輯和建構 FreeBSD 文件需要的軟體。 + 安裝 textproc/docproj 套件或 Port。這個 meta-port 會安裝所有編輯和建置 FreeBSD 說明文件需要的軟體。 - 在~/doc安裝 FreeBSD 文件庫的本地端工作副本 ( 請見 )。 + 在 ~/doc 安裝 FreeBSD 說明文件檔案庫的本地端工作副本 (請見 )。 % svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head ~/doc 設定文字編輯器： - Word wrap 設為70個字元。 + 自動換行 (Word wrap) 設為 70 個字元。 - Tab stops 設成 。 + Tab 定位點 (Tab stops) 設成 2。 - 將句首每八個空白以一個 tab 替換。 + 將行首每 8 個空白取代成 1 個 Tab。 特定編輯器的設定方式列於 。 更新本地端工作副本 % svn up ~/doc - 編輯需要修改的文件檔案。如果檔案需要大幅度的編修，請先諮詢郵件論壇。 + 編輯需要修改的說明文件檔案。如果檔案需要大幅度的編修，請先諮詢郵件論壇。 - 標籤 ( tag ) 和 entity 的使用方式可以參考 和 . 。 + 標籤 (Tag) 和 Entity 的使用方式可以參考 和 . 。 編輯完後，執行以下指令來檢查是否有問題： % igor -R filename.xml | less -RS 檢查輸出並重新編輯檔案來修正顯示的錯誤，然後重新執行指令來找出剩下的問題。重複執行直到所有錯誤都解決完。 - 修正送出前請先建構測試 (build-test ) 。在編輯的文件目錄最頂層執行 make，將會產生 split HTML 格式的文件。例如要建構 HTML 格式的英文版使用手冊，請在 en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/ 目錄執行 make 。 + 永遠要送出修正前請先做建置測試 (Build-test) 。在編輯的說明文件目錄最頂層執行 make，將會產生分頁的 HTML 格式 (Split HTML) 的文件。例如要建置 HTML 格式的英文版使用手冊，請在 en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/ 目錄執行 make 。 - 修改並測試完後，產生diff 檔： + 修改並測試完後，產生 diff 檔： % cd ~/doc % svn diff > bsdinstall.diff.txt - 設一個可辨識的檔名。如上例中，是使用手冊的bsdinstall 部份的修改。 + 設一個可辨識的檔名。如上例中，是使用手冊的 bsdinstall 部份的修改。 - 使用網頁版 Problem Report 系統提交 diff 檔。 如果使用網頁版，請輸入[修正檔] 問題簡短描述的概要 。選擇 docs 分類和 doc-bug類別。在訊息的主體中，輸入修正的簡短描述和其他相關的重要的細節。使用[ Browse... ] 按鈕來附加 diff 檔。 + 使用網頁版 問題回報 系統提交 diff 檔。 如果使用網頁版，請輸入 [patch] 問題簡短描述 的概要 。選擇 docs 分類和 doc-bug類別。在訊息的主體中，輸入修正的簡短描述和其他相關的重要的細節。使用 [ Browse... ] 按鈕來附加 diff 檔。 - FreeBSD 文件組 + FreeBSD 說明文件集 - FDP 負責四類 FreeBSD 文件 + FDP 負責四類 FreeBSD 說明文件。 - 使用手冊： 使用手冊主要是給 FreeBSD 使用者提供詳盡的線上參考資料。 + 使用手冊 (Handbook)：使用手冊主要是給 FreeBSD 使用者提供詳盡的線上參考資料。 - FAQ 主要是收集在各郵件論壇或論壇會常問到或有可能會問到的 FreeBSD 相關問題與答案 。 (簡單講，就是『問答集』格式) 通常會擺在這裡面的問答格式，不會放太長的詳細內容。 + 常見問答集 (FAQ)：主要是收集在各郵件論壇或論壇會常問到或有可能會問到的 FreeBSD 相關問題與答案 。 (簡單講，就是『問答集』格式) 通常會擺在這裡面的問答格式，不會放太長的詳細內容。 - 線上手冊 ( manual pages ):英文版的系統 manual 並不是由 FDP 所撰寫的，因為它們是屬於 base system 的部份。 然而，FDP 可以修改這些文件，來讓這些文件寫得更清楚，甚至是勘正錯誤的地方。 + 操作手冊 (Manual page)：英文版的系統手冊並不是由 FDP 所撰寫的，因為它們是屬於基礎系統 (Base system) 的部份。 然而，FDP 可以修改這些文件，來讓這些文件寫得更清楚，甚至是勘正錯誤的地方。 - 網站: 這是 FreeBSD 在網路上的主要部份，位於 http://www.FreeBSD.org/ 以及許多其他 mirror 站。這網站是許多人第一次接觸 FreeBSD 的地方 + 網站：這是 FreeBSD 在網路上的主要部份，位於 http://www.FreeBSD.org/ 以及許多其他鏡像站 (Mirror)。這網站是許多人第一次接觸 FreeBSD 的地方 翻譯團隊負責翻譯使用手冊和網站到不同的語言。線上手冊目前並未翻譯 - FreeBSD 網站、使用手冊、和 FAQ 的文件原始碼可以在 https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/ 的文件庫取得。 + FreeBSD 網站、使用手冊、和 FAQ 的文件原始碼可以在 https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/ 的文件檔案庫取得。 線上手冊的原始碼則是在 https://svn.FreeBSD.org/base/ 的原始碼庫可以取得。 - 文件提交訊息可以用 svn log 察看。 提交訊息也會保存在http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/svn-doc-all。 + 說明文件提交訊息可以用 svn log 察看。 提交訊息也會封存在 http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/svn-doc-all。 - 這些儲存庫的網頁版位於 和 。 + 這些儲存庫的網頁版位於 和 。 - 許多人會寫 FreeBSD 的教學文件或是 how-to 文章。有些保存在 FDP 的檔案中。其他一些文件則是作者希望放在他處。FDP 會盡力提供這些文件的連結。 + 許多人會寫 FreeBSD 的教學文件或是 how-to 文章。有些保存在 FDP 的檔案中。其他一些說明文件則是作者希望放在他處。FDP 會盡力提供這些說明文件的連結。 工具 - 有些工具軟體用來管理 FreeBSD 文件，並將他轉換成不同的輸出格式。 有些則是在使用接下來章節的範例之前一定要安裝。有些工具是選擇性安裝的，但是裝了之後會更容易進行文件製作工作。 + 有些工具軟體用來管理 FreeBSD 說明文件，並將他轉換成不同的輸出格式。 有些則是在使用接下來章節的範例之前一定要安裝。有些工具是選擇性安裝的，但是裝了之後會更容易進行文件製作工作。 必備工具 - 從 Ports Collection 安裝 textproc/docproj。這個 組合型 port (meta-port) 會安裝處理 FreeBSD 文件需要的所有應用程式。以下列出特定元件的進一步說明。 + 從 Port 套件集安裝 textproc/docproj。這個 meta-port 會安裝處理 FreeBSD 說明文件需要的所有應用程式。以下列出特定元件的進一步說明。 <acronym>DTD</acronym>s 與 <acronym>Entities</acronym> - FreeBSD 文件使用幾種文件類型定義 (DTDs) 與 XML entities 組。這些都會經由 textproc/docproj port 來安裝。 + FreeBSD 說明文件使用幾種文件類型定義 (DTDs) 與 XML entities 集合。這些都會經由 textproc/docproj Port 來安裝。 XHTML DTD (textproc/xhtml) XHTML 是全球資訊網的一種標記語言，也是整個 FreeBSD 網站所使用的格式。 DocBook DTD (textproc/docbook-xml) - DocBook 設計來製作技術文件的標記語言版本。FreeBSD 文件是以 DocBook 來撰寫。 + DocBook 設計來製作技術說明文件的標記語言版本。FreeBSD 說明文件是以 DocBook 來撰寫。 ISO 8879 entities (textproc/iso8879) 在 ISO 8879:1986 之中的 entity 被許多 DTD 所大量使用， 包括了數學符號、拉丁字母符號(尖重音等音節符號也是)以及希臘符號。 - 輔助工具 + 選用工具 - 不一定得裝下列的應用程式才行，但是，出的格式也更具彈性。 + 以下應用程式並非必要，但有了可讓在說明文件的作業上更簡單或提升能力。 軟體 Vim (editors/vim) 一個很受歡迎的編輯器，可以處理 XML 和他的衍生相關文件，例如 DocBook XML。 Emacs 或 XEmacs (editors/emacs 或 editors/xemacs) 這兩個編輯器都包含特別模式來編輯用 XML DTD 標記的文件。這個模式包含指令來減少打字量，並可以幫忙減少錯誤的發生。 工作副本 - The working copy is a copy of the FreeBSD - repository documentation tree downloaded onto the local computer. - Changes are made to the local working copy, tested, and then - submitted as patches to be committed to the main - repository. + 工作副本 (Working copy) 指的是已下載到本地電腦的 FreeBSD 說明文件樹檔案庫，所有對工作副本的更改會經過測試後再以修補檔 (Patch) 的格式提交到主要檔案庫。 - A full copy of the documentation tree can occupy 700 megabytes - of disk space. Allow for a full gigabyte of space to have room - for temporary files and test versions of various output - formats. + 完整的說明文件樹副本會佔據 700 MB 的磁碟空間，要有空間能夠儲存暫存檔及各種輸出格式的測試版本需要 1 GB 的空間。 - Subversion - is used to manage the FreeBSD documentation files. It is installed - by textproc/docproj as one of - the required applications. + FreeBSD 說明文件檔案使用 Subversion 來管理，由於 Subversion 為 textproc/docproj 的必要應用程式之一，所以會隨著 textproc/docproj 一併安裝。 - Documentation and Manual Pages + 說明文件與操作手冊 - FreeBSD documentation is not just books and articles. Manual - pages for all the commands and configuration files are also part - of the documentation, and part of the FDP's - territory. Two repositories are involved: - doc for the books and articles, and - base for the operating system and manual - pages. To edit manual pages, the base - repository must be checked out separately. + FreeBSD 說明文件不只有書籍與文章，還有所有指令與設定檔的操作手冊 (Manual page) 也是文件的一部份，其中也有一部份是 FDP 的地盤。相關的檔案庫有兩個：doc 中有書籍與文章，而 base 中有作業系統以及操作手冊。要編輯操作手冊則必須另外取出 (Checkout) base 檔案庫。 - Repositories may contain multiple versions of documentation - and source code. New modifications are almost always made only - to the latest version, called head. + 檔案庫中可能會含有數個版本的說明文件與原始碼。新的修改幾乎都只對最新版本 head 做更新。 - Choosing a Directory + 選擇一個目錄 - FreeBSD documentation is traditionally stored in - /usr/doc/, and system - source code with manual pages in - /usr/src/. These - directory trees are relocatable, and users may want to put the - working copies in other locations to avoid interfering with - existing information in the main directories. The examples - that follow use ~/doc - and ~/src, both - subdirectories of the user's home directory. + FreeBSD 說明文件一般會儲存在 /usr/doc/，而系統原始碼及操作手冊則會存在 /usr/src/。這些目錄樹可改放在其他地方，使用者可能會為了避免與現有在主要目錄的資料搞混，把工作副本放在其他的地方。以下的例子會放在 ~/doc 以及 ~/src 兩個在使用者家目錄下的目錄。 - Checking Out a Copy + 取出一份副本 - A download of a working copy from the repository is called - a checkout, and done with - svn checkout. This example checks out a - copy of the latest version (head) of - the main documentation tree: + 從檔案庫下載工作副本的動作稱作 取出 (Checkout)，使用 svn checkout 來完成。本範例會取出主要說明文件樹最新版本的副本： % svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head ~/doc - A checkout of the source code to work on manual pages is - very similar: + 取出原始碼編輯操作手冊的動作非常相似： % svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/base/head ~/src - Updating a Working Copy + 更新工作副本 - The documents and files in the FreeBSD repository change daily. - People modify files and commit changes frequently. Even a short - time after an initial checkout, there will already be - differences between the local working copy and the main FreeBSD - repository. To update the local version with the changes that - have been made to the main repository, use - svn update on the directory containing the - local working copy: + 在 FreeBSD 檔案庫中的文件與檔案每天都會更改，人們會修改檔案與提交變更的頻率非常快，即使取出 (Checkout) 只過小一段時間，本地的工作副本可能就與主要 FreeBSD 檔案庫有差異了。要更新本地版本以同步對主要檔案庫的變更可在有本地工作副本的目錄下使用 svn update： % svn update ~/doc - Get in the protective habit of using - svn update before editing document files. - Someone else may have edited that file very recently, and the - local working copy will not include the latest changes until it - has been updated. Editing the newest version of a file is much - easier than trying to combine an older, edited local file with - the newer version from the repository. + 養成良好的習慣在編輯文件檔前先執行 svn update，可能會有其他人才剛編輯完該檔案，本地工作副本在尚未更新前不會有最後的變更內容，編輯最新版本的檔案會比將舊版本地檔案與新版檔案庫檔案合併來的簡單多了。 - Reverting Changes + 還原變更 - Sometimes it turns out that changes were - not necessary after all, or the writer just wants to start over. - Files can be reset to their unchanged form with - svn revert. For example, to erase the edits - made to chapter.xml and reset it to - unmodified form: + 有時才做完的變更可能就變的不需要了，或者作者剛想要重新搛寫。檔案可使以使用 svn revert 來重設成尚未被修改刪的狀態，舉例來說，要清除所有對 chapter.xml 的修改然後還原到未修改的版本可： % svn revert chapter.xml - Making a Diff + 比對差異 - After edits to a file or group of files are completed, the - differences between the local working copy and the version on - the FreeBSD repository must be collected into a single file for - submission. These diff files are produced - by redirecting the output of svn diff into a - file: + 在編輯一個檔案或數個檔案完成之後，需將本地工作副本與 FreeBSD 檔案庫的差異儲存到一個檔案然後提交。這些 差異 (Diff) 檔可透過將 svn diff 的輸出轉向到檔案來建立： % cd ~/doc % svn diff > doc-fix-spelling.diff - Give the file a meaningful name that identifies the - contents. The example above is for spelling fixes to the whole - documentation tree. + 給檔案取一個有意義的名字來辨識這次修改的內容，上述範例為例則是要修正整個說明文件樹的拼寫。 - If the diff file is to be submitted with the web - Submit a FreeBSD - problem report interface, add a - .txt extension to give the earnest and - simple-minded web form a clue that the contents are plain - text. + 若 diff 檔要使用網站的 Submit a FreeBSD problem report 介面來提交，請加上 .txt 副檔名來給認真又單純的網頁表單可以辨識其內容為純文字的線索。 - Be careful: svn diff includes all changes - made in the current directory and any subdirectories. If there - are files in the working copy with edits that are not ready to - be submitted yet, provide a list of only the files that are to - be included: + 請小心：svn diff 會產生所有在目前目錄及其子目錄的變更差異，若在該工作副本中有已經編輯過的檔案還沒有要提交，請列出需要比較差異的檔案清單： % cd ~/doc % svn diff disks/chapter.xml printers/chapter.xml > disks-printers.diff - <application>Subversion</application> References + <application>Subversion</application> 參考文獻 - These examples show very basic usage of - Subversion. More detail is available - in the Subversion Book - and the Subversion - documentation. + 以下範例會示範 Subversion 的基本用法，要取得更多資訊可至 Subversion Book 與 Subversion 說明文件。 - Documentation Directory Structure + 說明文件目錄結構 - Files and directories in the - doc/ tree follow a - structure meant to: + 在 doc/ 樹中的檔案與目錄需要遵守特定結構是因為： - Make it easy to automate converting the document to other - formats. + 讓自動轉換說明文件到各種格式更簡單。 - Promote consistency between the different documentation - organizations, to make it easier to switch between working on - different documents. + 促進不同說明文件組織之間的一致性，以便更輕鬆的在不同說明文件之間切換。 - Make it easy to decide where in the tree new documentation - should be placed. + 可以很容易的決定新的說明文件應該放在文件樹中的哪個位置。 - In addition, the documentation tree must accommodate - documents in many different languages and encodings. It is - important that the documentation tree structure does not enforce - any particular defaults or cultural preferences. + 除此之外，說明文件樹必須能容納各種不同語言與編碼的說明文件。很重要的一點是，說明文件樹結構不應強制任何特定默認或文化的偏好。 - The Top Level, - <filename>doc/</filename> + 最上層，<filename>doc/</filename> - There are two types of directory under - doc/, each with very - specific directory names and meanings. + 在 doc/ 底下有兩種類型的目錄，兩種都有非常明確的目錄名稱與意義。 - Directory - Usage + 目錄 + 用途 share - Contains files that are not specific to the various - translations and encodings of the documentation. - Contains subdirectories to further categorize the - information. For example, the files that comprise the - make1 infrastructure are in - share/mk, while - the additional XML support files - (such as the FreeBSD extended DocBook - DTD) are in share/xml. + 含有未特定用於各說明文件翻譯與編碼的檔案。其子目錄更進一步將不同資訊的分類，例如，構成 make1 基礎設施的檔案放置於 share/mk，而額外的 XML 支援檔 (如 FreeBSD 延伸的 DocBook DTD) 則放在 share/xml。 lang.encoding - One directory exists for each available translation - and encoding of the documentation, for example - en_US.ISO8859-1/ - and zh_TW.UTF-8/. - The names are long, but by fully specifying the language - and encoding we prevent any future headaches when a - translation team wants to provide documentation in the - same language but in more than one encoding. This also - avoids problems that might be caused by a future switch - to Unicode. + 每一個目錄代表可用的說明文件翻譯與編碼，例如 en_US.ISO8859-1/ 及 zh_TW.UTF-8/。名稱雖然長，但完整表達語言與編碼可以避免未來當一個翻譯團隊要以不同編碼提供同一個語言的說明文件造成的問題，這也同時避免往後要切換成萬國碼 (Unicode) 可能造成的問題。 - The - <filename><replaceable>lang</replaceable>.<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>/</filename> - Directories + <filename><replaceable>lang</replaceable>.<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>/</filename> 目錄 - These directories contain the documents themselves. The - documentation is split into up to three more categories at - this level, indicated by the different directory names. + 這些目錄中含有說明文件。在此階層說明文件分成三個分類，使用不同的目錄名稱來代表。 - Directory - Usage + 目錄 + 用途 articles - Documentation marked up as a DocBook - article (or equivalent). Reasonably - short, and broken up into sections. Normally only - available as one XHTML file. + 以 DocBook article (或同等級) 標記的說明文件。非常短，且會分成幾個小節，通常取得時只會有一個 XHTML 檔案。 books - Documentation marked up as a DocBook - book (or equivalent). Book length, - and broken up into chapters. Normally available as both - one large XHTML file (for people with - fast connections, or who want to print it easily from a - browser) and as a collection of linked, smaller - files. + 以 DocBook book (或同等級) 標記的說明文件。有跟書籍一樣的長度，會分成數個章。通常取得時會包含一個大型的 XHTML 檔 (供有較快連線速度的人使用，或者那些想直接在瀏覽器列印的人) 與數個連結的較小的檔案。 man - For translations of the system manual pages. This - directory will contain one or more mann - directories, corresponding to the sections that have - been translated. + 供系統操作手冊 (Manual page) 翻譯使用。這個目錄會包含一個或多個 mann 目錄來對應已經翻譯的章節。 - Not every lang.encoding - directory will have all of these subdirectories. It depends - on how much translation has been accomplished by that - translation team. + 並非所有 lang.encoding 的目錄都會有這些子目錄，這要看該翻譯團隊已經完成了多少翻譯來決定。 - Document-Specific Information + 文件特定資訊 - This section contains specific notes about particular - documents managed by the FDP. + 本節內含有關由 FDP 所管理的特定文件的特定注意事項。 - The Handbook + 使用手冊 (Handbook) books/handbook/ - The Handbook is written in DocBook XML - using the FreeBSD DocBook extended DTD. + 操作手冊是以使用 FreeBSD DocBook 擴充 DTD 的 DocBook XML 所撰寫。 - The Handbook is organized as a DocBook - book. The book is divided into - parts, each of which contains several - chapters. chapters are - further subdivided into sections (sect1) - and subsections (sect2, - sect3) and so on. + 使用手冊使用 DocBook book 來組織，整個手冊區分成數個部份 (part)，每個部份中內含數個章 (chapter)，而章 (chapter) 又更進一步的細分成數個節 (sect1) 與小節 (sect2, sect3) 以此類推。 - Physical Organization + 實體組織結構 - There are a number of files and directories within the - handbook directory. + 在 handbook 目錄中有數個檔案及目錄。 - The Handbook's organization may change over time, and - this document may lag in detailing the organizational - changes. Post questions about Handbook organization to the - FreeBSD documentation project mailing list. + 使用手冊的組織結構可能會隨時改變，本文件所詳述的組織結構可能會與現況不盡相同。有關使用手冊組織結構的問題可張貼到 FreeBSD documentation project mailing list。 <filename>Makefile</filename> - The Makefile defines some - variables that affect how the XML - source is converted to other formats, and lists the - various source files that make up the Handbook. It then - includes the standard doc.project.mk, - to bring in the rest of the code that handles converting - documents from one format to another. + Makefile 定義了一些會影響 XML 原始碼要如何轉換至其他格式的變數，並列出產生使用手冊所需的各原始檔，接著會引用可處理在各種文件格式轉換的標準 doc.project.mk 程式碼。 <filename>book.xml</filename> - This is the top level document in the Handbook. It - contains the Handbook's DOCTYPE - declaration, as well as the elements that - describe the Handbook's structure. + 此為使用手冊的最上層文件，其中包含了使用手冊的 DOCTYPE 宣告以及用來描述使用手冊結構的元素。 - book.xml uses parameter - entities to load in the files with the - .ent extension. These files - (described later) then define general - entities that are used throughout the rest of the - Handbook. + book.xml 會使用 參數 Entities 來載入 .ent 副檔名的檔案。這些檔案 (稍後會詳述) 接著會定義使用手冊剩下篇幅會使用的 一般 Entities。 <filename role="directory"><replaceable>directory</replaceable>/chapter.xml</filename> - Each chapter in the Handbook is stored in a file - called chapter.xml in a separate - directory from the other chapters. Each directory is - named after the value of the id - attribute on the chapter - element. + 每個在使用手冊的章會儲存成名稱為 chapter.xml 的檔案，分別放在不同的目錄中。每個目錄均是以在 chapter 元素中 id 屬性中的值來命名。 - For example, if one of the chapter files - contains: + 例如，若有一章的檔案內容為： chapter id="kernelconfig" ... chapter - Then it will be called - chapter.xml in the - kernelconfig directory. In general, - the entire contents of the chapter are in this one - file. + 那麼放置這個 chapter.xml 的目錄則會命名為 kernelconfig。一般來說一章的所有內容會存放在這一個檔案。 - When the XHTML version of the - Handbook is produced, this will yield - kernelconfig.html. This is because - of the id value, and is not related to - the name of the directory. + 當有 XHTML 版本的使用手冊之後，也會用這個檔產出 kernelconfig.html，這個名稱是根據 id 的值而定，與目錄名稱無關。 - In earlier versions of the Handbook, the files were - stored in the same directory as - book.xml, and named after the value - of the id attribute on the file's - chapter element. Now, it is possible - to include images in each chapter. Images for each - Handbook chapter are stored within share/images/books/handbook. - The localized version of these images should be - placed in the same directory as the XML - sources for each chapter. Namespace collisions are - inevitable, and it is easier to work with several - directories with a few files in them than it is to work - with one directory that has many files in it. + 在早期版本的使用手冊，檔案皆儲存在與 book.xml 相同的目錄中，而名稱會以 chapter 元素中的 id 屬性的值來命名。現在可在每個章節之中引用圖片，每個使用手冊章節的圖片會儲存在 share/images/books/handbook，而在地化版本的圖片應放在與每個章節 XML 原始碼相同的目錄。命名空間會衝突是必然的，但以目錄多、檔案少與目錄少、檔案多的結構相比，目錄多、檔案少會較容易處理命名空間衝突的問題。 - A brief look will show that there are many directories - with individual chapter.xml files, - including basics/chapter.xml, - introduction/chapter.xml, and - printing/chapter.xml. + 簡單來說會有很多個內含 chapter.xml 檔案的目錄，例如 basics/chapter.xml, introduction/chapter.xml 以及 printing/chapter.xml。 - Do not name chapters or directories after - their ordering within the Handbook. This ordering can - change as the content within the Handbook is - reorganized. Reorganization should be possible without - renaming files, unless entire chapters are being - promoted or demoted within the hierarchy. + 請勿以在使用手冊中的章節順序來命名章節或目錄，因為順序是會隨使用手冊重新組織後的內容改變的。重新組織結構應不需要去重新命名檔案，除非整個章節的階層被提升或下降。 - The chapter.xml files are not - complete XML documents that can be - built individually. They can only be built - as parts of the whole Handbook. + chapter.xml 檔案並不是可以被單獨建置的完整 XML 文件，只能做為使用手冊的一部份來建置。 - The Documentation Build Process + 說明文件建置流程 - This chapter covers organization of the documentation build - process and how make1 is used to control it. + 本章內容涵蓋了說明文件建置流程以及如何使用 make1 來控制如何建置。 - Rendering DocBook into Output + 繪製 Docbook 為其他格式 - Different types of output can be produced from a single - DocBook source file. The type of output desired is set with the - FORMATS variable. A list of known formats is - stored in KNOWN_FORMATS: + 從單一個 DocBook 原始檔可以產生各種不同類型的輸出，想要輸出的類型可用 FORMATS 變數來設定。已知的格式清單列在 KNOWN_FORMATS 中： % cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook % make -V KNOWN_FORMATS - Common Output Formats + 常見輸出格式 - FORMATS Value - File Type - Description + FORMATS 值 + 檔案類型 + 說明 html - HTML, one file - A single book.html or - article.html. + HTML，單檔 + 單一 book.html 或 article.html。 html-split - HTML, multiple files - Multiple HTML files, one for - each chapter or section, for use on a typical web - site. + HTML，多檔 + 多個 HTML 檔案，每個章或節一個檔案，供一般網站使用。 pdf PDF - Portable Document Format + 可攜的文件格式
- The default output format can vary by document, but is - usually html-split. Other formats are chosen - by setting FORMATS to a specific value. - Multiple output formats can be created at a single time by - setting FORMATS to a list of formats. + 預設輸出的格式會依文件而有所不同，但同常是 html-split。其他格式可設定 FORMATS 為特定值來選擇。在 FORMATS 設定所需格式的清單可一次輸出多個格式。 - Build a Single HTML Output File + 建置單頁 HTML 輸出檔 % cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook % make FORMATS=html - Build HTML-Split and <acronym>PDF</acronym> Output - Files + 建置分頁 HTML 及 <acronym>PDF</acronym> 輸出檔 % cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook % make FORMATS="html-split pdf" - The FreeBSD Documentation Build Toolset + FreeBSD 說明文件建置工具集 - These are the tools used to build and install the - FDP documentation. + 建置與安裝 FDP 說明文件會使用到以下工具。 - The primary build tool is make1, specifically - Berkeley Make. + 主要的建置工具為 make1，特別是 Berkeley Make。 - Package building is handled by FreeBSD's - pkg-create8. + 套件建置會使用 FreeBSD 的 pkg-create8 來處理。 - gzip1 is used to create compressed versions of - the document. bzip21 archives are also supported. - tar1 is used for package building. + gzip1 用來建立壓縮版的文件，也支援 bzip21 封存。tar1 則用在套件建置。 - install1 is used to install the - documentation. + install1 用來安裝說明文件。 - Understanding <filename>Makefile</filename>s in the - Documentation Tree + 了解在說明文件樹中的 <filename>Makefile</filename> - There are three main types of Makefiles - in the FreeBSD Documentation Project tree. + 在 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃樹底下的 Makefile 主要有三個類型。 - Subdirectory - Makefiles simply pass - commands to those directories below them. + 子目錄的 Makefile 傳遞指令給在其所在目錄底下的目錄。 - Documentation - Makefiles describe the - documents that are produced from this - directory. + 說明文件的 Makefiles 用來描述要如何在其所在目錄產生文件。 - Make - includes are the glue that perform the document - production, and are usually of the form - doc.xxx.mk. + Make 引用檔 會連結一些產生文件所需的程式，通常為 doc.xxx.mk。 - Subdirectory <filename>Makefile</filename>s + 子目錄的 <filename>Makefile</filename> These Makefiles usually take the form of: SUBDIR =articles SUBDIR+=books COMPAT_SYMLINK = en DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/.. .include "${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk" The first four non-empty lines define the make1 variables SUBDIR, COMPAT_SYMLINK, and DOC_PREFIX. The SUBDIR statement and COMPAT_SYMLINK statement show how to assign a value to a variable, overriding any previous value. The second SUBDIR statement shows how a value is appended to the current value of a variable. The SUBDIR variable is now articles books. The DOC_PREFIX assignment shows how a value is assigned to the variable, but only if it is not already defined. This is useful if DOC_PREFIX is not where this Makefile thinks it is - the user can override this and provide the correct value. What does it all mean? SUBDIR mentions which subdirectories below this one the build process should pass any work on to. COMPAT_SYMLINK is specific to compatibility symlinks (amazingly enough) for languages to their official encoding (doc/en would point to en_US.ISO-8859-1). DOC_PREFIX is the path to the root of the FreeBSD Document Project tree. This is not always that easy to find, and is also easily overridden, to allow for flexibility. .CURDIR is a make1 builtin variable with the path to the current directory. The final line includes the FreeBSD Documentation Project's project-wide make1 system file doc.project.mk which is the glue which converts these variables into build instructions. - Documentation <filename>Makefile</filename>s + 說明文件的 <filename>Makefile</filename> - These Makefiles set make1 - variables that describe how to build the documentation - contained in that directory. + 這些 Makefile 用來設定 make1 變數來描述要如何建置在該目錄中的說明文件。 - Here is an example: + 這裡有一個例子： MAINTAINER=nik@FreeBSD.org DOC?= book FORMATS?= html-split html INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?= # SGML content SRCS= book.xml DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../.. .include "$(DOC_PREFIX)/share/mk/docproj.docbook.mk" - The MAINTAINER variable allows - committers to claim ownership of a document in the FreeBSD - Documentation Project, and take responsibility for maintaining - it. + MAINTAINER 變數讓提交者可以聲明文件在 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃中的所有權，並負責維護該文件。 - DOC is the name (sans the - .xml extension) of the main document - created by this directory. SRCS lists all - the individual files that make up the document. This should - also include important files in which a change should result - in a rebuild. + DOC 是由此目錄會建立的主要文件的名稱 (不需要 .xml 副檔名)。SRCS 會列出產生文件所需的各別檔案，此處也應引用要在重新建置 (Rebuild) 使用的重要的檔案。 - FORMATS indicates the default formats - that should be built for this document. - INSTALL_COMPRESSED is the default list of - compression techniques that should be used in the document - build. INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESS, empty by - default, should be non-empty if only compressed documents are - desired in the build. + FORMATS 用來指定此份文件建置時預設應採用的格式。INSTALL_COMPRESSED 是為在文件建置時預設要使用的壓縮技術清單。INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESS 預設為空值的，若在建置時只想要產生壓縮後的文件則改成非空值。 - The DOC_PREFIX and include statements - should be familiar already. + DOC_PREFIX 以及 include 敘述句應不需再說明了。 - FreeBSD Documentation Project - <application>Make</application> Includes + FreeBSD 說明文件計劃 <application>Make</application> 引用檔 make1 includes are best explained by inspection of the code. Here are the system include files: doc.project.mk is the main project include file, which includes all the following include files, as necessary. doc.subdir.mk handles traversing of the document tree during the build and install processes. doc.install.mk provides variables that affect ownership and installation of documents. doc.docbook.mk is included if DOCFORMAT is docbook and DOC is set. <filename>doc.project.mk</filename> By inspection: DOCFORMAT?= docbook MAINTAINER?= doc@FreeBSD.org PREFIX?= /usr/local PRI_LANG?= en_US.ISO8859-1 .if defined(DOC) .if ${DOCFORMAT} == "docbook" .include "doc.docbook.mk" .endif .endif .include "doc.subdir.mk" .include "doc.install.mk" - Variables + 變數 DOCFORMAT and MAINTAINER are assigned default values, if these are not set by the document make file. PREFIX is the prefix under which the documentation building tools are installed. For normal package and port installation, this is /usr/local. PRI_LANG should be set to whatever language and encoding is natural amongst users these documents are being built for. US English is the default. PRI_LANG does not affect which documents can, or even will, be built. Its main use is creating links to commonly referenced documents into the FreeBSD documentation install root. - Conditionals + 條件 The .if defined(DOC) line is an example of a make1 conditional which, like in other programs, defines behavior if some condition is true or if it is false. defined is a function which returns whether the variable given is defined or not. .if ${DOCFORMAT} == "docbook", next, tests whether the DOCFORMAT variable is "docbook", and in this case, includes doc.docbook.mk. The two .endifs close the two above conditionals, marking the end of their application. <filename>doc.subdir.mk</filename> This file is too long to explain in detail. These notes describe the most important features. - Variables + 變數 SUBDIR is a list of subdirectories that the build process should go further down into. ROOT_SYMLINKS is the name of directories that should be linked to the document install root from their actual locations, if the current language is the primary language (specified by PRI_LANG). COMPAT_SYMLINK is described in the Subdirectory Makefile section. - Targets and Macros + 目標與巨集 Dependencies are described by target: dependency1 dependency2 ... tuples, where to build target, the given dependencies must be built first. After that descriptive tuple, instructions on how to build the target may be given, if the conversion process between the target and its dependencies are not previously defined, or if this particular conversion is not the same as the default conversion method. A special dependency .USE defines the equivalent of a macro. _SUBDIRUSE: .USE .for entry in ${SUBDIR} @${ECHO} "===> ${DIRPRFX}${entry}" @(cd ${.CURDIR}/${entry} && \ ${MAKE} ${.TARGET:S/realpackage/package/:S/realinstall/install/} DIRPRFX=${DIRPRFX}${entry}/ ) .endfor In the above, _SUBDIRUSE is now a macro which will execute the given commands when it is listed as a dependency. What sets this macro apart from other targets? Basically, it is executed after the instructions given in the build procedure it is listed as a dependency to, and it does not adjust .TARGET, which is the variable which contains the name of the target currently being built. clean: _SUBDIRUSE rm -f ${CLEANFILES} In the above, clean will use the _SUBDIRUSE macro after it has executed the instruction rm -f ${CLEANFILES}. In effect, this causes clean to go further and further down the directory tree, deleting built files as it goes down, not on the way back up. - Provided Targets + 已提供的目標 install and package both go down the directory tree calling the real versions of themselves in the subdirectories (realinstall and realpackage respectively). clean removes files created by the build process (and goes down the directory tree too). cleandir does the same, and also removes the object directory, if any. - More on Conditionals + 更多條件 exists is another condition function which returns true if the given file exists. empty returns true if the given variable is empty. target returns true if the given target does not already exist. - Looping Constructs in <command>make - (.for)</command> + 在 <command>make (.for)</command> 中的迴圈結構 .for provides a way to repeat a set of instructions for each space-separated element in a variable. It does this by assigning a variable to contain the current element in the list being examined. _SUBDIRUSE: .USE .for entry in ${SUBDIR} @${ECHO} "===> ${DIRPRFX}${entry}" @(cd ${.CURDIR}/${entry} && \ ${MAKE} ${.TARGET:S/realpackage/package/:S/realinstall/install/} DIRPRFX=${DIRPRFX}${entry}/ ) .endfor In the above, if SUBDIR is empty, no action is taken; if it has one or more elements, the instructions between .for and .endfor would repeat for every element, with entry being replaced with the value of the current element. 網站 FreeBSD 網站是 FreeBSD 文件的一部份。網站的檔案儲存在文件樹目錄，此例中是 ~/doc，的 en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs 子目錄。 環境變數 - 有些環境變數控制網站的建構或安裝，和裝到哪個目錄 + Several environment variables control which parts of the + web site are built or installed, and to which + directories. The web build system uses make1, and considers variables to be set when they have been defined, even if they are empty. The examples here show the recommended ways of defining and using these variables. Setting or defining these variables with other values or methods might lead to unexpected surprises. DESTDIR DESTDIR specifies the path where the web site files are to be installed. This variable is best set with env1 or the user shell's method of setting environment variables, setenv for csh1 or export for sh1. ENGLISH_ONLY Default: undefined. Build and include all translations. ENGLISH_ONLY=yes: use only the English documents and ignore all translations. WEB_ONLY Default: undefined. Build both the web site and all the books and articles. WEB_ONLY=yes: build or install only HTML pages from the en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs directory. Other directories and documents, including books and articles, will be ignored. WEB_LANG Default: undefined. Build and include all the available languages on the web site. Set to a space-separated list of languages to be included in the build or install. The formats are the same as the directory names in the document root directory. For example, to include the German and French documents: WEB_LANG="de_DE.ISO8859-1 fr_FR.ISO8859-1" WEB_ONLY, WEB_LANG, and ENGLISH_ONLY are make1 variables and can be set in /etc/make.conf, Makefile.inc, as environment variables on the command line, or in dot files. - Building and Installing the Web Pages + 建置並安裝網頁 Having obtained the documentation and web site source files, the web site can be built. An actual installation of the web site is run as the root user because the permissions on the web server directory will not allow files to be installed by an unprivileged user. For testing, it can be useful to install the files as a normal user to a temporary directory. In these examples, the web site files are built by user jru in their home directory, ~/doc, with a full path of /usr/home/jru/doc. The web site build uses the INDEX from the Ports Collection and might fail if that file or /usr/ports is not present. The simplest approach is to install the Ports Collection. - Build the Full Web Site and All Documents + 建置完整網站與所有說明文件 Build the web site and all documents. The resulting files are left in the document tree: % cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs/ % make all - Build Only the Web Site in English + 只建置英文版網站 Build the web site only, in English, as user jru, and install the resulting files into /tmp/www for testing: % cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs/ % env DESTDIR=/tmp/www make ENGLISH_ONLY=yes WEB_ONLY=yes all install Changes to static files can usually be tested by viewing the modified files directly with a web browser. If the site has been built as shown above, a modified main page can be viewed with: % firefox /tmp/www/data/index.html Modifications to dynamic files can be tested with a web server running on the local system. After building the site as shown above, this /usr/local/etc/apache24/httpd.conf can be used with www/apache24: # httpd.conf for testing the FreeBSD website Define TestRoot "/tmp/www/data" # directory for configuration files ServerRoot "/usr/local" Listen 80 # minimum required modules LoadModule authz_core_module libexec/apache24/mod_authz_core.so LoadModule mime_module libexec/apache24/mod_mime.so LoadModule unixd_module libexec/apache24/mod_unixd.so LoadModule cgi_module libexec/apache24/mod_cgi.so LoadModule dir_module libexec/apache24/mod_dir.so # run the webserver as user and group User www Group www ServerAdmin you@example.com ServerName fbsdtest # deny access to all files <Directory /> AllowOverride none Require all denied </Directory> # allow access to the website directory DocumentRoot "${TestRoot}" <Directory "${TestRoot}"> Options Indexes FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Require all granted </Directory> # prevent access to .htaccess and .htpasswd files <Files ".ht*"> Require all denied </Files> ErrorLog "/var/log/httpd-error.log" LogLevel warn # set up the CGI script directory <Directory "${TestRoot}/cgi"> AllowOverride None Options None Require all granted Options +ExecCGI AddHandler cgi-script .cgi </Directory> Include etc/apache24/Includes/*.conf Start the web server with # service apache24 onestart The web site can be viewed at . Be aware that many links refer to the real FreeBSD site by name, and those links will still go to the external site instead of the local test version. Fully testing the local site will require temporarily setting DNS so www.FreeBSD.org resolves to localhost or the local IP address. - Build and Install the Web Site + 建置並安裝網站 Build the web site and all documents as user jru. Install the resulting files as root into the default directory, /root/public_html: % cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs % make all % su - Password: # cd /usr/home/jru/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs # make install The install process does not delete any old or outdated files that existed previously in the same directory. If a new copy of the site is built and installed every day, this command will find and delete all files that have not been updated in three days: # find /usr/local/www -ctime 3 -delete - XML Primer + XML 入門 Most FDP documentation is written with markup languages based on XML. This chapter explains what that means, how to read and understand the documentation source, and the XML techniques used. Portions of this section were inspired by Mark Galassi's Get Going With DocBook. 概論 In the original days of computers, electronic text was simple. There were a few character sets like ASCII or EBCDIC, but that was about it. Text was text, and what you saw really was what you got. No frills, no formatting, no intelligence. Inevitably, this was not enough. When text is in a machine-usable format, machines are expected to be able to use and manipulate it intelligently. Authors want to indicate that certain phrases should be emphasized, or added to a glossary, or made into hyperlinks. Filenames could be shown in a typewriter style font for viewing on screen, but as italics when printed, or any of a myriad of other options for presentation. It was once hoped that Artificial Intelligence (AI) would make this easy. The computer would read the document and automatically identify key phrases, filenames, text that the reader should type in, examples, and more. Unfortunately, real life has not happened quite like that, and computers still require assistance before they can meaningfully process text. More precisely, they need help identifying what is what. Consider this text:
To remove /tmp/foo, use rm1. % rm /tmp/foo
It is easy to see which parts are filenames, which are commands to be typed in, which parts are references to manual pages, and so on. But the computer processing the document cannot. For this we need markup. Markup is commonly used to describe adding value or increasing cost. The term takes on both these meanings when applied to text. Markup is additional text included in the document, distinguished from the document's content in some way, so that programs that process the document can read the markup and use it when making decisions about the document. Editors can hide the markup from the user, so the user is not distracted by it. The extra information stored in the markup adds value to the document. Adding the markup to the document must typically be done by a person—after all, if computers could recognize the text sufficiently well to add the markup then there would be no need to add it in the first place. This increases the cost (the effort required) to create the document. The previous example is actually represented in this document like this: paraTo remove filename/tmp/foofilename, use &man.rm.1;.para screen&prompt.user; userinputrm /tmp/foouserinputscreen The markup is clearly separate from the content. Markup languages define what the markup means and how it should be interpreted. Of course, one markup language might not be enough. A markup language for technical documentation has very different requirements than a markup language that is intended for cookery recipes. This, in turn, would be very different from a markup language used to describe poetry. What is really needed is a first language used to write these other markup languages. A meta markup language. This is exactly what the eXtensible Markup Language (XML) is. Many markup languages have been written in XML, including the two most used by the FDP, XHTML and DocBook. Each language definition is more properly called a grammar, vocabulary, schema or Document Type Definition (DTD). There are various languages to specify an XML grammar, or schema. A schema is a complete specification of all the elements that are allowed to appear, the order in which they should appear, which elements are mandatory, which are optional, and so forth. This makes it possible to write an XML parser which reads in both the schema and a document which claims to conform to the schema. The parser can then confirm whether or not all the elements required by the vocabulary are in the document in the right order, and whether there are any errors in the markup. This is normally referred to as validating the document. Validation confirms that the choice of elements, their ordering, and so on, conforms to that listed in the grammar. It does not check whether appropriate markup has been used for the content. If all the filenames in a document were marked up as function names, the parser would not flag this as an error (assuming, of course, that the schema defines elements for filenames and functions, and that they are allowed to appear in the same place). Most contributions to the Documentation Project will be content marked up in either XHTML or DocBook, rather than alterations to the schemas. For this reason, this book will not touch on how to write a vocabulary. - Elements, Tags, and Attributes + 元素、標籤與屬性 All the vocabularies written in XML share certain characteristics. This is hardly surprising, as the philosophy behind XML will inevitably show through. One of the most obvious manifestations of this philosophy is that of content and elements. Documentation, whether it is a single web page, or a lengthy book, is considered to consist of content. This content is then divided and further subdivided into elements. The purpose of adding markup is to name and identify the boundaries of these elements for further processing. For example, consider a typical book. At the very top level, the book is itself an element. This book element obviously contains chapters, which can be considered to be elements in their own right. Each chapter will contain more elements, such as paragraphs, quotations, and footnotes. Each paragraph might contain further elements, identifying content that was direct speech, or the name of a character in the story. It may be helpful to think of this as chunking content. At the very top level is one chunk, the book. Look a little deeper, and there are more chunks, the individual chapters. These are chunked further into paragraphs, footnotes, character names, and so on. Notice how this differentiation between different elements of the content can be made without resorting to any XML terms. It really is surprisingly straightforward. This could be done with a highlighter pen and a printout of the book, using different colors to indicate different chunks of content. Of course, we do not have an electronic highlighter pen, so we need some other way of indicating which element each piece of content belongs to. In languages written in XML (XHTML, DocBook, et al) this is done by means of tags. A tag is used to identify where a particular element starts, and where the element ends. The tag is not part of the element itself. Because each grammar was normally written to mark up specific types of information, each one will recognize different elements, and will therefore have different names for the tags. For an element called element-name the start tag will normally look like element-name. The corresponding closing tag for this element is element-name. - Using an Element (Start and End Tags) + 使用元素 (開始與結束標籤) XHTML has an element for indicating that the content enclosed by the element is a paragraph, called p. pThis is a paragraph. It starts with the start tag for the 'p' element, and it will end with the end tag for the 'p' element.p pThis is another paragraph. But this one is much shorter.p Some elements have no content. For example, in XHTML, a horizontal line can be included in the document. For these empty elements, XML introduced a shorthand form that is completely equivalent to the two-tag version: - Using an Element Without Content + 使用沒有內容的元素 XHTML has an element for indicating a horizontal rule, called hr. This element does not wrap content, so it looks like this: pOne paragraph.p hrhr pThis is another paragraph. A horizontal rule separates this from the previous paragraph.p The shorthand version consists of a single tag: pOne paragraph.p hr pThis is another paragraph. A horizontal rule separates this from the previous paragraph.p As shown above, elements can contain other elements. In the book example earlier, the book element contained all the chapter elements, which in turn contained all the paragraph elements, and so on. - Elements Within Elements; <tag>em</tag> + 在元素中的元素; <tag>em</tag> pThis is a simple emparagraphem where some of the emwordsem have been ememphasizedem.p The grammar consists of rules that describe which elements can contain other elements, and exactly what they can contain. People often confuse the terms tags and elements, and use the terms as if they were interchangeable. They are not. An element is a conceptual part of your document. An element has a defined start and end. The tags mark where the element starts and ends. When this document (or anyone else knowledgeable about XML) refers to the p tag they mean the literal text consisting of the three characters <, p, and >. But the phrase the p element refers to the whole element. This distinction is very subtle. But keep it in mind. Elements can have attributes. An attribute has a name and a value, and is used for adding extra information to the element. This might be information that indicates how the content should be rendered, or might be something that uniquely identifies that occurrence of the element, or it might be something else. An element's attributes are written inside the start tag for that element, and take the form attribute-name="attribute-value". In XHTML, the p element has an attribute called align, which suggests an alignment (justification) for the paragraph to the program displaying the XHTML. The align attribute can take one of four defined values, left, center, right and justify. If the attribute is not specified then the default is left. - Using an Element with an Attribute + 使用元素的屬性 p align="left"The inclusion of the align attribute on this paragraph was superfluous, since the default is left.p p align="center"This may appear in the center.p Some attributes only take specific values, such as left or justify. Others allow any value. - Single Quotes Around Attributes + 屬性的單引號 p align='right'I am on the right!p Attribute values in XML must be enclosed in either single or double quotes. Double quotes are traditional. Single quotes are useful when the attribute value contains double quotes. Information about attributes, elements, and tags is stored in catalog files. The Documentation Project uses standard DocBook catalogs and includes additional catalogs for FreeBSD-specific features. Paths to the catalog files are defined in an environment variable so they can be found by the document build tools. - To Do… + 待辦事項... Before running the examples in this document, install textproc/docproj from the FreeBSD Ports Collection. This is a meta-port that downloads and installs the standard programs and supporting files needed by the Documentation Project. csh1 users must use rehash for the shell to recognize new programs after they have been installed, or log out and then log back in again. Create example.xml, and enter this text: !DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" head titleAn Example XHTML Filetitle head body pThis is a paragraph containing some text.p pThis paragraph contains some more text.p p align="right"This paragraph might be right-justified.p body html Try to validate this file using an XML parser. textproc/docproj includes the xmllint validating parser. Use xmllint to validate the document: % xmllint --valid --noout example.xml xmllint returns without displaying any output, showing that the document validated successfully. See what happens when required elements are omitted. Delete the line with the title and title tags, and re-run the validation. % xmllint --valid --noout example.xml example.xml:5: element head: validity error : Element head content does not follow the DTD, expecting ((script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)* , ((title , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)* , (base , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)*)?) | (base , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)* , title , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)*))), got () This shows that the validation error comes from the fifth line of the example.xml file and that the content of the head is the part which does not follow the rules of the XHTML grammar. Then xmllint shows the line where the error was found and marks the exact character position with a ^ sign. Replace the title element. - The DOCTYPE Declaration + DOCTYPE 宣告 The beginning of each document can specify the name of the DTD to which the document conforms. This DOCTYPE declaration is used by XML parsers to identify the DTD and ensure that the document does conform to it. A typical declaration for a document written to conform with version 1.0 of the XHTML DTD looks like this: !DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" That line contains a number of different components. <! The indicator shows this is an XML declaration. DOCTYPE Shows that this is an XML declaration of the document type. html Names the first element that will appear in the document. PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" Lists the Formal Public Identifier (FPI) Formal Public Identifier for the DTD to which this document conforms. The XML parser uses this to find the correct DTD when processing this document. PUBLIC is not a part of the FPI, but indicates to the XML processor how to find the DTD referenced in the FPI. Other ways of telling the XML parser how to find the DTD are shown later. "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" A local filename or a URL to find the DTD. > Ends the declaration and returns to the document. - Formal Public Identifiers - (<acronym>FPI</acronym>s) + 正式公用識別碼 (<acronym>FPI</acronym>) Formal Public Identifier It is not necessary to know this, but it is useful background, and might help debug problems when the XML processor can not locate the DTD. FPIs must follow a specific syntax: "Owner//Keyword Description//Language" Owner The owner of the FPI. The beginning of the string identifies the owner of the FPI. For example, the FPI "ISO 8879:1986//ENTITIES Greek Symbols//EN" lists ISO 8879:1986 as being the owner for the set of entities for Greek symbols. ISO 8879:1986 is the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) number for the SGML standard, the predecessor (and a superset) of XML. Otherwise, this string will either look like -//Owner or +//Owner (notice the only difference is the leading + or -). If the string starts with - then the owner information is unregistered, with a + identifying it as registered. ISO 9070:1991 defines how registered names are generated. It might be derived from the number of an ISO publication, an ISBN code, or an organization code assigned according to ISO 6523. Additionally, a registration authority could be created in order to assign registered names. The ISO council delegated this to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Because the FreeBSD Project has not been registered, the owner string is -//FreeBSD. As seen in the example, the W3C are not a registered owner either. Keyword There are several keywords that indicate the type of information in the file. Some of the most common keywords are DTD, ELEMENT, ENTITIES, and TEXT. DTD is used only for DTD files, ELEMENT is usually used for DTD fragments that contain only entity or element declarations. TEXT is used for XML content (text and tags). Description Any description can be given for the contents of this file. This may include version numbers or any short text that is meaningful and unique for the XML system. Language An ISO two-character code that identifies the native language for the file. EN is used for English. - <filename>catalog</filename> Files + <filename>catalog</filename> 檔案 With the syntax above, an XML processor needs to have some way of turning the FPI into the name of the file containing the DTD. A catalog file (typically called catalog) contains lines that map FPIs to filenames. For example, if the catalog file contained the line: PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "1.0/transitional.dtd" The XML processor knows that the DTD is called transitional.dtd in the 1.0 subdirectory of the directory that held catalog. Examine the contents of /usr/local/share/xml/dtd/xhtml/catalog.xml. This is the catalog file for the XHTML DTDs that were installed as part of the textproc/docproj port. - Alternatives to <acronym>FPI</acronym>s + <acronym>FPI</acronym> 的替代方案 Instead of using an FPI to indicate the DTD to which the document conforms (and therefore, which file on the system contains the DTD), the filename can be explicitly specified. The syntax is slightly different: !DOCTYPE html SYSTEM "/path/to/file.dtd" The SYSTEM keyword indicates that the XML processor should locate the DTD in a system specific fashion. This typically (but not always) means the DTD will be provided as a filename. Using FPIs is preferred for reasons of portability. If the SYSTEM identifier is used, then the DTD must be provided and kept in the same location for everyone. - Escaping Back to <acronym>XML</acronym> + 跳脫回 <acronym>XML</acronym> Some of the underlying XML syntax can be useful within documents. For example, comments can be included in the document, and will be ignored by the parser. Comments are entered using XML syntax. Other uses for XML syntax will be shown later. XML sections begin with a <! tag and end with a >. These sections contain instructions for the parser rather than elements of the document. Everything between these tags is XML syntax. The DOCTYPE declaration shown earlier is an example of XML syntax included in the document. - Comments + 註解 An XML document may contain comments. They may appear anywhere as long as they are not inside tags. They are even allowed in some locations inside the DTD (e.g., between entity declarations). XML comments start with the string <!-- and end with the string -->. Here are some examples of valid XML comments: - <acronym>XML</acronym> Generic Comments + <acronym>XML</acronym> 通用註解 <!-- This is inside the comment --> <!--This is another comment--> <!-- This is how you write multiline comments --> <p>A simple <!-- Comment inside an element's content --> paragraph.</p> XML comments may contain any strings except --: - Erroneous <acronym>XML</acronym> Comment + 錯誤的<acronym>XML</acronym> 註解 <!-- This comment--is wrong --> - To Do… + 待辦事項... Add some comments to example.xml, and check that the file still validates using xmllint. Add some invalid comments to example.xml, and see the error messages that xmllint gives when it encounters an invalid comment. - Entities + Entities Entities are a mechanism for assigning names to chunks of content. As an XML parser processes a document, any entities it finds are replaced by the content of the entity. This is a good way to have re-usable, easily changeable chunks of content in XML documents. It is also the only way to include one marked up file inside another using XML. There are two types of entities for two different situations: general entities and parameter entities. - General Entities + 一般 Entities General entities are used to assign names to reusable chunks of text. These entities can only be used in the document. They cannot be used in an XML context. To include the text of a general entity in the document, include &entity-name; in the text. For example, consider a general entity called current.version which expands to the current version number of a product. To use it in the document, write: paraThe current version of our product is &current.version;.para When the version number changes, edit the definition of the general entity, replacing the value. Then reprocess the document. General entities can also be used to enter characters that could not otherwise be included in an XML document. For example, < and & cannot normally appear in an XML document. The XML parser sees the < symbol as the start of a tag. Likewise, when the & symbol is seen, the next text is expected to be an entity name. These symbols can be included by using two predefined general entities: &lt; and &amp;. General entities can only be defined within an XML context. Such definitions are usually done immediately after the DOCTYPE declaration. - Defining General Entities + 定義一般 Entities <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [ <!ENTITY current.version "3.0-RELEASE"> <!ENTITY last.version "2.2.7-RELEASE"> ]> The DOCTYPE declaration has been extended by adding a square bracket at the end of the first line. The two entities are then defined over the next two lines, the square bracket is closed, and then the DOCTYPE declaration is closed. The square brackets are necessary to indicate that the DTD indicated by the DOCTYPE declaration is being extended. - Parameter Entities + 參數 Entities Parameter entities, like general entities, are used to assign names to reusable chunks of text. But parameter entities can only be used within an XML context. Parameter entity definitions are similar to those for general entities. However, parameter entries are included with %entity-name;. The definition also includes the % between the ENTITY keyword and the name of the entity. For a mnemonic, think Parameter entities use the Percent symbol. - Defining Parameter Entities + 定義參數 Entities <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [ <!ENTITY % param.some "some"> <!ENTITY % param.text "text"> <!ENTITY % param.new "%param.some more %param.text"> <!-- %param.new now contains "some more text" --> ]> - To Do… + 待辦事項... Add a general entity to example.xml. <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [ <!ENTITY version "1.1"> ]> html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" head titleAn Example XHTML Filetitle head <!-- There may be some comments in here as well --> body pThis is a paragraph containing some text.p pThis paragraph contains some more text.p p align="right"This paragraph might be right-justified.p pThe current version of this document is: &version;p body html Validate the document using xmllint. Load example.xml into a web browser. It may have to be copied to example.html before the browser recognizes it as an XHTML document. Older browsers with simple parsers may not render this file as expected. The entity reference &version; may not be replaced by the version number, or the XML context closing ]> may not be recognized and instead shown in the output. The solution is to normalize the document with an XML normalizer. The normalizer reads valid XML and writes equally valid XML which has been transformed in some way. One way the normalizer transforms the input is by expanding all the entity references in the document, replacing the entities with the text that they represent. xmllint can be used for this. It also has an option to drop the initial DTD section so that the closing ]> does not confuse browsers: % xmllint --noent --dropdtd example.xml > example.html A normalized copy of the document with entities expanded is produced in example.html, ready to load into a web browser. - Using Entities to Include Files + 在引用檔使用 Entities Both general and parameter entities are particularly useful for including one file inside another. - Using General Entities to Include Files + 在引用檔使用一般 Entities Consider some content for an XML book organized into files, one file per chapter, called chapter1.xml, chapter2.xml, and so forth, with a book.xml that will contain these chapters. In order to use the contents of these files as the values for entities, they are declared with the SYSTEM keyword. This directs the XML parser to include the contents of the named file as the value of the entity. - Using General Entities to Include Files + 在引用檔使用一般 Entities <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [ <!ENTITY chapter.1 SYSTEM "chapter1.xml"> <!ENTITY chapter.2 SYSTEM "chapter2.xml"> <!ENTITY chapter.3 SYSTEM "chapter3.xml"> <!-- And so forth --> ]> html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" <!-- Use the entities to load in the chapters --> &chapter.1; &chapter.2; &chapter.3; html When using general entities to include other files within a document, the files being included (chapter1.xml, chapter2.xml, and so on) must not start with a DOCTYPE declaration. This is a syntax error because entities are low-level constructs and they are resolved before any parsing happens. - Using Parameter Entities to Include Files + 在引用檔使用參數 Entities Parameter entities can only be used inside an XML context. Including a file in an XML context can be used to ensure that general entities are reusable. Suppose that there are many chapters in the document, and these chapters were reused in two different books, each book organizing the chapters in a different fashion. The entities could be listed at the top of each book, but that quickly becomes cumbersome to manage. Instead, place the general entity definitions inside one file, and use a parameter entity to include that file within the document. - Using Parameter Entities to Include Files + 在引用檔使用參數 Entities Place the entity definitions in a separate file called chapters.ent and containing this text: <!ENTITY chapter.1 SYSTEM "chapter1.xml"> <!ENTITY chapter.2 SYSTEM "chapter2.xml"> <!ENTITY chapter.3 SYSTEM "chapter3.xml"> Create a parameter entity to refer to the contents of the file. Then use the parameter entity to load the file into the document, which will then make all the general entities available for use. Then use the general entities as before: <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [ <!-- Define a parameter entity to load in the chapter general entities --> <!ENTITY % chapters SYSTEM "chapters.ent"> <!-- Now use the parameter entity to load in this file --> %chapters; ]> html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" &chapter.1; &chapter.2; &chapter.3; html - To Do… + 待辦事項... - Use General Entities to Include Files + 在引用檔使用一般 Entities Create three files, para1.xml, para2.xml, and para3.xml. Put content like this in each file: pThis is the first paragraph.p Edit example.xml so that it looks like this: <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [ <!ENTITY version "1.1"> <!ENTITY para1 SYSTEM "para1.xml"> <!ENTITY para2 SYSTEM "para2.xml"> <!ENTITY para3 SYSTEM "para3.xml"> ]> html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" head titleAn Example XHTML Filetitle head body pThe current version of this document is: &version;p &para1; &para2; &para3; body html Produce example.html by normalizing example.xml. % xmllint --dropdtd --noent example.xml > example.html Load example.html into the web browser and confirm that the paran.xml files have been included in example.html. - Use Parameter Entities to Include Files + 在引用檔使用參數 Entities The previous steps must have completed before this step. Edit example.xml so that it looks like this: <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [ <!ENTITY % entities SYSTEM "entities.ent"> %entities; ]> html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" head titleAn Example XHTML Filetitle head body pThe current version of this document is: &version;p &para1; &para2; &para3; body html Create a new file called entities.ent with this content: <!ENTITY version "1.1"> <!ENTITY para1 SYSTEM "para1.xml"> <!ENTITY para2 SYSTEM "para2.xml"> <!ENTITY para3 SYSTEM "para3.xml"> Produce example.html by normalizing example.xml. % xmllint --dropdtd --noent example.xml > example.html Load example.html into the web browser and confirm that the paran.xml files have been included in example.html. - Marked Sections + 已標記小節 XML provides a mechanism to indicate that particular pieces of the document should be processed in a special way. These are called marked sections. - Structure of a Marked Section + 已標記的結構 <![KEYWORD[ Contents of marked section ]]> As expected of an XML construct, a marked section starts with <!. The first square bracket begins the marked section. KEYWORD describes how this marked section is to be processed by the parser. The second square bracket indicates the start of the marked section's content. The marked section is finished by closing the two square brackets, and then returning to the document context from the XML context with >. - Marked Section Keywords + 已標記關鍵字 <literal>CDATA</literal> These keywords denote the marked sections content model, and allow you to change it from the default. When an XML parser is processing a document, it keeps track of the content model. The content model describes the content the parser is expecting to see and what it will do with that content. The CDATA content model is one of the most useful. CDATA is for Character Data. When the parser is in this content model, it expects to see only characters. In this model the < and & symbols lose their special status, and will be treated as ordinary characters. When using CDATA in examples of text marked up in XML, remember that the content of CDATA is not validated. The included text must be check with other means. For example, the content could be written in another document, validated, and then pasted into the CDATA section. - Using a <literal>CDATA</literal> Marked - Section + 使用 <literal>CDATA</literal> 已標記小節 paraHere is an example of how to include some text that contains many literal&lt;literal and literal&amp;literal symbols. The sample text is a fragment of acronymXHTMLacronym. The surrounding text (para and programlisting) are from DocBook.para programlisting<![CDATA[pThis is a sample that shows some of the elements within acronymXHTMLacronym. Since the angle brackets are used so many times, it is simpler to say the whole example is a CDATA marked section than to use the entity names for the left and right angle brackets throughout.p ul liThis is a listitemli liThis is a second listitemli liThis is a third listitemli ul pThis is the end of the example.p]]>programlisting - <literal>INCLUDE</literal> and - <literal>IGNORE</literal> + <literal>INCLUDE</literal> 與 <literal>IGNORE</literal> When the keyword is INCLUDE, then the contents of the marked section will be processed. When the keyword is IGNORE, the marked section is ignored and will not be processed. It will not appear in the output. - Using <literal>INCLUDE</literal> and - <literal>IGNORE</literal> in Marked Sections + 在已標記小節中使用 <literal>INCLUDE</literal> 及 <literal>IGNORE</literal> <![INCLUDE[ This text will be processed and included. ]]> <![IGNORE[ This text will not be processed or included. ]]> By itself, this is not too useful. Text to be removed from the document could be cut out, or wrapped in comments. It becomes more useful when controlled by parameter entities, yet this usage is limited to entity files. For example, suppose that documentation was produced in a hard-copy version and an electronic version. Some extra text is desired in the electronic version content that was not to appear in the hard-copy. Create an entity file that defines general entities to include each chapter and guard these definitions with a parameter entity that can be set to either INCLUDE or IGNORE to control whether the entity is defined. After these conditional general entity definitions, place one more definition for each general entity to set them to an empty value. This technique makes use of the fact that entity definitions cannot be overridden but the first definition always takes effect. So the inclusion of the chapter is controlled with the corresponding parameter entity. Set to INCLUDE, the first general entity definition will be read and the second one will be ignored. Set to IGNORE, the first definition will be ignored and the second one will take effect. - Using a Parameter Entity to Control a Marked - Section + 使用參數 Entities 來控制已標記小節 <!ENTITY % electronic.copy "INCLUDE"> <![%electronic.copy;[ <!ENTITY chap.preface SYSTEM "preface.xml"> ]]> <!ENTITY chap.preface ""> When producing the hard-copy version, change the parameter entity's definition to: <!ENTITY % electronic.copy "IGNORE"> - To Do… + 待辦事項... Modify entities.ent to contain the following: <!ENTITY version "1.1"> <!ENTITY % conditional.text "IGNORE"> <![%conditional.text;[ <!ENTITY para1 SYSTEM "para1.xml"> ]]> <!ENTITY para1 ""> <!ENTITY para2 SYSTEM "para2.xml"> <!ENTITY para3 SYSTEM "para3.xml"> Normalize example.xml and notice that the conditional text is not present in the output document. Set the parameter entity guard to INCLUDE and regenerate the normalized document and the text will appear again. This method makes sense if there are more conditional chunks depending on the same condition. For example, to control generating printed or online text. - Conclusion + 結論 That is the conclusion of this XML primer. For reasons of space and complexity, several things have not been covered in depth (or at all). However, the previous sections cover enough XML to introduce the organization of the FDP documentation. - <acronym>XHTML</acronym> Markup + <acronym>XHTML</acronym> 標籤 - Introduction + 簡介 This chapter describes usage of the XHTML markup language used for the FreeBSD web site. XHTML is the XML version of the HyperText Markup Language, the markup language of choice on the World Wide Web. More information can be found at http://www.w3.org/. XHTML is used to mark up pages on the FreeBSD web site. It is usually not used to mark up other documentation, since DocBook offers a far richer set of elements from which to choose. Consequently, XHTML pages will normally only be encountered when writing for the web site. HTML has gone through a number of versions. The XML-compliant version described here is called XHTML. The latest widespread version is XHTML 1.0, available in both strict and transitional variants. The XHTML DTDs are available from the Ports Collection in textproc/xhtml. They are automatically installed by the textproc/docproj port. This is not an exhaustive list of elements, since that would just repeat the documentation for XHTML. The aim is to list those elements most commonly used. Please post questions about elements or uses not covered here to the FreeBSD documentation project mailing list. Inline Versus Block In the remainder of this document, when describing elements, inline means that the element can occur within a block element, and does not cause a line break. A block element, by comparison, will cause a line break (and other processing) when it is encountered. - Formal Public Identifier (<acronym>FPI</acronym>) + 正式公用識別碼 (<acronym>FPI</acronym>) There are a number of XHTML FPIs, depending upon the version, or level of XHTML to which a document conforms. Most XHTML documents on the FreeBSD web site comply with the transitional version of XHTML 1.0. PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" - Sectional Elements + 分節元素 An XHTML document is normally split into two sections. The first section, called the head, contains meta-information about the document, such as its title, the name of the author, the parent document, and so on. The second section, the body, contains content that will be displayed to the user. These sections are indicated with head and body elements respectively. These elements are contained within the top-level html element. - Normal <acronym>XHTML</acronym> Document - Structure + 一般的 <acronym>XHTML</acronym> 文件結構 html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" head titleThe Document's Titletitle head body … body html - Block Elements + 區塊元素 - Headings + 標題 XHTML has tags to denote headings in the document at up to six different levels. The largest and most prominent heading is h1, then h2, continuing down to h6. The element's content is the text of the heading. - <tag>h1</tag>, <tag>h2</tag>, - and Other Header Tags + <tag>h1</tag>, <tag>h2</tag>, 以及其他標題標籤 - Usage: + 用法： h1First sectionh1 <!-- Document introduction goes here --> h2This is the heading for the first sectionh2 <!-- Content for the first section goes here --> h3This is the heading for the first sub-sectionh3 <!-- Content for the first sub-section goes here --> h2This is the heading for the second sectionh2 <!-- Content for the second section goes here --> Generally, an XHTML page should have one first level heading (h1). This can contain many second level headings (h2), which can in turn contain many third level headings. Do not leave gaps in the numbering. - Paragraphs + 段落 XHTML supports a single paragraph element, p. - <tag>p</tag> Example + <tag>p</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： pThis is a paragraph. It can contain just about any other element.p - Block Quotations + 區塊引言 A block quotation is an extended quotation from another document that will appear in a separate paragraph. - <tag>blockquote</tag> Example + <tag>blockquote</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： pA small excerpt from the US Constitution:p blockquoteWe the People of the United States, in Order to form a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the general Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of America.blockquote - Lists + 清單 XHTML can present the user with three types of lists: ordered, unordered, and definition. Entries in an ordered list will be numbered, while entries in an unordered list will be preceded by bullet points. Definition lists have two sections for each entry. The first section is the term being defined, and the second section is the definition. Ordered lists are indicated by the ol element, unordered lists by the ul element, and definition lists by the dl element. Ordered and unordered lists contain listitems, indicated by the li element. A listitem can contain textual content, or it may be further wrapped in one or more p elements. Definition lists contain definition terms (dt) and definition descriptions (dd). A definition term can only contain inline elements. A definition description can contain other block elements. - <tag>ul</tag> and - <tag>ol</tag> Example + <tag>ul</tag> 與 <tag>ol</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： pAn unordered list. Listitems will probably be preceded by bullets.p ul liFirst itemli liSecond itemli liThird itemli ul pAn ordered list, with list items consisting of multiple paragraphs. Each item (note: not each paragraph) will be numbered.p ol lipThis is the first item. It only has one paragraph.pli lipThis is the first paragraph of the second item.p pThis is the second paragraph of the second item.pli lipThis is the first and only paragraph of the third item.pli ol - Definition Lists with <tag>dl</tag> + 使用 <tag>dl</tag> 列定義清單 - Usage: + 用法： dl dtTerm 1dt ddpParagraph 1 of definition 1.p pParagraph 2 of definition 1.pdd dtTerm 2dt ddpParagraph 1 of definition 2.pdd dtTerm 3dt ddpParagraph 1 of definition 3.pdd dl - Pre-formatted Text + 已預排文字 Pre-formatted text is shown to the user exactly as it is in the file. Text is shown in a fixed font. Multiple spaces and line breaks are shown exactly as they are in the file. Wrap pre-formatted text in the pre element. - <tag>pre</tag> Example + <tag>pre</tag> 範例 For example, the pre tags could be used to mark up an email message: pre From: nik@FreeBSD.org To: freebsd-doc@FreeBSD.org Subject: New documentation available There is a new copy of my primer for contributors to the FreeBSD Documentation Project available at &lt;URL:http://people.FreeBSD.org/~nik/primer/index.html&gt; Comments appreciated. Npre Keep in mind that < and & still are recognized as special characters in pre-formatted text. This is why the example shown had to use &lt; instead of <. For consistency, &gt; was used in place of >, too. Watch out for the special characters that may appear in text copied from a plain-text source, like an email message or program code. - Tables + 表格 Mark up tabular information using the table element. A table consists of one or more table rows (tr), each containing one or more cells of table data (td). Each cell can contain other block elements, such as paragraphs or lists. It can also contain another table (this nesting can repeat indefinitely). If the cell only contains one paragraph then the pelement is not needed. - Simple Use of <tag>table</tag> + <tag>table</tag> 的簡單用法 - Usage: + 用法： pThis is a simple 2x2 table.p table tr tdTop left celltd tdTop right celltd tr tr tdBottom left celltd tdBottom right celltd tr table A cell can span multiple rows and columns by adding the rowspan or colspan attributes with values for the number of rows or columns to be spanned. - Using - <tag class="attribute">rowspan</tag> + 使用 <tag class="attribute">rowspan</tag> - Usage: + 用法： pOne tall thin cell on the left, two short cells next to it on the right.p table tr td rowspan="2"Long and thintd tr tr tdTop celltd tdBottom celltd tr table - Using - <tag class="attribute">colspan</tag> + 使用 <tag class="attribute">colspan</tag> - Usage: + 用法： pOne long cell on top, two short cells below it.p table tr td colspan="2"Top celltd tr tr tdBottom left celltd tdBottom right celltd tr table - Using <tag class="attribute">rowspan</tag> and - <tag class="attribute">colspan</tag> - Together + <tag class="attribute">rowspan</tag> 與 <tag class="attribute">colspan</tag> 一起使用 - Usage: + 用法： pOn a 3x3 grid, the top left block is a 2x2 set of cells merged into one. The other cells are normal.p table tr td colspan="2" rowspan="2"Top left large celltd tdTop right celltd tr tr <!-- Because the large cell on the left merges into this row, the first <td> will occur on its right --> tdMiddle right celltd tr tr tdBottom left celltd tdBottom middle celltd tdBottom right celltd tr table - In-line Elements + 行內元素 - Emphasizing Information + 強調資訊 Two levels of emphasis are available in XHTML, em and strong. em is for a normal level of emphasis and strong indicates stronger emphasis. em is typically rendered in italic and strong is rendered in bold. This is not always the case, and should not be relied upon. According to best practices, web pages only hold structural and semantical information, and stylesheets are later applied to them. Think of semantics, not formatting, when using these tags. - <tag>em</tag> and - <tag>strong</tag> Example + <tag>em</tag> 與 <tag>strong</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： pemThisem has been emphasized, while strongthisstrong has been strongly emphasized.p - Indicating Fixed-Pitch Text + 標示等寬文字 Content that should be rendered in a fixed pitch (typewriter) typeface is tagged with tt (for teletype). - <tag>tt</tag> Example + <tag>tt</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： pMany system settings are stored in tt/etctt.p - Links + 連結 Links are also inline elements. - Linking to Other Documents on the Web + 連結在網站上的其他文件 A link points to the URL of a document on the web. The link is indicated with a, and the href attribute contains the URL of the target document. The content of the element becomes the link, indicated to the user by showing it in a different color or with an underline. - Using - <tag class="starttag">a href="..."</tag> + 使用 <tag class="starttag">a href="..."</tag> - Usage: + 用法： pMore information is available at the a href="http://www.&os;.org/"&os; web sitea.p This link always takes the user to the top of the linked document. - Linking to Specific Parts of Documents + 連結說明文件的特定章節 To link to a specific point within a document, that document must include an anchor at the desired point. Anchors are included by setting the id attribute of an element to a name. This example creates an anchor by setting the id attribute of a p element. - Creating an Anchor + 建立錨點 - Usage: + 用法： p id="samplepara"This paragraph can be referenced in other links with the name ttsampleparatt.p Links to anchors are similar to plain links, but include a # symbol and the anchor's ID at the end of the URL. - Linking to a Named Part of a Different - Document + 連結到另一份文件中已命名的段落 The samplepara example is part of a document called foo.html. A link to that specific paragraph in the document is constructed in this example. pMore information can be found in the a href="foo.html#samplepara"sample paragrapha of ttfoo.htmltt.p To link to a named anchor within the same document, omit the document's URL, and just use the # symbol followed by the name of the anchor. - Linking to a Named Part of the Same Document + 連結到同一份文件已命名的段茖 The samplepara example resides in this document. To link to it: pMore information can be found in the a href="#samplepara"sample paragrapha of this document.p - DocBook Markup + DocBook 標籤 - Introduction + 簡介 This chapter is an introduction to DocBook as it is used for FreeBSD documentation. DocBook is a large and complex markup system, but the subset described here covers the parts that are most widely used for FreeBSD documentation. While a moderate subset is covered, it is impossible to anticipate every situation. Please post questions that this document does not answer to the FreeBSD documentation project mailing list. DocBook was originally developed by HaL Computer Systems and O'Reilly & Associates to be a Document Type Definition (DTD) for writing technical documentation A short history can be found under http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/intro.shtml#d0e41.. Since 1998 it is maintained by the DocBook Technical Committee. As such, and unlike LinuxDoc and XHTML, DocBook is very heavily oriented towards markup that describes what something is, rather than describing how it should be presented. The DocBook DTD is available from the Ports Collection in the textproc/docbook-xml port. It is automatically installed as part of the textproc/docproj port. Formal Versus Informal Some elements may exist in two forms, formal and informal. Typically, the formal version of the element will consist of a title followed by the informal version of the element. The informal version will not have a title. Inline Versus Block In the remainder of this document, when describing elements, inline means that the element can occur within a block element, and does not cause a line break. A block element, by comparison, will cause a line break (and other processing) when it is encountered. - FreeBSD Extensions + FreeBSD 擴充項目 The FreeBSD Documentation Project has extended the DocBook DTD with additional elements and entities. These additions serve to make some of the markup easier or more precise. Throughout the rest of this document, the term DocBook is used to mean the FreeBSD-extended DocBook DTD. Most of these extensions are not unique to FreeBSD, it was just felt that they were useful enhancements for this particular project. Should anyone from any of the other *nix camps (NetBSD, OpenBSD, Linux, …) be interested in collaborating on a standard DocBook extension set, please contact Documentation Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org. - FreeBSD Elements + FreeBSD 元素 The additional FreeBSD elements are not (currently) in the Ports Collection. They are stored in the FreeBSD Subversion tree, as head/share/xml/freebsd.dtd. FreeBSD-specific elements used in the examples below are clearly marked. - FreeBSD Entities + FreeBSD Entities This table shows some of the most useful entities available in the FDP. For a complete list, see the *.ent files in doc/share/xml. FreeBSD Name Entities &os; FreeBSD &os.stable; FreeBSD-STABLE &os.current; FreeBSD-CURRENT Manual Page Entities &man.ls.1; ls1 Usage: &man.ls.1; is the manual page for <command>ls</command>. &man.cp.1; cp1 Usage: The manual page for <command>cp</command> is &man.cp.1;. &man.command.sectionnumber; link to command manual page in section sectionnumber Entities are defined for all the FreeBSD manual pages. FreeBSD Mailing List Entities &a.doc; FreeBSD documentation project mailing list Usage: A link to the &a.doc;. &a.questions; FreeBSD general questions mailing list Usage: A link to the &a.questions;. &a.listname; link to listname Entities are defined for all the FreeBSD mailing lists. FreeBSD Document Link Entities &url.books.handbook; @@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook Usage: A link to the <link xlink:href="&url.books.handbook;/advanced-networking.html">Advanced Networking</link> chapter of the Handbook. &url.books.bookname; relative path to bookname Entities are defined for all the FreeBSD books. &url.articles.committers-guide; @@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/committers-guide Usage: A link to the <link xlink:href="&url.articles.committers-guide;">Committer's Guide</link> article. &url.articles.articlename; relative path to articlename Entities are defined for all the FreeBSD articles. Other Operating System Name Entities &linux; Linux The Linux operating system. &unix; UNIX The UNIX operating system. &windows; Windows The Windows operating system. Miscellaneous Entities &prompt.root; # The root user prompt. &prompt.user; % A prompt for an unprivileged user. &postscript; PostScript The PostScript programming language. &tex; TeX The TeX typesetting language. &xorg; Xorg The Xorg open source X Window System. - Formal Public Identifier (FPI) + 正式公用識別碼 (FPI) In compliance with the DocBook guidelines for writing FPIs for DocBook customizations, the FPI for the FreeBSD extended DocBook DTD is: PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook V4.2-Based Extension//EN" - Document Structure + 文件結構 DocBook allows structuring documentation in several ways. The FreeBSD Documentation Project uses two primary types of DocBook document: the book and the article. Books are organized into chapters. This is a mandatory requirement. There may be parts between the book and the chapter to provide another layer of organization. For example, the Handbook is arranged in this way. A chapter may (or may not) contain one or more sections. These are indicated with the sect1 element. If a section contains another section then use the sect2 element, and so on, up to sect5. Chapters and sections contain the remainder of the content. An article is simpler than a book, and does not use chapters. Instead, the content of an article is organized into one or more sections, using the same sect1 (and sect2 and so on) elements that are used in books. The nature of the document being written should be used to determine whether it is best marked up as a book or an article. Articles are well suited to information that does not need to be broken down into several chapters, and that is, relatively speaking, quite short, at up to 20-25 pages of content. Books are best suited to information that can be broken up into several chapters, possibly with appendices and similar content as well. The FreeBSD tutorials are all marked up as articles, while this document, the FAQ, and the Handbook are all marked up as books, for example. - Starting a Book + 開始撰寫書籍 The content of a book is contained within the book element. As well as containing structural markup, this element can contain elements that include additional information about the book. This is either meta-information, used for reference purposes, or additional content used to produce a title page. This additional information is contained within info. - Boilerplate <tag>book</tag> with - <tag>info</tag> + 使用 <tag>info</tag> 的 <tag>book</tag> 樣板 - <!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN" - "http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd"> - -article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" - xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" - xml:lang="en" - + book info - titleAn Example Articletitle + titleYour Title Heretitle author personname - firstnameYour first namefirstname - surnameYour surnamesurname + firstnameYour first namefirstname + surnameYour surnamesurname personname affiliation address - emailfoo@example.comemail + emailYour email addressemail address affiliation author copyright - year2000year - holderCopyright string hereholder + year1998year + holder role="mailto:your email address"Your nameholder copyright + releaseinfo$FreeBSD$releaseinfo + abstract - paraIf your article has an abstract then it should go here。para + paraInclude an abstract of the book's contents here.para abstract info - sect1 - titleMy First Sectiontitle + … - paraThis is the first section in my article。para - - sect2 - titleMy First Sub-Sectiontitle - - paraThis is the first sub-section in my article。para - sect2 - sect1 -article +book - Starting an Article + 開始撰寫文章 The content of the article is contained within the article element. As well as containing structural markup, this element can contain elements that include additional information about the article. This is either meta-information, used for reference purposes, or additional content used to produce a title page. This additional information is contained within info. - Boilerplate <tag>article</tag> with - <tag>info</tag> + 使用 <tag>info</tag> 的 <tag>article</tag> 樣板 - <!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN" - "http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd"> - -article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" - xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" - xml:lang="en" - + article info - titleAn Example Articletitle + titleYour title heretitle author personname - firstnameYour first namefirstname - surnameYour surnamesurname + firstnameYour first namefirstname + surnameYour surnamesurname personname affiliation address - emailfoo@example.comemail + emailYour email addressemailaddress address affiliation author copyright - year2000year - holderCopyright string hereholder + year1998year + holder role="mailto:your email address"Your nameholder copyright + releaseinfo$FreeBSD$releaseinfo + abstract - paraIf your article has an abstract then it should go here。para + paraInclude an abstract of the article's contents here.para abstract info - sect1 - titleMy First Sectiontitle + … - paraThis is the first section in my article。para - - sect2 - titleMy First Sub-Sectiontitle - - paraThis is the first sub-section in my article。para - sect2 - sect1 article - Indicating Chapters + 標示章節 Use chapter to mark up your chapters. Each chapter has a mandatory title. Articles do not contain chapters, they are reserved for books. - A Simple Chapter + 簡單的章節 chapter titleThe Chapter's Titletitle ... chapter A chapter cannot be empty; it must contain elements in addition to title. If you need to include an empty chapter then just use an empty paragraph. - Empty Chapters + 空白章節 chapter titleThis is An Empty Chaptertitle parapara chapter - Sections Below Chapters + 章底下的小節 In books, chapters may (but do not need to) be broken up into sections, subsections, and so on. In articles, sections are the main structural element, and each article must contain at least one section. Use the sectn element. The n indicates the section number, which identifies the section level. The first sectn is sect1. You can have one or more of these in a chapter. They can contain one or more sect2 elements, and so on, down to sect5. - Sections in Chapters + 章中的小節 chapter titleA Sample Chaptertitle paraSome text in the chapter.para sect1 titleFirst Sectiontitle … sect1 sect1 titleSecond Sectiontitle sect2 titleFirst Sub-Sectiontitle sect3 titleFirst Sub-Sub-Sectiontitle … sect3 sect2 sect2 titleSecond Sub-Section (1.2.2)title … sect2 sect1 chapter Section numbers are automatically generated and prepended to titles when the document is rendered to an output format. The generated section numbers and titles from the example above will be: 1.1. First Section 1.2. Second Section 1.2.1. First Sub-Section 1.2.1.1. First Sub-Sub-Section 1.2.2. Second Sub-Section - Subdividing Using <tag>part</tag> - Elements + 使用 <tag>part</tag> 元素來分部 parts introduce another level of organization between book and chapter with one or more parts. This cannot be done in an article. part titleIntroductiontitle chapter titleOverviewtitle ... chapter chapter titleWhat is FreeBSD?title ... chapter chapter titleHistorytitle ... chapter part - Block Elements + 區塊元素 - Paragraphs + 段落 DocBook supports three types of paragraphs: formalpara, para, and simpara. Almost all paragraphs in FreeBSD documentation use para. formalpara includes a title element, and simpara disallows some elements from within para. Stick with para. - <tag>para</tag> Example + <tag>para</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraThis is a paragraph. It can contain just about any other element.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： This is a paragraph. It can contain just about any other element. - Block Quotations + 區塊引言 A block quotation is an extended quotation from another document that should not appear within the current paragraph. These are rarely needed. Blockquotes can optionally contain a title and an attribution (or they can be left untitled and unattributed). - <tag>blockquote</tag> Example + <tag>blockquote</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraA small excerpt from the US Constitution:para blockquote titlePreamble to the Constitution of the United Statestitle attributionCopied from a web site somewhereattribution paraWe the People of the United States, in Order to form a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the general Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of America.para blockquote - Appearance: + 輸出結果： A small excerpt from the US Constitution:
Preamble to the Constitution of the United States Copied from a web site somewhere We the People of the United States, in Order to form a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the general Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of America.
- Tips, Notes, Warnings, Cautions, and Important - Information + 提示、注意、警告、注意事項及重要資訊 Extra information may need to be separated from the main body of the text. Typically this is meta information of which the user should be aware. Several types of admonitions are available: tip, note, warning, caution, and important. Which admonition to choose depends on the situation. The DocBook documentation suggests: Note is for information that should be heeded by all readers. Important is a variation on Note. Caution is for information regarding possible data loss or software damage. Warning is for information regarding possible hardware damage or injury to life or limb. - <tag>tip</tag> and <tag>important</tag> Example + <tag>tip</tag> 與 <tag>important</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： tip para&os; may reduce stress.para tip important paraPlease use admonitions sparingly. Too many admonitions are visually jarring and can have the opposite of the intended effect.para important - Appearance: + 輸出結果： FreeBSD may reduce stress. Please use admonitions sparingly. Too many admonitions are visually jarring and can have the opposite of the intended effect. - 舉例 + 範例 Examples can be shown with example. - <tag>example</tag> Source + <tag>example</tag> 原始碼 - Usage: + 用法： example paraEmpty files can be created easily:para screen&prompt.user; userinputtouch file1 file2 file3userinputscreen example - Appearance: + 輸出結果： - Rendered <tag>example</tag> + <tag>example</tag> 的結果 Empty files can be created easily: % touch file1 file2 file3 - Lists and Procedures + 清單與步驟 Information often needs to be presented as lists, or as a number of steps that must be carried out in order to accomplish a particular goal. To do this, use itemizedlist, orderedlist, variablelist, or procedure. There are other types of list elements in DocBook, but we will not cover them here. itemizedlist and orderedlist are similar to their counterparts in HTML, ul and ol. Each one consists of one or more listitem elements, and each listitem contains one or more block elements. The listitem elements are analogous to HTML's li tags. However, unlike HTML, they are required. - <tag>itemizedlist</tag> and - <tag>orderedlist</tag> Example + <tag>itemizedlist</tag> 與 <tag>orderedlist</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： itemizedlist listitem paraThis is the first itemized item.para listitem listitem paraThis is the second itemized item.para listitem itemizedlist orderedlist listitem paraThis is the first ordered item.para listitem listitem paraThis is the second ordered item.para listitem orderedlist - Appearance: + 輸出結果： This is the first itemized item. This is the second itemized item. This is the first ordered item. This is the second ordered item. An alternate and often useful way of presenting information is the variablelist. These are lists where each entry has a term and a description. They are well suited for many types of descriptions, and present information in a form that is often easier for the reader than sections and subsections. A variablelist has a title, and then pairs of term and listitem entries. - <tag>variablelist</tag> Example + <tag>variablelist</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： variablelist varlistentry termParallelterm listitem paraIn parallel communications, groups of bits arrive at the same time over multiple communications channels.para listitem varlistentry varlistentry termSerialterm listitem paraIn serial communications, bits arrive one at a time over a single communications channel.para listitem varlistentry variablelist - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Parallel In parallel communications, groups of bits arrive at the same time over multiple communications channels. Serial In serial communications, bits arrive one at a time over a single communications channel. A procedure shows a series of steps, which may in turn consist of more steps or substeps. Each step contains block elements and may include an optional title. Sometimes, steps are not sequential, but present a choice: do this or do that, but not both. For these alternative choices, use stepalternatives. - <tag>procedure</tag> Example + <tag>procedure</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： procedure step paraDo this.para step step paraThen do this.para step step paraAnd now do this.para step step paraFinally, do one of these.para stepalternatives step paraGo left.para step step paraGo right.para step stepalternatives step procedure - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Do this. Then do this. And now do this. Finally, do one of these: Go left. Go right. - Showing File Samples + 顯示檔案範本 Fragments of a file (or perhaps a complete file) are shown by wrapping them in the programlisting element. White space and line breaks within programlisting are significant. In particular, this means that the opening tag should appear on the same line as the first line of the output, and the closing tag should appear on the same line as the last line of the output, otherwise spurious blank lines may be included. - <tag>programlisting</tag> Example + <tag>programlisting</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraWhen finished, the program will look like this:para programlisting#include &lt;stdio.h&gt; int main(void) { printf("hello, world\n"); }programlisting Notice how the angle brackets in the #include line need to be referenced by their entities instead of being included literally. - Appearance: + 輸出結果： When finished, the program will look like this: #include <stdio.h> int main(void) { printf("hello, world\n"); } - Callouts + 標註 A callout is a visual marker for referring to a piece of text or specific position within an example. Callouts are marked with the co element. Each element must have a unique id assigned to it. After the example, include a calloutlist that describes each callout. - <tag>co</tag> and - <tag>calloutlist</tag> Example + <tag>co</tag> 與 <tag>calloutlist</tag> 範例 paraWhen finished, the program will look like this:para programlisting#include &lt;stdio.h&gt; co xml:id="co-ex-include" int co xml:id="co-ex-return" main(void) { printf("hello, world\n"); co xml:id="co-ex-printf" }programlisting calloutlist callout arearefs="co-ex-include" paraIncludes the standard IO header file.para callout callout arearefs="co-ex-return" paraSpecifies that functionmain()function returns an int.para callout callout arearefs="co-ex-printf" paraThe functionprintf()function call that writes literalhello, worldliteral to standard output.para callout calloutlist - Appearance: + 輸出結果： When finished, the program will look like this: #include <stdio.h> int main(void) { printf("hello, world\n"); } Includes the standard IO header file. Specifies that main() returns an int. The printf() call that writes hello, world to standard output. - Tables + 表格 Unlike HTML, DocBook does not need tables for layout purposes, as the stylesheet handles those issues. Instead, just use tables for marking up tabular data. In general terms (and see the DocBook documentation for more detail) a table (which can be either formal or informal) consists of a table element. This contains at least one tgroup element, which specifies (as an attribute) the number of columns in this table group. Within the tablegroup there is one thead element, which contains elements for the table headings (column headings), and one tbody which contains the body of the table. Both tgroup and thead contain row elements, which in turn contain entry elements. Each entry element specifies one cell in the table. - <tag>informaltable</tag> Example + <tag>informaltable</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： informaltable pgwide="1" tgroup cols="2" thead row entryThis is Column Head 1entry entryThis is Column Head 2entry row thead tbody row entryRow 1, column 1entry entryRow 1, column 2entry row row entryRow 2, column 1entry entryRow 2, column 2entry row tbody tgroup informaltable - Appearance: + 輸出結果： This is Column Head 1 This is Column Head 2 Row 1, column 1 Row 1, column 2 Row 2, column 1 Row 2, column 2 Always use the pgwide attribute with a value of 1 with the informaltable element. A bug in Internet Explorer can cause the table to render incorrectly if this is omitted. Table borders can be suppressed by setting the frame attribute to none in the informaltable element. For example, informaltable frame="none". - Table with <literal>frame="none"</literal> Example + 表格使用 <literal>frame="none"</literal> 範例 - Appearance: + 輸出結果： This is Column Head 1 This is Column Head 2 Row 1, column 1 Row 1, column 2 Row 2, column 1 Row 2, column 2 - Examples for the User to Follow + 給使用者遵循的範例 Examples for the user to follow are often necessary. Typically, these will consist of dialogs with the computer; the user types in a command, the user gets a response back, the user types another command, and so on. A number of distinct elements and entities come into play here. screen Everything the user sees in this example will be on the computer screen, so the next element is screen. Within screen, white space is significant. prompt, &prompt.root; and &prompt.user; Some of the things the user will be seeing on the screen are prompts from the computer (either from the operating system, command shell, or application). These should be marked up using prompt. As a special case, the two shell prompts for the normal user and the root user have been provided as entities. To indicate the user is at a shell prompt, use one of &prompt.root; and &prompt.user; as necessary. They do not need to be inside prompt. &prompt.root; and &prompt.user; are FreeBSD extensions to DocBook, and are not part of the original DTD. userinput When displaying text that the user should type in, wrap it in userinput tags. It will be displayed differently than system output text. - <tag>screen</tag>, <tag>prompt</tag>, - and <tag>userinput</tag> Example + <tag>screen</tag>, <tag>prompt</tag> 與 <tag>userinput</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： screen&prompt.user; userinputls -1userinput foo1 foo2 foo3 &prompt.user; userinputls -1 | grep foo2userinput foo2 &prompt.user; userinputsuuserinput promptPassword: prompt &prompt.root; userinputcat foo2userinput This is the file called 'foo2'screen - Appearance: + 輸出結果： % ls -1 foo1 foo2 foo3 % ls -1 | grep foo2 foo2 % su Password: # cat foo2 This is the file called 'foo2' Even though we are displaying the contents of the file foo2, it is not marked up as programlisting. Reserve programlisting for showing fragments of files outside the context of user actions. - In-line Elements + 行內元素 - Emphasizing Information + 強調資訊 To emphasize a particular word or phrase, use emphasis. This may be presented as italic, or bold, or might be spoken differently with a text-to-speech system. There is no way to change the presentation of the emphasis within the document, no equivalent of HTML's b and i. If the information being presented is important, then consider presenting it in important rather than emphasis. - <tag>emphasis</tag> Example + <tag>emphasis</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： para&os; is without doubt emphasistheemphasis premiere &unix;-like operating system for the Intel architecture.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： FreeBSD is without doubt the premiere UNIX-like operating system for the Intel architecture. - Acronyms + 縮寫 Many computer terms are acronyms, words formed from the first letter of each word in a phrase. Acronyms are marked up into acronym elements. It is helpful to the reader when an acronym is defined on the first use, as shown in the example below. - <tag>acronym</tag> Example + <tag>acronym</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraRequest For Comments (acronymRFCacronym) 1149 defined the use of avian carriers for transmission of Internet Protocol (acronymIPacronym) data. The quantity of acronymIPacronym data currently transmitted in that manner is unknown.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Request For Comments (RFC) 1149 defined the use of avian carriers for transmission of Internet Protocol (IP) data. The quantity of IP data currently transmitted in that manner is unknown. - Quotations + 引言 To quote text from another document or source, or to denote a phrase that is used figuratively, use quote. Most of the markup tags available for normal text are also available from within a quote. - <tag>quote</tag> Example + <tag>quote</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraHowever, make sure that the search does not go beyond the quoteboundary between local and public administrationquote, as acronymRFCacronym 1535 calls it.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： However, make sure that the search does not go beyond the boundary between local and public administration, as RFC 1535 calls it. - Keys, Mouse Buttons, and Combinations + 鍵盤按鍵、滑鼠按鍵及組合鍵 To refer to a specific key on the keyboard, use keycap. To refer to a mouse button, use mousebutton. And to refer to combinations of key presses or mouse clicks, wrap them all in keycombo. keycombo has an attribute called action, which may be one of click, double-click, other, press, seq, or simul. The last two values denote whether the keys or buttons should be pressed in sequence, or simultaneously. The stylesheets automatically add any connecting symbols, such as +, between the key names, when wrapped in keycombo. - Keys, Mouse Buttons, and Combinations Example + 鍵盤按鍵、滑鼠案件及組合鍵範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraTo switch to the second virtual terminal, press keycombo action="simul"keycapAltkeycap keycapF1keycapkeycombo.para paraTo exit commandvicommand without saving changes, type keycombo action="seq"keycapEsckeycapkeycap:keycap keycapqkeycapkeycap!keycapkeycombo.para paraMy window manager is configured so that keycombo action="simul"keycapAltkeycap mousebuttonrightmousebutton keycombo mouse button is used to move windows.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： To switch to the second virtual terminal, press Alt F1. To exit vi without saving changes, type Esc : q !. My window manager is configured so that Alt right mouse button is used to move windows. - Applications, Commands, Options, and Cites + 應用程式、指令、選項與引用 Both applications and commands are frequently referred to when writing documentation. The distinction between them is that an application is the name of a program or suite of programs that fulfill a particular task. A command is the filename of a program that the user can type and run at a command line. It is often necessary to show some of the options that a command might take. Finally, it is often useful to list a command with its manual section number, in the command(number) format so common in Unix manuals. Mark up application names with application. To list a command with its manual section number (which should be most of the time) the DocBook element is citerefentry. This will contain a further two elements, refentrytitle and manvolnum. The content of refentrytitle is the name of the command, and the content of manvolnum is the manual page section. This can be cumbersome to write, and so a series of general entities have been created to make this easier. Each entity takes the form &man.manual-page.manual-section;. The file that contains these entities is in doc/share/xml/man-refs.ent, and can be referred to using this FPI: PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//ENTITIES DocBook Manual Page Entities//EN" Therefore, the introduction to FreeBSD documentation will usually include this: <!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook V4.1-Based Extension//EN" [ <!ENTITY % man PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//ENTITIES DocBook Manual Page Entities//EN"> %man; … ]> Use command to include a command name in-line but present it as something the user should type. Use option to mark up the options which will be passed to a command. When referring to the same command multiple times in close proximity, it is preferred to use the &man.command.section; notation to markup the first reference and use command to markup subsequent references. This makes the generated output, especially HTML, appear visually better. - Applications, Commands, and Options Example + 應用程式、指令、選項範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraapplicationSendmailapplication is the most widely used Unix mail application.para paraapplicationSendmailapplication includes the citerefentry refentrytitlesendmailrefentrytitle manvolnum8manvolnum citerefentry, &man.mailq.1;, and &man.newaliases.1; programs.para paraOne of the command line parameters to citerefentry refentrytitlesendmailrefentrytitle manvolnum8manvolnum citerefentry, option-bpoption, will display the current status of messages in the mail queue. Check this on the command line by running commandsendmail -bpcommand.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Sendmail is the most widely used Unix mail application. Sendmail includes the sendmail 8 , mailq1, and newaliases1 programs. One of the command line parameters to sendmail 8 , , will display the current status of messages in the mail queue. Check this on the command line by running sendmail -bp. Notice how the &man.command.section; notation is easier to follow. - Files, Directories, Extensions, Device Names + 檔案、目錄、副檔名、裝置名稱 To refer to the name of a file, a directory, a file extension, or a device name, use filename. - <tag>filename</tag> Example + <tag>filename</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraThe source for the Handbook in English is found in filename/usr/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/filename. The main file is called filenamebook.xmlfilename. There is also a filenameMakefilefilename and a number of files with a filename.entfilename extension.para parafilenamekbd0filename is the first keyboard detected by the system, and appears in filename/devfilename.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： The source for the Handbook in English is found in /usr/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/. The main file is called book.xml. There is also a Makefile and a number of files with a .ent extension. kbd0 is the first keyboard detected by the system, and appears in /dev. - The Name of Ports + Port 名稱 FreeBSD Extension These elements are part of the FreeBSD extension to DocBook, and do not exist in the original DocBook DTD. To include the name of a program from the FreeBSD Ports Collection in the document, use the package tag. Since the Ports Collection can be installed in any number of locations, only include the category and the port name; do not include /usr/ports. By default, package refers to a binary package. To refer to a port that will be built from source, set the role attribute to port. - <tag>package</tag> Example + <tag>package</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraInstall the packagenet/wiresharkpackage binary package to view network traffic.para parapackage role="port"net/wiresharkpackage can also be built and installed from the Ports Collection.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Install the net/wireshark binary package to view network traffic. net/wireshark can also be built and installed from the Ports Collection. - Hosts, Domains, IP Addresses, User Names, Group Names, - and Other System Items + 主機、網域、IP 位址、使用名稱、群組名稱及其他系統項目 FreeBSD Extension These elements are part of the FreeBSD extension to DocBook, and do not exist in the original DocBook DTD. Information for system items is marked up with systemitem. The class attribute is used to identify the particular type of information shown. class="domainname" The text is a domain name, such as FreeBSD.org or ngo.org.uk. There is no hostname component. class="etheraddress" The text is an Ethernet MAC address, expressed as a series of 2 digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons. class="fqdomainname" The text is a Fully Qualified Domain Name, with both hostname and domain name parts. class="ipaddress" The text is an IP address, probably expressed as a dotted quad. class="netmask" The text is a network mask, which might be expressed as a dotted quad, a hexadecimal string, or as a / followed by a number (CIDR notation). class="systemname" With class="systemname" the marked up information is the simple hostname, such as freefall or wcarchive. class="username" The text is a username, like root. class="groupname" The text is a groupname, like wheel. - <tag>systemitem</tag> and Classes Example + <tag>systemitem</tag> 與類別 (Class) 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraThe local machine can always be referred to by the name systemitem class="systemname"localhostsystemitem, which will have the IP address systemitem class="ipaddress"127.0.0.1systemitem.para paraThe systemitem class="domainname"FreeBSD.orgsystemitem domain contains a number of different hosts, including systemitem class="fqdomainname"freefall.FreeBSD.orgsystemitem and systemitem class="fqdomainname"bento.FreeBSD.orgsystemitem.para paraWhen adding an acronymIPacronym alias to an interface (using commandifconfigcommand) emphasisalwaysemphasis use a netmask of systemitem class="netmask"255.255.255.255systemitem (which can also be expressed as systemitem class="netmask"0xffffffffsystemitem).para paraThe acronymMACacronym address uniquely identifies every network card in existence. A typical acronymMACacronym address looks like systemitem class="etheraddress"08:00:20:87:ef:d0systemitem.para paraTo carry out most system administration functions requires logging in as systemitem class="username"rootsystemitem.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： The local machine can always be referred to by the name localhost, which will have the IP address 127.0.0.1. The FreeBSD.org domain contains a number of different hosts, including freefall.FreeBSD.org and bento.FreeBSD.org. When adding an IP alias to an interface (using ifconfig) always use a netmask of 255.255.255.255 (which can also be expressed as 0xffffffff). The MAC address uniquely identifies every network card in existence. A typical MAC address looks like 08:00:20:87:ef:d0. To carry out most system administration functions requires logging in as root. - Uniform Resource Identifiers - (<acronym>URI</acronym>s) + 統一資源識別碼 (<acronym>URI</acronym>) Occasionally it is useful to show a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) without making it an active hyperlink. The uri element makes this possible: - <tag>uri</tag> Example + <tag>uri</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraThis URL shows only as text: urihttps://www.FreeBSD.orguri. It does not create a link.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： This URL shows only as text: https://www.FreeBSD.org. It does not create a link. To create links, see . - Email Addresses + 郵件地址 Email addresses are marked up as email elements. In the HTML output format, the wrapped text becomes a hyperlink to the email address. Other output formats that support hyperlinks may also make the email address into a link. - <tag>email</tag> with a Hyperlink Example + 有超連結的 <tag>email</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraAn email address that does not actually exist, like emailnotreal@example.comemail, can be used as an example.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： An email address that does not actually exist, like notreal@example.com, can be used as an example. A FreeBSD-specific extension allows setting the role attribute to nolink to prevent the creation of the hyperlink to the email address. - <tag>email</tag> Without a Hyperlink Example + 沒有超連結的 <tag>email</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraSometimes a link to an email address like email role="nolink"notreal@example.comemail is not desired.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Sometimes a link to an email address like notreal@example.com is not desired. - Describing <filename>Makefile</filename>s + 說明 <filename>Makefile</filename> FreeBSD Extension These elements are part of the FreeBSD extension to DocBook, and do not exist in the original DocBook DTD. Two elements exist to describe parts of Makefiles, buildtarget and varname. buildtarget identifies a build target exported by a Makefile that can be given as a parameter to make. varname identifies a variable that can be set (in the environment, on the command line with make, or within the Makefile) to influence the process. - <tag>buildtarget</tag> and - <tag>varname</tag> Example + <tag>buildtarget</tag> 與 <tag>varname</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraTwo common targets in a filenameMakefilefilename are buildtargetallbuildtarget and buildtargetcleanbuildtarget.para paraTypically, invoking buildtargetallbuildtarget will rebuild the application, and invoking buildtargetcleanbuildtarget will remove the temporary files (filename.ofilename for example) created by the build process.para parabuildtargetcleanbuildtarget may be controlled by a number of variables, including varnameCLOBBERvarname and varnameRECURSEvarname.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Two common targets in a Makefile are all and clean. Typically, invoking all will rebuild the application, and invoking clean will remove the temporary files (.o for example) created by the build process. clean may be controlled by a number of variables, including CLOBBER and RECURSE. - Literal Text + 實際文字 (Literal) Literal text, or text which should be entered verbatim, is often needed in documentation. This is text that is excerpted from another file, or which should be copied exactly as shown from the documentation into another file. Some of the time, programlisting will be sufficient to denote this text. But programlisting is not always appropriate, particularly when you want to include a portion of a file in-line with the rest of the paragraph. On these occasions, use literal. - <tag>literal</tag> Example + <tag>literal</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraThe literalmaxusers 10literal line in the kernel configuration file determines the size of many system tables, and is a rough guide to how many simultaneous logins the system will support.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： The maxusers 10 line in the kernel configuration file determines the size of many system tables, and is a rough guide to how many simultaneous logins the system will support. - Showing Items That the User <emphasis>Must</emphasis> - Fill In + 顯示使用者<emphasis>必填</emphasis>的項目 There will often be times when the user is shown what to do, or referred to a file or command line, but cannot simply copy the example provided. Instead, they must supply some information themselves. replaceable is designed for this eventuality. Use it inside other elements to indicate parts of that element's content that the user must replace. - <tag>replaceable</tag> Example + <tag>replaceable</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： screen&prompt.user; userinputman replaceablecommandreplaceableuserinputscreen - Appearance: + 輸出結果： % man command replaceable can be used in many different elements, including literal. This example also shows that replaceable should only be wrapped around the content that the user is meant to provide. The other content should be left alone. - Usage: + 用法： paraThe literalmaxusers replaceablenreplaceableliteral line in the kernel configuration file determines the size of many system tables, and is a rough guide to how many simultaneous logins the system will support.para paraFor a desktop workstation, literal32literal is a good value for replaceablenreplaceable.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： The maxusers n line in the kernel configuration file determines the size of many system tables, and is a rough guide to how many simultaneous logins the system will support. For a desktop workstation, 32 is a good value for n. - Showing <acronym>GUI</acronym> Buttons + 顯示 <acronym>GUI</acronym> 按鈕 Buttons presented by a graphical user interface are marked with guibutton. To make the text look more like a graphical button, brackets and non-breaking spaces are added surrounding the text. - <tag>guibutton</tag> Example + <tag>guibutton</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraEdit the file, then click guibutton[&nbsp;Save&nbsp;]guibutton to save the changes.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Edit the file, then click [ Save ] to save the changes. - Quoting System Errors + 引用系統錯誤 System errors generated by FreeBSD are marked with errorname. This indicates the exact error that appears. - <tag>errorname</tag> Example + <tag>errorname</tag> 範例 - Usage: + 用法： screenerrornamePanic: cannot mount rooterrornamescreen - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Panic: cannot mount root - Images + 圖片 Image support in the documentation is somewhat experimental. The mechanisms described here are unlikely to change, but that is not guaranteed. To provide conversion between different image formats, the graphics/ImageMagick port must be installed. This port is not included in the textproc/docproj meta port, and must be installed separately. A good example of the use of images is the doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/vm-design/ document. Examine the files in that directory to see how these elements are used together. Build different output formats to see how the format determines what images are shown in the rendered document. - Image Formats + 圖片格式 The following image formats are currently supported. An image file will automatically be converted to bitmap or vector image depending on the output document format. These are the only formats in which images should be committed to the documentation repository. EPS (Encapsulated Postscript) Images that are primarily vector based, such as network diagrams, time lines, and similar, should be in this format. These images have a .eps extension. PNG (Portable Network Graphic) For bitmaps, such as screen captures, use this format. These images have the .png extension. PIC (PIC graphics language) PIC is a language for drawing simple vector-based figures used in the pic1 utility. These images have the .pic extension. SCR (SCReen capture) This format is specific to screenshots of console output. The following command generates an SCR file shot.scr from video buffer of /dev/ttyv0: # vidcontrol -p < /dev/ttyv0 > shot.scr This is preferable to PNG format for screenshots because the SCR file contains plain text of the command lines so that it can be converted to a PNG image or a plain text depending on the output document format. Use the appropriate format for each image. Documentation will often have a mix of EPS and PNG images. The Makefiles ensure that the correct format image is chosen depending on the output format used. Do not commit the same image to the repository in two different formats. The Documentation Project may eventually switch to using the SVG (Scalable Vector Graphic) format for vector images. However, the current state of SVG capable editing tools makes this impractical. - Image File Locations + 圖片檔案位置 Image files can be stored in one of several locations, depending on the document and image: In the same directory as the document itself, usually done for articles and small books that keep all their files in a single directory. In a subdirectory of the main document. Typically done when a large book uses separate subdirectories to organize individual chapters. When images are stored in a subdirectory of the main document directory, the subdirectory name must be included in their paths in the Makefile and the imagedata element. In a subdirectory of doc/share/images named after the document. For example, images for the Handbook are stored in doc/share/images/books/handbook. Images that work for multiple translations are stored in this upper level of the documentation file tree. Generally, these are images that can be used unchanged in non-English translations of the document. - Image Markup + 圖片標籤 Images are included as part of a mediaobject. The mediaobject can contain other, more specific objects. We are concerned with two, the imageobject and the textobject. Include one imageobject, and two textobject elements. The imageobject will point to the name of the image file without the extension. The textobject elements contain information that will be presented to the user as well as, or instead of, the image itself. Text elements are shown to the reader in several situations. When the document is viewed in HTML, text elements are shown while the image is loading, or if the mouse pointer is hovered over the image, or if a text-only browser is being used. In formats like plain text where graphics are not possible, the text elements are shown instead of the graphical ones. This example shows how to include an image called fig1.png in a document. The image is a rectangle with an A inside it: mediaobject imageobject imagedata fileref="fig1" imageobject textobject literallayout class="monospaced"+---------------+ | A | +---------------+literallayout textobject textobject phraseA picturephrase textobject mediaobject Include an imagedata element inside the imageobject element. The fileref attribute should contain the filename of the image to include, without the extension. The stylesheets will work out which extension should be added to the filename automatically. The first textobject contains a literallayout element, where the class attribute is set to monospaced. This is an opportunity to demonstrate ASCII art skills. This content will be used if the document is converted to plain text. Notice how the first and last lines of the content of the literallayout element butt up next to the element's tags. This ensures no extraneous white space is included. The second textobject contains a single phrase element. The contents of this phrase will become the alt attribute for the image when this document is converted to HTML. - Image <filename>Makefile</filename> Entries + 圖片 <filename>Makefile</filename> 項目 Images must be listed in the Makefile in the IMAGES variable. This variable must contain the names of all the source images. For example, if there are three figures, fig1.eps, fig2.png, fig3.png, then the Makefile should have lines like this in it. … IMAGES= fig1.eps fig2.png fig3.png … or … IMAGES= fig1.eps IMAGES+= fig2.png IMAGES+= fig3.png … Again, the Makefile will work out the complete list of images it needs to build the source document, you only need to list the image files you provided. - Images and Chapters in Subdirectories + 在子目錄中的圖片與章節 Be careful when separating documentation into smaller files in different directories (see ). Suppose there is a book with three chapters, and the chapters are stored in their own directories, called chapter1/chapter.xml, chapter2/chapter.xml, and chapter3/chapter.xml. If each chapter has images associated with it, place those images in each chapter's subdirectory (chapter1/, chapter2/, and chapter3/). However, doing this requires including the directory names in the IMAGES variable in the Makefile, and including the directory name in the imagedata element in the document. For example, if the book has chapter1/fig1.png, then chapter1/chapter.xml should contain: mediaobject imageobject imagedata fileref="chapter1/fig1" imageobject … mediaobject The directory name must be included in the fileref attribute. The Makefile must contain: … IMAGES= chapter1/fig1.png … - Links + 連結 Links are also in-line elements. To show a URI without creating a link, see . - <literal>xml:id</literal> Attributes + <literal>xml:id</literal> 屬性 Most DocBook elements accept an xml:id attribute to give that part of the document a unique name. The xml:id can be used as a target for a crossreference or link. Any portion of the document that will be a link target must have an xml:id attribute. Assigning an xml:id to all chapters and sections, even if there are no current plans to link to them, is a good idea. These xml:ids can be used as unique reference points by anyone referring to the HTML version of the document. - <literal>xml:id</literal> on Chapters and - Sections Example + 在章與節上加 <literal>xml:id</literal> 的範例 chapter xml:id="introduction" titleIntroductiontitle paraThis is the introduction. It contains a subsection, which is identified as well.para sect1 xml:id="introduction-moredetails" titleMore Detailstitle paraThis is a subsection.para sect1 chapter Use descriptive values for xml:id names. The values must be unique within the entire document, not just in a single file. In the example, the subsection xml:id is constructed by appending text to the chapter xml:id. This ensures that the xml:ids are unique. It also helps both reader and anyone editing the document to see where the link is located within the document, similar to a directory path to a file. - Crossreferences with <literal>xref</literal> + 使用 <literal>xref</literal> 交叉參照 xref provides the reader with a link to jump to another section of the document. The target xml:id is specified in the linkend attribute, and xref generates the link text automatically. - <tag>xref</tag> Example + <tag>xref</tag> 範例 Assume that this fragment appears somewhere in a document that includes the xml:id example shown above: paraMore information can be found in xref linkend="introduction".para paraMore specific information can be found in xref linkend="introduction-moredetails".para The link text will be generated automatically, looking like (emphasized text indicates the link text):
More information can be found in Chapter 1, Introduction. More specific information can be found in Section 1.1, More Details.
The link text is generated automatically from the chapter and section number and title elements. - Linking to Other Documents on the - Web + 連結在網站上的其他文件 The link element described here allows the writer to define the link text. When link text is used, it is very important to be descriptive to give the reader an idea of where the link goes. Remember that DocBook can be rendered to multiple types of media. The reader might be looking at a printed book or other form of media where there are no links. If the link text is not descriptive enough, the reader might not be able to locate the linked section. The xlink:href attribute is the URL of the page, and the content of the element is the text that will be displayed for the user to activate. In many situations, it is preferable to show the actual URL rather than text. This can be done by leaving out the element text entirely. - <tag>link</tag> to a FreeBSD Documentation Web - Page Example + <tag>link</tag> 到 FreeBSD 說明文件網頁範例 Link to the book or article URL entity. To link to a specific chapter in a book, add a slash and the chapter file name, followed by an optional anchor within the chapter. For articles, link to the article URL entity, followed by an optional anchor within the article. URL entities can be found in doc/share/xml/urls.ent. Usage for FreeBSD book links: paraRead the link xlink:href="&url.books.handbook;/svn.html#svn-intro"SVN introductionlink, then pick the nearest mirror from the list of link xlink:href="&url.books.handbook;/svn.html#svn-mirrors"Subversion mirror siteslink.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Read the SVN introduction, then pick the nearest mirror from the list of Subversion mirror sites. Usage for FreeBSD article links: paraRead this link xlink:href="&url.articles.bsdl-gpl;"article about the BSD licenselink, or just the link xlink:href="&url.articles.bsdl-gpl;#intro"introductionlink.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Read this article about the BSD license, or just the introduction. - <tag>link</tag> to a FreeBSD Web Page Example + <tag>link</tag> 到 FreeBSD 網頁範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraOf course, you could stop reading this document and go to the link xlink:href="&url.base;/index.html"FreeBSD home pagelink instead.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Of course, you could stop reading this document and go to the FreeBSD home page instead. - <tag>link</tag> to an External Web - Page Example + <tag>link</tag> 到外部網頁範例 - Usage: + 用法： paraWikipedia has an excellent reference on link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table"GUID Partition Tableslink.para - Appearance: + 輸出結果： Wikipedia has an excellent reference on GUID Partition Tables. The link text can be omitted to show the actual URL: paraWikipedia has an excellent reference on GUID Partition Tables: link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table"link.para The same link can be entered using shorter notation instead of a separate ending tag: paraWikipedia has an excellent reference on GUID Partition Tables: link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table".para The two methods are equivalent. Appearance: Wikipedia has an excellent reference on GUID Partition Tables: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table. - Style Sheets + 樣式表 XML is concerned with content, and says nothing about how that content should be presented to the reader or rendered on paper. Multiple style sheet languages have been developed to describe visual layout, including Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation (XSLT), Document Style Semantics and Specification Language (DSSSL), and Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). The FDP documents use XSLT stylesheets to transform DocBook into XHTML, and then CSS formatting is applied to the XHTML pages. Printable output is currently rendered with legacy DSSSL stylesheets, but this will probably change in the future. <acronym>CSS</acronym> Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) are a mechanism for attaching style information (font, weight, size, color, and so forth) to elements in an XHTML document without abusing XHTML to do so. - The DocBook Documents + DocBook 文件 The FreeBSD XSLT and DSSSL stylesheets refer to docbook.css, which is expected to be present in the same directory as the XHTML files. The project-wide CSS file is copied from doc/share/misc/docbook.css when documents are converted to XHTML, and is installed automatically. 翻譯 - 本章是翻譯 FreeBSD 文件(包含：FAQ, Handbook, tutorials, manual pages等)的常見問題(FAQ)。 + 本章節是供要翻譯 FreeBSD 說明文件 (常見問答集 (FAQ)、使用手冊 (Handbook)、教學 (Tutorial)、操作手冊 (Manual page) 等) 到各種語言的常見問答集 (FAQ)。 - 本文件 主要 是以 FreeBSD 德文翻譯計劃的翻譯 FAQ 為母本而來的， 原始撰稿者為 Frank Gründer elwood@mc5sys.in-berlin.de，並由 Bernd Warken bwarken@mayn.de 再翻譯回英文版。 + 本文件 主要 是以 FreeBSD 德文說明文件計劃的翻譯常見問答集為母本而來的， 原始撰稿者為 Frank Gründer elwood@mc5sys.in-berlin.de，並由 Bernd Warken bwarken@mayn.de 再翻譯回英文版。 - 本 FAQ 是由文件工程團隊 doceng@FreeBSD.org 所維護。 + 本常見問答集是由文件工程團隊 Documentation Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org 所維護。 - i18n 跟 l10n 是什麼呢？ + i18n 與 l10n 代表的是什麼意思？ - i18n 是 internationalization 而 l10n 是 localization。這些都是為了書寫方便而用的簡寫。 + i18n 指的是國際化 (Internationalization) 而 l10n 指的是在地化 (Localization)。這些都是為了書寫方便而用的簡寫。 i18n 就是開頭為 i 後面有 18 個字母，最後接 n。同樣地， l10n 是開頭為 l 後面有 10 個字母，最後接 n。 - 有專門給譯者參與討論的 mailing list 嗎？ + 有給翻譯人員參與討論的郵遞論壇 (Mailing list) 嗎？ - 有的，不同的語系翻譯者都各自有自屬的 mailing lists。這份 翻譯計劃清單 有列出各翻譯計劃的詳細 mailing lists 及相關網站。此外，有一般翻譯討論的freebsd-translators@freebsd.org郵件論壇。 + 有的，不同的語系翻譯人員都各自有自屬的郵遞論壇。這份 翻譯計劃清單 有列出各翻譯計劃的詳細 mailing lists 及相關網站。此外，有一般翻譯討論的freebsd-translators@freebsd.org郵件論壇。 需要更多人一起參與翻譯嗎？ - 當然囉，越多人參與翻譯，那麼就能夠越快翻完，而且英文版文件若有增減、更新的話， 各翻譯版也可以儘快同步囉。 + 當然囉，越多人參與翻譯，那麼就能夠越快翻完，而且英文版說明文件若有增減、更新的話， 各翻譯版也可以儘快同步囉。 不一定得是專業譯者，才能參與翻譯的。 有要求哪些語言能力呢 理論上，必須要對英文非常熟稔，而且很明顯地，對想翻譯的語言必須要能運用自如。 - 英文也並非一定要會的。比如說，可以把西班牙文(Spanish)的 FAQ 翻譯為匈牙利文(Hungarian)。 + 英文也並非一定要會的。比如說，可以把西班牙文 (Spanish) 的 FAQ 翻譯為匈牙利文 (Hungarian)。 該學會哪些程式的使用呢？ - 強烈建議在自己機器上也建立 FreeBSD Subversion repository 的備份(至少文件部分)，這可以執行： + 強烈建議在自己機器上也建立 FreeBSD Subversion 檔案庫的備份 (至少要有說明文件的部分)，這可以執行： % svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head/ head - svn.FreeBSD.org是公共的 SVN 伺服器。可以從Subversion 鏡相站清單檢查認證的伺服器。 + svn.FreeBSD.org 是公共的 SVN 伺服器。可以從 Subversion 鏡像站 清單檢查認證的伺服器。 - 這需要安裝devel/subversion 套件。 + 這需要安裝 devel/subversion 套件。 - 你可以很自在地使用svn。他可以讓你察看文件檔案不同版本之間的修改差異。 + 你可以很自在地使用 svn。他可以讓你察看說明文件檔案不同版本之間的修改差異。 - 例如你要看en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml 版本r33733 和 r33734 的差異，請執行： + 例如你要看 en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml 版本r33733 和 r33734 的差異，請執行： % svn diff -r33733:33734 en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml 要怎麼找出來還有誰要跟我一起翻譯的呢？ - 文件計劃的翻譯 列了目前已知的各翻譯者成果 ，如果已經有其他人也在做跟你一樣的翻譯工作，那麼請不要重複浪費人力， 請與他們聯繫看看還有哪些地方可以幫上忙的。 + 說明文件計劃翻譯頁 列了目前已知的各翻譯者成果 ，如果已經有其他人也在做跟你一樣的翻譯工作，那麼請不要重複浪費人力， 請與他們聯繫看看還有哪些地方可以幫上忙的。 - 若上面並未列出你母語的翻譯，或是也有人要翻譯但還未公開宣布的話，那麼就寄信到 FreeBSD documentation project 郵遞論壇 。 + 若上面並未列出你母語的翻譯，或是也有人要翻譯但還未公開宣布的話，那麼就寄信到 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃郵遞論壇 。 都沒人翻譯為我所使用的語言，該怎麼辦？ - 恭喜啊，你剛好踏上 FreeBSD 你的母語 文件翻譯計劃的啟程之路，歡迎上船。 + 恭喜啊，你剛好踏上 FreeBSD 您的語言 說明文件翻譯計劃的啟程之路，歡迎登船。 首先呢，先判斷是否有妥善規劃時間，因為你只有一個人在翻而已， 因此，相關翻譯成果的公布、與其他可能會幫忙的志工們聯繫這些工作都是你的職責所在。 - 寫信到 FreeBSD documentation project 郵遞論壇 向大家宣布你正準備要翻譯，然後文件計劃的翻譯部分就會更新相關資料 + 寫信到文件計劃郵遞論壇 (Documentation Project mailing list) 向大家宣布你正準備要翻譯，然後文件計劃的翻譯部分就會更新相關資料。 - 若你的國家已經有人提供 FreeBSD 的 mirror(映設) 服務的話，那麼就先跟他們聯繫， 並詢問你是否在上面可以有網頁空間來放相關計劃資料， 以及是否可以有提供 email 帳號或 mailing list 服務。 + 若你的國家已經有人提供 FreeBSD 的鏡像站 (Mirror) 服務的話，那麼就先跟他們聯繫， 並詢問你是否在上面可以有網頁空間來放相關計劃資料，以及是否可以有提供電子郵件帳號或郵遞論壇服務。 然後，就開始翻文件囉，一開始翻譯的時候，先找些篇幅較短的文件會比較容易些 —— 像是 FAQ 啦，或是如何上手之類的說明文章。 - 已經翻好一些文件了，該寄到哪呢？ + 已經翻好一些說明文件了，該寄到哪呢？ - 這要看情況而定。 若你是在翻譯團隊內做的話(像是日本、德國)， 他們會有自己內部流程來決定翻譯文件怎麼送，這些大致流程會在他們網頁上面有寫。 + 這要看情況而定。若你是在翻譯團隊內做的話 (像是日本團隊、德國團隊)， 他們會有自己內部流程來決定翻譯文件怎麼送，這些大致流程會在他們網頁上面有寫。 - 若你是某語系的唯一翻譯者(或你是負責某翻譯計劃，並想把成果回饋給 FreeBSD 計劃) ，那麼你就應該把自己的翻譯成果寄給 FreeBSD 計劃。(細節請看下個問題) + 若你是某語系的唯一翻譯者 (或你是負責某翻譯計劃，並想把成果回饋給 FreeBSD 計劃) ，那麼你就應該把自己的翻譯成果寄給 FreeBSD 計劃。(細節請看下個問題) 我是該語系的唯一翻譯者，該怎麼把翻譯成果寄出去呢？ or 我們是翻譯團隊，該怎麼把我們成員翻譯成果寄出去呢？ - 首先，請先確定你的翻譯成果組織條理分明，並可正確編譯，也就是說： 把它擺到現有文件架構內是可以正確編譯成功的。 + 首先，請先確定你的翻譯成果組織條理分明，並可正確編譯，也就是說： 把它擺到現有說明文件樹內是可以正確編譯成功的。 - 目前，FreeBSD 文件都是放在最上層的 head/ 目錄內。 而該目錄下的則依其語系來做分類命名的，依照 ISO639 定義(在比比 1999/01/20 還新的 FreeBSD 版本的/usr/share/misc/iso639 )。 + 目前，FreeBSD 說明文件都是放在最上層的 head/ 目錄內。而該目錄下的則根據其 ISO639 所定義的語系代碼來做分類命名的 (在 1999/1/20 之後的 FreeBSD 版本中的 /usr/share/misc/iso639)。 - 若你這個語系可能會有不同編碼方式(像是：中文) 那麼就應該會像下面這樣，來依你所使用的編碼方式細分 + 若你這個語系可能會有不同編碼方式 (像是：中文) 那麼就應該會像下面這樣，來依你所使用的編碼方式細分。 最後，你應該建立好各文件的目錄了。 - 舉例來說，假設有瑞典文(Swedish)版的翻譯，那麼應該會長像： + 舉例來說，假設有瑞典文 (Swedish) 版的翻譯，那麼應該會長像： head/ sv_SE.ISO8859-1/ Makefile htdocs/ docproj/ books/ faq/ Makefile book.xml - sv_SE.ISO8859-1是依照 語系(lang).編碼(encoding) 的規則來建立的譯名。 請注意：其中有兩個 Makefiles 檔，它們是用來建構文件的。 + sv_SE.ISO8859-1是依照 語系 (Lang).編碼 (Encoding) 的規則來建立的譯名。 請注意：其中有兩個 Makefile 檔，它們是用來建置說明文件的。 - 然後請用 tar1 與 gzip1 來把你的翻譯文件壓縮起來，並寄到本計劃來。 + 然後請用 tar1 與 gzip1 來把你的說明文件壓縮起來，並寄到本計劃來。 % cd doc % tar cf swedish-docs.tar sv_SE.ISO8859-1 % gzip -9 swedish-docs.tar - 接著，把 swedish-docs.tar.gz 放到網頁空間上，若你沒有自己網頁空間的話(ISP不提供) ，那麼可以該檔寄到 Documentation Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org 來。 + 接著，把 swedish-docs.tar.gz 放到網頁空間上，若你沒有自己網頁空間的話(ISP不提供) ，那麼可以該檔寄到文件工程團隊 Documentation Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org 來。 - 還有，記得用 Bugzilla 提交一個報告以通知大家；你已經寄出翻譯文件了， 還有，若有人可以幫忙檢閱、複審文件的話，對翻譯品質較好， 因為這也有助於提升翻譯品質的流暢度。 + 還有，記得用 Bugzilla 提交一個回報來通知大家你已經提交說明文件了， 還有，若有人可以幫忙檢閱、複審文件的話，對翻譯品質較好， 因為這也有助於提升翻譯品質的流暢度。 - 最後，會有人(可能是文件計劃總管，或是 Documentation Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org 成員) 會檢閱你的翻譯文件，並確認是否可正常編譯。此外，他們會特別注意下列幾點： + 最後，會有人 (可能是文件計劃管理者，或是文件工程團隊 Documentation Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org 成員) 會檢閱你的翻譯文件，並確認是否可正常編譯。此外，他們會特別注意下列幾點： 你的檔案是否都有用 RCS tag (像是 "ID" 之類的)？ sv_SE.ISO8859-1 是否可以順利make all 編譯呢？ make install 是否結果有正確 若有問題的話，那麼檢閱者會叮嚀你，來讓這些翻譯成果可以正確使用。 - 若沒問題的話，那麼就會很快把你的翻譯成果 commit 進去了。 + 若沒問題的話，那麼就會很快把你的翻譯成果提交。 可以加入某語系或某國家才有的東西到翻譯內容內嗎？ 我們希望不要這麼做。 - 舉例來說，假設你正準備把 Handbook 翻譯為韓文版， 並希望把韓國零售商也加到你翻譯的 Handbook 韓文版內。 + 舉例來說，假設你正準備把使用手冊 (Handbook) 翻譯為韓文版， 並希望把韓國零售商也加到你翻譯的韓文版使用手冊內。 我們想不出來有啥原因，為什麼不把這些資訊提供給英文版呢？(或是德文、西班牙文、日文等 …) 因為，有可能英語讀者跑去韓國時，會想買 FreeBSD 相關產品。 此外，這也可以提升 FreeBSD 的可見度，很顯然的，這並不是件壞事啊。 - 若你有某國才有的資料，請(用 Bugzilla )提供給英文版 Handbook 以作為修訂 ，然後再把英文版的修訂部分，翻為你要翻譯的 Handbook 吧。 + 若你有某國才有的資料，請提供給英文版使用手冊以作為修訂 (用 Bugzilla)，然後再把英文版的修訂部分翻為你要翻譯的使用手冊吧。 謝謝。 要怎麼把該語系特有的字元寫進去翻譯內容呢？ - 文件內所有的非 ASCII(Non-ASCII) 字元，都要使用 SGML entities 才能寫進去。 + 說明文件內所有的非 ASCII (Non-ASCII) 的字元，都要使用 SGML entities 才能寫進去。 - 簡單來說，長相一開頭會是 and 符號(&)，然後是該 entity 名稱，最後接上分號(;)。 + 簡單來說，長相一開頭會是 and 符號 (&)，然後是該 Entity 名稱，最後接上分號 (;)。 - 這些 entity 名稱都是 ISO8879 所制訂的，而 port tree 內則 textproc/iso8879。 + 這些 Entity 名稱都是 ISO8879 所制訂的，其在 Port 樹內的 textproc/iso8879。 以下舉一些例子： - Entity名稱 + Entity 名稱 - 實際樣子 + 外觀 - Description + 說明 &eacute; é - 小 e，並帶尖、重音(acute accent) + 小 e，並帶尖、重音 (Acute accent) &Eacute; É - 大 E，並帶尖、重音(acute accent) + 大 E，並帶尖、重音 (Acute accent) &uuml; ü - 小 u，並帶日耳曼語系中的母音變化(umlaut) + 小 u，並帶日耳曼語系中的母音變化 (Umlaut) - 在裝了 iso8879 這個 port 之後，就可以在 /usr/local/share/xml/iso8879 找到這些的詳細列表。 + 在裝了 iso8879 這個 Port 之後，就可以在 /usr/local/share/xml/iso8879 找到這些的詳細列表。 如何稱呼讀者呢？ 在英文文件內，讀者都是以 you 來稱呼，而有些語言並沒有正式/非正式的區隔。 - 若你所要翻的語言可以區別這些差異，那麼請用該語系在一般技術文件上所使用的稱呼吧。 如果容易造成困惑的話，那麼請改用較中性的稱呼來取代。 + 若你所要翻的語言可以區別這些差異，那麼請用該語系在一般技術說明文件上所使用的稱呼吧。 如果容易造成困惑的話，那麼請改用較中性的稱呼來取代。 翻譯成果內要不要附上一些其他訊息呢？ 要。 每份英文版原稿的開頭，通常會有像下面的內容： - <!-- + <!-- The FreeBSD Documentation Project $FreeBSD$ --> - The exact boilerplate may change, but it will always - include a $FreeBSD$ line and the phrase - The FreeBSD Documentation Project. - Note that the $FreeBSD part is expanded automatically - by Subversion, so it should be empty (just - $FreeBSD$) for new - files. + 實際上的內容可能稍有不同，但每份原稿都會附上 $FreeBSD$ 這一行以及 The FreeBSD Documentation Project 宣告。 請注意：$FreeBSD$ 開頭的這行是會由 Subversion 隨著每次異動而自動更改的，所以新檔案的話請保持原狀 (也就是只要寫 $FreeBSD$ 就好了)。 翻譯文件中，必須都要有 $FreeBSD$ 這行，並且把 FreeBSD Documentation Project 這行改為 The FreeBSD language Documentation Project。 此外，還必須加上第三行來指出你所翻譯的，到底是以英文版原稿的哪一版本為母本所做的翻譯。 - 因此呢，西班牙文版(Spanish)的檔案開頭應該是長像這樣： + 因此呢，西班牙文版 (Spanish) 的檔案開頭應該是長像這樣： - <!-- + <!-- The FreeBSD Spanish Documentation Project $FreeBSD$ Original revision: r38674 --> <acronym>PO</acronym> 翻譯 - Introduction + 簡介 - GNU gettext 系統提供翻譯者一個簡單的方法來建立和維護文件的翻譯。翻譯的字串從原始文件題取出來到PO (Portable Object) 檔。字串的翻譯用另外的編輯器輸入。翻譯的字串可以直接使用，或是編譯成原始文件的完整翻譯版本。 + GNU gettext 系統提供翻譯者一個簡單的方法來建立和維護文件的翻譯。翻譯的字串從原始文件題取出來到 PO (Portable Object) 檔。字串的翻譯用另外的編輯器輸入。翻譯的字串可以直接使用，或是編譯成原始文件的完整翻譯版本。 快速上手 - 在 的步驟還必須打開 textproc/docproj port TRANSLATOR 選項。如果沒有打開這個選項，請打開選項後，重新安裝 port。 + 我們會假設您已做過在 中的步驟，除此之外還必須打開 textproc/docproj Port 中的 TRANSLATOR 選項。如果沒有打開這個選項，請打開選項後重新安裝 Port。 # cd /usr/ports/textproc/docproj # make config # make clean deinstall install clean - 這個範例示範如何建立Leap Seconds 短文的西班牙文翻譯 + 這個範例示範如何建立 Leap Seconds 短文的西班牙文翻譯。 安裝 <acronym>PO</acronym> 編輯器 - 編輯翻譯檔案需要PO編輯器。這個範例使用editors/poedit。 + 編輯翻譯檔案需要 PO 編輯器。這個範例使用 editors/poedit。 # cd /usr/ports/editors/poedit # make install clean 初始設定 第一次建立新的翻譯時，目錄結構和 Makefile 必須建立或是從英文版複製過來。 建立新翻譯的目錄。英文文章原始碼位於 ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/ 。西班牙文翻譯將會放在 ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/ 。除了語系目錄的名稱外，其他路徑相同。 % svn mkdir --parents ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/ 從原始文件處將 Makefile 複製到翻譯目錄。 % svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/Makefile \ ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/ 翻譯 翻譯文件公有兩個步驟：將可翻譯的字串從原始文件提去出來，然後翻譯這些字串。重複這些步驟，直到翻譯者認為文件的翻譯部份已經足夠用來產生可讀的翻譯文件。 從英文的原始文件提取字串到 PO 檔： % cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/ % make po 使用 PO 編輯器將翻譯輸入 PO 檔。有幾個不同的編輯器可以使用。這裡用的是 editors/poedit 的 poedit 。 PO 檔名是兩個字元的語系碼後面接底線和兩個字元的區域碼。以西班牙語來說，檔名是 es_ES.po 。 % poedit es_ES.po 產生翻譯文件 產生翻譯文件 % cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/ % make tran 產生的文件名稱與英文原始文件名稱相符，文章通常是 article.xml ，書籍是 book.xml 。 可以轉換成 HTML 來檢查產生的檔案，並用瀏覽器來察看。 % make FORMATS=html % firefox article.html 建立新翻譯 - 建立新翻譯文件的第一步是找到或建立一個目錄來放它。FreeBSD 將翻譯文件放在子目錄，用語系和區域以語系_區域來命名。語系 是小寫的兩個字元碼。接著是底線和兩個字元的大寫 REGION 碼。 + 建立新翻譯文件的第一步是找到或建立一個目錄來放它。FreeBSD 將翻譯文件放在子目錄，用語系和區域以 語系 (lang)_區域 (REGION) 來命名。語系 (lang) 是小寫的兩個字元碼，接著是底線和兩個字元的大寫 REGION 碼。 語系名稱 語言 地區 翻譯目錄名稱 PO 檔名稱 字元集 英文 美國 en_US.ISO8859-1 en_US.po ISO 8859-1 孟加拉文 孟加拉 bn_BD.UTF-8 bn_BD.po UTF-8 丹麥文 丹麥 da_DK.ISO8859-1 da_DK.po ISO 8859-1 德文 德國 de_DE.ISO8859-1 de_DE.po ISO 8859-1 希臘文 希臘 el_GR.ISO8859-7 el_GR.po ISO 8859-7 西班牙文 西班牙 es_ES.ISO8859-1 es_ES.po ISO 8859-1 法文 法國 fr_FR.ISO8859-1 fr_FR.po ISO 8859-1 匈牙利文 匈牙利 hu_HU.ISO8859-2 hu_HU.po ISO 8859-2 義大利文 義大利 it_IT.ISO8859-15 it_IT.po ISO 8859-15 日文 日本 ja_JP.eucJP ja_JP.po EUC JP 韓文 韓國 ko_KR.UTF-8 ko_KR.po UTF-8 蒙古文 蒙古 mn_MN.UTF-8 mn_MN.po UTF-8 荷蘭文 荷蘭 nl_NL.ISO8859-1 nl_NL.po ISO 8859-1 挪威文 挪威 no_NO.ISO8859-1 no_NO.po ISO 8859-1 波蘭文 波蘭 pl_PL.ISO8859-2 pl_PL.po ISO 8859-2 葡萄牙文 巴西 pt_BR.ISO8859-1 pt_BR.po ISO 8859-1 俄文 俄羅斯 ru_RU.KOI8-R ru_RU.po KOI8-R 賽爾維亞 賽爾維亞文 sr_YU.ISO8859-2 sr_YU.po ISO 8859-2 土耳其文 土耳其 tr_TR.ISO8859-9 tr_TR.po ISO 8859-9 中文 中國 zh_CN.UTF-8 zh_CN.po UTF-8 中文 台灣 zh_TW.UTF-8 zh_TW.po UTF-8
- 翻譯位於主要文件目錄的子目錄，這裡假設如 所示，是 ~/doc/。例如德文位於 ~/doc/de_DE.ISO8859-1/， 法文位於 ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/。 + 翻譯位於主要說明文件目錄的子目錄，這裡假設如 所示，是 ~/doc/。例如德文位於 ~/doc/de_DE.ISO8859-1/， 法文位於 ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/。 每個語系目錄包含不同文件類型的子目錄，通常是 articles/ 和 books/。 將目錄名稱組合起來就是文章或書的完整路徑。例如，NanoBSD 文章的法語翻譯在 ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/ 。而使用手冊的蒙古文翻譯在~/doc/mn_MN.UTF-8/books/handbook/ 。 當翻譯到一個新語系時必須建立一個新的語系目錄。如果語系目錄已經存在，那只需要有 articles/ 或 books/ 的子目錄。 - FreeBSD 文件的編譯是由同一個目錄的 Makefile 控制。簡單的文章可以從原始的英語目錄直接複製 Makefile 過來。書籍的翻譯流程結合多個獨立的 book.xml 和 chapter.xml 成為一個檔案， 所以書籍翻譯的 Makefile 必須複製並修改。 + FreeBSD 說明文件的編譯是由同一個目錄的 Makefile 控制。簡單的文章可以從原始的英語目錄直接複製 Makefile 過來。書籍的翻譯流程結合多個獨立的 book.xml 和 chapter.xml 成為一個檔案， 所以書籍翻譯的 Makefile 必須複製並修改。 建立 Porter 手冊的西班牙語翻譯 - 建立Porter 手冊的西班牙文翻譯。原文是位於 ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook/ 的書籍。 + 建立 Porter 手冊 的西班牙文翻譯。原文是位於 ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook/ 的書籍。 西班牙文 books 目錄 ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/ 已經存在，所以只要建立 Porter 手冊的子目錄： % cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/ % svn mkdir porters-handbook A porters-handbook 從原始文件的目錄複製 Makefile ： % cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook % svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook/Makefile . A Makefile 修改 Makefile 內容以產生單一的 book.xml： - # + # # $FreeBSD$ # -# Build the FreeBSD Porter's Handbook。 +# Build the FreeBSD Porter's Handbook. # MAINTAINER=doc@FreeBSD.org DOC?= book FORMATS?= html-split INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?= # XML content SRCS= book.xml # Images from the cross-document image library IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/1.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/2.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/3.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/4.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/5.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/6.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/7.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/8.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/9.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/10.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/11.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/12.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/13.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/14.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/15.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/16.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/17.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/18.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/19.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/20.png IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/21.png URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../.. DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../.. .include "${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk" 現在文件結構已經準備好讓翻譯者執行 make po 開始翻譯。 建立 <acronym>PGP</acronym> 金鑰文章的法語翻譯。 - 建立 PGP 金鑰文章的法文翻譯。原文是位於 ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys/ 的文章。 + 建立 PGP 金鑰文章 的法文翻譯。原文是位於 ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys/ 的文章。 - 法文 article 目錄 ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/ 已經存在，所以只要建立 PGP 金鑰文章的子目錄： + 法文文章目錄 ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/ 已經存在，所以只要建立 PGP 金鑰文章的子目錄： % cd ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/ % svn mkdir pgpkeys A pgpkeys 從原始文件的目錄複製 Makefile ： % cd ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys % svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys/Makefile . A Makefile 檢查 Makefile 的內容。因為這是簡單的文章，此例的 Makefile 不用修改。第二行的 $FreeBSD...$ 版本字串將會在檔案提交時被版本控制系統替換掉。 - # + # # $FreeBSD$ # -# Article：PGP Keys +# Article: PGP Keys DOC?= article FORMATS?= html WITH_ARTICLE_TOC?= YES INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?= SRCS= article.xml -# To build with just key fingerprints, set FINGERPRINTS_ONLY。 +# To build with just key fingerprints, set FINGERPRINTS_ONLY. URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../.. DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../.. .include "${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk" 文章結構處理好後， 可以執行建立 make po 建立 PO 檔。 翻譯 - gettext系統大幅減少翻譯者要追蹤的事情。 字串從原始文件提取到PO 檔。再用 PO 檔編輯器輸入字串的翻譯。 + gettext 系統大幅減少翻譯者要追蹤的事情。 字串從原始文件提取到 PO 檔。再用 PO 檔編輯器輸入字串的翻譯。 FreeBSD PO 翻譯系統不會覆蓋掉 PO 檔。所以提取步驟可以在任何時候重複執行來更新 PO 檔。 - 用 PO 檔編輯器來編輯檔案。此例是用 editors/poedit，因為它很簡單而且系統需求低。其他的 PO 檔編輯器提供一些特點，能使翻譯工作更輕鬆。Ports 裡有數個編輯器，包括 devel/gtranslator 。 + 用 PO 檔編輯器來編輯檔案。此例是用 editors/poedit，因為它很簡單而且系統需求低。其他的 PO 檔編輯器提供一些特點，能使翻譯工作更輕鬆。Port 套件集裡有數個編輯器，包括 devel/gtranslator 。 保留 PO 檔是很重要的。它包含所有的翻譯成果。 翻譯 Porter 手冊到西班牙文 輸入 Porter 手冊的西班牙文內容 切換到西班牙文 Porter 手冊的目錄並更新 PO 檔。產生的 PO 檔如 所示，名叫 es_ES.po 。 % cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook % make po 使用 PO 檔編輯器輸入翻譯： % poedit es_ES.po 給翻譯者的提示 保留 <acronym>XML</acronym> 標籤 - Preserve XML tags that are shown in - the English original. + 保留在英文原文的 XML 標籤。 保留 <acronym>XML</acronym> 標籤 英文原文： If acronymNTPacronym is not being used 西班牙文翻譯： Si acronymNTPacronym no se utiliza 保留空白 - 保留要翻譯字串前後的空白。翻譯的版本也要有這些空白。 + 保留要翻譯字串前後的空白，翻譯過的版本也需要有這些空白。 不要翻譯的標籤 有些標籤的內容要一字不差地保留，不要翻譯。 citerefentry command filename literal manvolnum orgname package programlisting prompt refentrytitle screen userinput varname - <literal>$FreeBSD$</literal> - Strings + <literal>$FreeBSD$</literal> 字串 - The $FreeBSD$ version strings used in - files require special handling. In examples like - , these - strings are not meant to be expanded. The English documents - use &dollar; entities to avoid - including actual literal dollar signs in the file: + 在檔案中使用到的 $FreeBSD$ 版本字串都需要特別處理，例如在 ，使用這些字串的用意並非要展開成版本。英文的說明文件會使用 &dollar; Entity 來避免在檔案中用到錢字符號： &dollar;FreeBSD&dollar; 版本控制符號不會把 &dollar; entities 看成金錢符號，所以不會把字串展開成版本字串。 - 當 PO 檔建立後，範例中的 &dollar; entities 被實際的金錢符號取代。當檔案提交時，產生的 $FreeBSD$ 將會被版本控制系統展開。 + 當 PO 檔建立之後，在範例中使用到的 &dollar; Entity 會被取代成實際的錢字符號，這會使的 $FreeBSD$ 字串在提交時錯誤的被版本控制系統展開成版本字串。 - 英文文件用的相同技術可以被用在翻譯上。翻譯時用 &dollar; 來取代金錢符號，輸入到 PO 檔編輯器： + 在英文文件上使用的方法也可以用在翻譯上，翻譯時在 PO 編輯器用 &dollar; 來取代金錢符號： &dollar;FreeBSD&dollar; 編譯翻譯的文件 原文的翻譯版本可以在任何時候被建立。未翻譯的部份會以英文呈獻。大部份 PO 編輯器有指標可以顯示翻譯完成度。這讓翻譯者更容易看翻譯好的字串是否足夠來編譯最終的文件。 編譯西班牙文 Porter 手冊 編譯和預覽之前範例翻譯的西班牙文版 Porter 手冊 - 編譯翻譯好的文件。因為原文是書籍，所以產生的文件是book.xml。 + 編譯翻譯好的文件。因為原文是書籍，所以產生的文件是 book.xml。 % cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook % make tran - 轉換翻譯好的book.xml成HTML並用Firefox來瀏覽。這和英文版是相同的步驟，其他 FORMATS 也可以這樣做。請見 。 + 轉換翻譯好的 book.xml 成 HTML 並用 Firefox 來瀏覽。這和英文版是相同的步驟，其他 FORMATS 也可以這樣做。請見 。 % make FORMATS=html % firefox book.html 提交新翻譯 準備要提交的新翻譯。這包含新增檔案到版本控制系統，對檔案設定額外的屬性，並建立 diff 來提交。 - 範例中產生的 diff 檔可以被附加到 documentation bug report 或 code review 。 + 範例中產生的 diff 檔可以被附加到 文件問題回報 (Documentation bug report) 或 程式碼審查 (Code review) 。 NanoBSD 文章的西班牙文翻譯 增加 FreeBSD 版本字串註解到 PO 檔的第一行： #$FreeBSD$ 增加 Makefile 、PO 檔和產生的 XML 翻譯到版本控制系統： % cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/ % ls Makefile article.xml es_ES.po % svn add Makefile article.xml es_ES.po A Makefile A article.xml A es_ES.po - 設定這些檔案的 Subversion svn:keywords 屬性到 FreeBSD=%H，讓提交時 $FreeBSD$ 字串可以被展開成路徑、版本、日期和作者。 + 在這些檔案設定 Subversion svn:keywords 屬性為 FreeBSD=%H 讓 $FreeBSD$ 字串可以在提交時被展開成為路徑、修訂、日期以及作者： % svn propset svn:keywords FreeBSD=%H Makefile article.xml es_ES.po property 'svn:keywords' set on 'Makefile' property 'svn:keywords' set on 'article.xml' property 'svn:keywords' set on 'es_ES.po' - 設定檔案的MIME 類型。書籍和文章是 text/xml ，PO 檔是 text/x-gettext-translation 。 + 設定檔案的 MIME 類型。書籍和文章是 text/xml ，PO 檔是 text/x-gettext-translation 。 % svn propset svn:mime-type text/x-gettext-translation es_ES.po property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'es_ES.po' % svn propset svn:mime-type text/xml article.xml property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'article.xml' 從 ~/doc/ 建立這些新檔案的 diff，讓檔名顯示完整的路徑。這可以幫助提交者辨識目標語系目錄。 % cd ~/doc svn diff es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/ > /tmp/es_nanobsd.diff Explaining-BSD 文章的韓文 <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> 翻譯 增加 FreeBSD 版本字串註解到 PO 檔的第一行： #$FreeBSD$ 增加 Makefile 、PO 檔和產生的 XML 翻譯到版本控制系統： % cd ~/doc/ko_KR.UTF-8/articles/explaining-bsd/ % ls Makefile article.xml ko_KR.po % svn add Makefile article.xml ko_KR.po A Makefile A article.xml A ko_KR.po - 設定這些檔案的 Subversion svn:keywords 屬性到 FreeBSD=%H，讓提交時 $FreeBSD$ 字串可以被展開成路徑、版本、日期和作者。 + 在這些檔案設定 Subversion svn:keywords 屬性為 FreeBSD=%H 讓 $FreeBSD$ 字串可以在提交時被展開成為路徑、修訂、日期以及作者： % svn propset svn:keywords FreeBSD=%H Makefile article.xml ko_KR.po property 'svn:keywords' set on 'Makefile' property 'svn:keywords' set on 'article.xml' property 'svn:keywords' set on 'ko_KR.po' 設定檔案的 MIME 類型。因為這些檔案使用 UTF-8 字元集，這也需要指定。為了防止版本控制系統將這些檔案誤認為二進位資料，fbsd:notbinary 屬性也需要設定。 % svn propset svn:mime-type 'text/x-gettext-translation；charset=UTF-8' ko_KR.po property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'ko_KR.po' % svn propset fbsd:notbinary yes ko_KR.po property 'fbsd:notbinary' set on 'ko_KR.po' % svn propset svn:mime-type 'text/xml；charset=UTF-8' article.xml property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'article.xml' % svn propset fbsd:notbinary yes article.xml property 'fbsd:notbinary' set on 'article.xml' 從 ~/doc/ 建立這些新檔案的 diff。 % cd ~/doc svn diff ko_KR.UTF-8/articles/explaining-bsd > /tmp/ko-explaining.diff 寫作風格 叮嚀 Technical documentation can be improved by consistent use of several principles. Most of these can be classified into three goals: be clear, be complete, and be concise. These goals can conflict with each other. Good writing consists of a balance between them. - Be Clear + 要明瞭 Clarity is extremely important. The reader may be a novice, or reading the document in a second language. Strive for simple, uncomplicated text that clearly explains the concepts. Avoid flowery or embellished speech, jokes, or colloquial expressions. Write as simply and clearly as possible. Simple text is easier to understand and translate. Keep explanations as short, simple, and clear as possible. Avoid empty phrases like in order to, which usually just means to. Avoid potentially patronizing words like basically. Avoid Latin terms like i.e. or cf., which may be unknown outside of academic or scientific groups. Write in a formal style. Avoid addressing the reader as you. For example, say copy the file to /tmp rather than you can copy the file to /tmp. Give clear, correct, tested examples. A trivial example is better than no example. A good example is better yet. Do not give bad examples, identifiable by apologies or sentences like but really it should never be done that way. Bad examples are worse than no examples. Give good examples, because even when warned not to use the example as shown, the reader will usually just use the example as shown. Avoid weasel words like should, might, try, or could. These words imply that the speaker is unsure of the facts, and create doubt in the reader. Similarly, give instructions as imperative commands: not you should do this, but merely do this. - Be Complete + 要完整 Do not make assumptions about the reader's abilities or skill level. Tell them what they need to know. Give links to other documents to provide background information without having to recreate it. Put yourself in the reader's place, anticipate the questions they will ask, and answer them. - Be Concise + 要簡潔 While features should be documented completely, sometimes there is so much information that the reader cannot easily find the specific detail needed. The balance between being complete and being concise is a challenge. One approach is to have an introduction, then a quick start section that describes the most common situation, followed by an in-depth reference section. - Guidelines + 準則 To promote consistency between the myriad authors of the FreeBSD documentation, some guidelines have been drawn up for authors to follow. - Use American English Spelling + 使用美式英語拼寫 There are several variants of English, with different spellings for the same word. Where spellings differ, use the American English variant. color, not colour, rationalize, not rationalise, and so on. The use of British English may be accepted in the case of a contributed article, however the spelling must be consistent within the whole document. The other documents such as books, web site, manual pages, etc. will have to use American English. - Do not use contractions + 不要使用縮寫式 Do not use contractions. Always spell the phrase out in full. Don't use contractions is wrong. Avoiding contractions makes for a more formal tone, is more precise, and is slightly easier for translators. - Use the serial comma + 使用逗號串行 In a list of items within a paragraph, separate each item from the others with a comma. Separate the last item from the others with a comma and the word and. For example:
This is a list of one, two and three items.
Is this a list of three items, one, two, and three, or a list of two items, one and two and three? It is better to be explicit and include a serial comma:
This is a list of one, two, and three items.
- Avoid redundant phrases + 避免多餘的語句 Do not use redundant phrases. In particular, the command, the file, and man command are often redundant. For example, commands: Wrong: Use the svn command to update sources. Right: Use svn to update sources. Filenames: Wrong: … in the filename /etc/rc.local… Right: … in /etc/rc.local… Manual page references (the second example uses citerefentry with the &man.csh.1; entity):. Wrong: See man csh for more information. Right: See csh1. - Two spaces between sentences + 在句子之間空兩個空白 Always use two spaces between sentences, as it improves readability and eases use of tools such as Emacs. A period and spaces followed by a capital letter does not always mark a new sentence, especially in names. Jordan K. Hubbard is a good example. It has a capital H following a period and a space, and is certainly not a new sentence. For more information about writing style, see Elements of Style, by William Strunk. 風格指南 - 由於文件是由眾多作者所維護，為了保持寫作風格的一貫性， 請遵守下列撰寫風格慣例。 + 由於說明文件是由眾多作者所維護，為了保持寫作風格的一貫性， 請遵守下列撰寫風格慣例。 大小寫 Tag 的部份都是用小寫字母，譬如是用 para ，而非PARA。 而 SGML 內文則是用大寫字母表示，像是： <!ENTITY…> 及 <!DOCTYPE…>， 而不是 <!entity…> 及 <!doctype…>。 - Acronyms + 縮寫 縮寫字(acronym)通常在書中第一次提到時，必須同時列出完整拼法， 比如：Network Time Protocol (NTP)。 定義縮寫字之後，應該儘量只使用該縮寫字(而非完整詞彙， 除非使用完整詞彙可以更能表達語意)來表達即可。 通常每本書只會第一次提到時，才會列出完整詞彙， 但若您高興也可以在每章第一次提到時又列出完整詞彙。 所有縮寫要包在acronym標籤內。 縮排 無論檔案縮排設定為何， 每個檔案的第一行都不縮排。 未完的標籤會以多兩個空白來增加縮排， 結尾的標籤則少兩個空白來縮減縮排。 若已達 8 個空白，則以 tab 取代之。 此外，在 tab 前面不要再用空白，也不要在每行後面加上空白。 每個 tag 的內文若超過一行的話，則接下來的就多兩個空白以做縮排。 舉個例子，這節所用的寫法大致是下面這樣： chapter title...title sect1 title...title sect2 titleIndentationtitle paraThe first line in each file starts with no indentation, emphasisregardlessemphasis of the indentation level of the file which might contain the current file。para ... sect2 sect1 chapter 有長屬性的標籤也是遵循一樣的原則。遵守縮排規則可以幫助編輯和作者了解哪些內容在標籤內： paraSee the link linkend="gmirror-troubleshooting"Troubleshootinglink section if there are problems booting. Powering down and disconnecting the original filenameada0filename disk will allow it to be kept as an offline backup.para paraIt is also possible to journal the boot disk of a &os; system. Refer to the article link xlink:href="&url.articles.gjournal-desktop;"Implementing UFS Journaling on a Desktop PClink for detailed instructions.para When an element is too long to fit on the remainder of a line without wrapping, moving the start tag to the next line can make the source easier to read. In this example, the systemitem element has been moved to the next line to avoid wrapping and indenting: paraWith file flags, even systemitem class="username"rootsystemitem can be prevented from removing or altering files。para Configurations to help various text editors conform to these guidelines can be found in . 標籤風格 - 標籤空行 + 標籤間距 - 同一縮排等級的標籤要以空一行來做區隔，而不同縮排等級的則不必。 比如： + 同一縮排階層的標籤要以空一行來做區隔，而不同縮排階層的則不必。 比如： article lang='en' articleinfo titleNIStitle pubdateOctober 1999pubdate abstract para... ... ...para abstract articleinfo sect1 title...title para...para sect1 sect1 title...title para...para sect1 article - 標籤的分行 + 分隔標籤 像是 itemizedlist 這類的標籤事實上本身不含任何文字資料，必須得由其他標籤來補充內文。 這類的標籤會獨用一整行。 另外，像是 para 及 term 這類的標籤並不需搭配其他標籤， 就可附上文字資料，並且在標籤後面的同一行內即可立即寫上這些內文。 當然，這兩類的標籤結尾時也是跟上面道理相同。 不過，當上述這兩種標籤混用時，會有很明顯的困擾。 當第一類標籤的後面接上第二類標籤的話， 那麼要把這兩類標籤各自分行來寫。 後者標籤的段落， 也是需要做適當縮排調整。 而第二類標籤結尾時，可以與第一類標籤的結尾放在同一行。 - 空白的更改 + 空白變更 - 在提交修改時，請別在修改內容的同時， 也一起更改編排格式。。 + 在提交修改時，請別在修改內容的同時也一起更改編排格式。 - 如此一來，像是 Handbook 翻譯團隊才能迅速找出你改了哪些內容， 而不用費心思去判斷該行的改變，是由於格式重排或者內容異動。 + 如此一來，像是翻譯團隊才能迅速找出你改了哪些內容， 而不用費心思去判斷該行的改變，是由於格式重排或者內容異動。 舉例說明，若要在某段加上兩個句子，如此一來該段落的某行勢必會超出 80 縱列，這時請先 commmit 修改。 接著，再修飾過長行落的換行，然後再次 commit 之。 而第二次的 commit 紀錄，請明確說明這只是 whitespace-only (修改空白而已) 的更改，如此一來，翻譯團隊就可以忽略第二次 commit 了 。 - Nonbreaking space + 不斷行空白 - 請避免一些情況下的斷行：造成版面醜醜的、或是須連貫表達的同一句子。 斷行的情況會隨所閱讀的工具不同而有所不同。 尤其是透過純文字瀏覽器來看 HTML 時會更明顯看到類似下面這樣不好的編排段落： + 請避免一些情況下的斷行：造成版面醜醜的、或是須連貫表達的同一句子。 斷行的情況會隨所閱讀的工具不同而有所不同。 尤其是透過純文字瀏覽器來看 HTML 說明文件時會更明顯看到類似下面這樣不好的編排段落： Data capacity ranges from 40 MB to 15 GB。 Hardware compression … - 請使用 &nbsp; 以避免同句子之間的斷行， 以下示範如何使用 nonbreaking spaces： + 請使用 &nbsp; 以避免同句子之間的斷行， 以下示範如何使用不斷行空白： 在數字與單位之間： 57600&nbsp;bps 在程式名稱與版號之間： &os;&nbsp;9.2 - multiword 之間 (使用時請小心，像是 The FreeBSD Brazilian Portuguese Documentation Project 這類由三到四個字所組成的， 則不用加。)： + 多個單字的名稱之間 (在套用到如 The FreeBSD Brazilian Portuguese Documentation Project 這種由三到四個字所組成的名稱時請小心)： Sun&nbsp;Microsystems 詞彙表 以下詞彙表列出使用在 FreeBSD 文件的正確拼法和大小寫。 若找不到要找的詞彙，請詢問 FreeBSD documentation project mailing list 。 - Word - XML Code - Notes + 字詞 + XML 程式碼 + 備註 CD-ROM acronymCD-ROMacronym DoS (Denial of Service) acronymDoSacronym email file system IPsec Internet manual page mail server name server Ports Collection read-only Soft Updates stdin varnamestdinvarname stdout varnamestdoutvarname stderr varnamestderrvarname Subversion applicationSubversionapplication - 不要用大寫SVN來表示 Subversion應用程式。以commandsvncommand來表示指令。 + 不要用大寫 SVN 來表示 Subversion 應用程式。若要表示指令，請使用 commandsvncommand。 UNIX &unix; userland - 指user space，不是核心。 + 指那些要會用在使用者空間 (User space) 而非核心的東西。 web server - Editor Configuration + 編輯器設定 Adjusting text editor configuration can make working on document files quicker and easier, and help documents conform to FDP guidelines. <application>Vim</application> Install from editors/vim or editors/vim-lite, then follow the configuration instructions in . - Use + 使用 Press P to reformat paragraphs or text that has been selected in Visual mode. Press T to replace groups of eight spaces with a tab. - Configuration + 設置 Edit ~/.vimrc, adding these lines to the end of the file: if has("autocmd") au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sgml,*.ent,*.xsl,*.xml call Set_SGML() au BufNewFile,BufRead *.[1-9] call ShowSpecial() endif " has(autocmd) function Set_Highlights() "match ExtraWhitespace /^\s* \s*\|\s\+$/ highlight default link OverLength ErrorMsg match OverLength /\%71v.\+/ return 0 endfunction function ShowSpecial() setlocal list listchars=tab:>>,trail:*,eol:$ hi def link nontext ErrorMsg return 0 endfunction " ShowSpecial() function Set_SGML() setlocal number syn match sgmlSpecial "&[^;]*;" setlocal syntax=sgml setlocal filetype=xml setlocal shiftwidth=2 setlocal textwidth=70 setlocal tabstop=8 setlocal softtabstop=2 setlocal formatprg="fmt -p" setlocal autoindent setlocal smartindent " Rewrap paragraphs noremap P gqj " Replace spaces with tabs noremap T :s/ /\t/<CR> call ShowSpecial() call Set_Highlights() return 0 endfunction " Set_SGML() <application>Emacs</application> Install from editors/emacs or editors/emacs-devel. - Validation + 檢驗 Emacs's nxml-mode uses compact relax NG schemas for validating XML. A compact relax NG schema for FreeBSD's extension to DocBook 5.0 is included in the documentation repository. To configure nxml-mode to validate using this schema, create ~/.emacs.d/schema/schemas.xml and add these lines to the file: locatingRules xmlns="http://thaiopensource.com/ns/locating-rules/1.0" documentElement localName="section" typeId="DocBook" documentElement localName="chapter" typeId="DocBook" documentElement localName="article" typeId="DocBook" documentElement localName="book" typeId="DocBook" typeId id="DocBook" uri="/usr/local/share/xml/docbook/5.0/rng/docbook.rnc" locatingRules - Automated Proofreading with Flycheck and Igor + 使用 Flycheck 和 Igor 自動化校對 The Flycheck package is available from Milkypostman's Emacs Lisp Package Archive (MELPA). If MELPA is not already in Emacs's packages-archives, it can be added by evaluating (add-to-list 'package-archives '("melpa" . "http://stable.melpa.org/packages/") t) Add the line to Emacs's initialization file (one of ~/.emacs, ~/.emacs.el, or ~.emacs.d/init.el) to make this change permanent. To install Flycheck, evaluate (package-install 'flycheck) Create a Flycheck checker for textproc/igor by evaluating (flycheck-define-checker igor "FreeBSD Documentation Project sanity checker. See URLs http://www.freebsd.org/docproj/ and http://www.freshports.org/textproc/igor/." :command ("igor" "-X" source-inplace) :error-parser flycheck-parse-checkstyle :modes (nxml-mode) :standard-input t) (add-to-list 'flycheck-checkers 'igor 'append) Again, add these lines to Emacs's initialization file to make the changes permanent. - FreeBSD Documentation Specific Settings + FreeBSD 說明文件特定的設定 To apply settings specific to the FreeBSD documentation project, create .dir-locals.el in the root directory of the documentation repository and add these lines to the file: ;;; Directory Local Variables ;;; For more information see (info "(emacs) Directory Variables") ((nxml-mode (eval . (turn-on-auto-fill)) (fill-column . 70) (eval . (require 'flycheck)) (eval . (flycheck-mode 1)) (flycheck-checker . igor) (eval . (add-to-list 'rng-schema-locating-files "~/.emacs.d/schema/schemas.xml")))) <application>nano</application> Install from editors/nano or editors/nano-devel. - Configuration + 設置 Copy the sample XML syntax highlight file to the user's home directory: % cp /usr/local/share/nano/xml.nanorc ~/.nanorc Add these lines to the new ~/.nanorc. syntax "xml" "\.([jrs]html?|xml|xslt?)$" # trailing whitespace color ,blue "[[:space:]]+$" # multiples of eight spaces at the start a line # (after zero or more tabs) should be a tab color ,blue "^([TAB]*[ ]{8})+" # tabs after spaces color ,yellow "( )+TAB" # highlight indents that have an odd number of spaces color ,red "^(([ ]{2})+|(TAB+))*[ ]{1}[^ ]{1}" # lines longer than 70 characters color ,yellow "^(.{71})|(TAB.{63})|(TAB{2}.{55})|(TAB{3}.{47}).+$" Process the file to create embedded tabs: % perl -i'' -pe 's/TAB/\t/g' ~/.nanorc - Use + 使用 Specify additional helpful options when running the editor: % nano -AKipwz -r 70 -T8 chapter.xml Users of csh1 can define an alias in ~/.cshrc to automate these options: alias nano "nano -AKipwz -r 70 -T8" After the alias is defined, the options will be added automatically: % nano chapter.xml 他山之石 This document is deliberately not an exhaustive discussion of XML, the DTDs listed, and the FreeBSD Documentation Project. For more information about these, you are encouraged to see the following web sites. - FreeBSD 文件計劃 + FreeBSD 說明文件計劃 - FreeBSD 文件計劃網頁 + FreeBSD 說明文件計劃網頁 FreeBSD 使用手冊 XML W3C's XML 網頁 SGML/XML 網頁 HTML 全球資訊網協會 The HTML 4.0 規格表 DocBook The DocBook 技術委員會， DocBook DTD的維護者 - DocBook：The Definitive Guide， DocBook DTD的線上文件。 + DocBook：The Definitive Guide， DocBook DTD 的線上說明文件。 The DocBook Open Repository contains DSSSL stylesheets and other resources for people using DocBook - 舉例 + 範例 These examples are not exhaustive—they do not contain all the elements that might be desirable to use, particularly in a document's front matter. For more examples of DocBook markup, examine the XML source for this and other documents available in the Subversion doc repository, or available online starting at http://svnweb.FreeBSD.org/doc/. DocBook <tag>book</tag> DocBook <tag>book</tag> <!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN" "http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd"> book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="en" info titleAn Example Booktitle author personname firstnameYour first namefirstname surnameYour surnamesurname personname affiliation address emailfoo@example.comemail address affiliation author copyright year2000year holderCopyright string hereholder copyright abstract paraIf your book has an abstract then it should go here。para abstract info preface titlePrefacetitle paraYour book may have a preface, in which case it should be placed here。para preface chapter titleMy First Chaptertitle paraThis is the first chapter in my book。para sect1 titleMy First Sectiontitle paraThis is the first section in my book。para sect1 chapter book DocBook <tag>article</tag> DocBook <tag>article</tag> <!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN" "http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd"> article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="en" info titleAn Example Articletitle author personname firstnameYour first namefirstname surnameYour surnamesurname personname affiliation address emailfoo@example.comemail address affiliation author copyright year2000year holderCopyright string hereholder copyright abstract paraIf your article has an abstract then it should go here。para abstract info sect1 titleMy First Sectiontitle paraThis is the first section in my article。para sect2 titleMy First Sub-Sectiontitle paraThis is the first sub-section in my article。para sect2 sect1 article Index: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po (revision 50084) +++ head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po (revision 50085) @@ -1,12799 +1,13359 @@ # $FreeBSD$ # raycherng, 2016. # raycherng, 2016. # raycherng, 2016. # raycherng, 2016. # raycherng, 2016. # raycherng, 2016. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2016-06-30 06:41+0800\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2016-06-30 06:13+0800\n" -"Last-Translator: raycherng <>\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-03-25 12:41+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2017-03-25 12:43+0800\n" +"Last-Translator: Chien Wei Lin \n" "Language-Team: Chinese \n" "Language: zh_TW\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" -"X-Generator: Poedit 1.8.4\n" +"X-Generator: Poedit 1.8.12\n" #. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME , YEAR1, YEAR2 msgctxt "_" msgid "translator-credits" msgstr "translator-credits" #. (itstool) path: info/title #: book.translate.xml:62 msgid "FreeBSD Documentation Project Primer for New Contributors" -msgstr "FreeBSD 文件計畫入門書" +msgstr "給新貢獻人員的 FreeBSD 說明文件計畫入門書" #. (itstool) path: info/author #: book.translate.xml:66 msgid "The FreeBSD Documentation Project" -msgstr "FreeBSD 文件計劃" +msgstr "FreeBSD 說明文件計劃" #. (itstool) path: info/copyright #: book.translate.xml:68 msgid "" "1998 1999 2000 2001 " "2002 2003 2004 2005 " "2006 2007 2008 2009 " "2010 2011 2012 2013 " "2014 DocEng" msgstr "" "1998 1999 2000 2001 " "2002 2003 2004 2005 " "2006 2007 2008 2009 " "2010 2011 2012 2013 " "2014 DocEng" #. (itstool) path: info/pubdate #. (itstool) path: info/releaseinfo #: book.translate.xml:89 book.translate.xml:91 msgid "" -"$FreeBSD$" +"$FreeBSD: head/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml 47339 2015-09-02 " +"20:30:53Z wblock $" msgstr "" -"$FreeBSD$" #. (itstool) path: legalnotice/title #: book.translate.xml:95 msgid "Copyright" msgstr "版權" #. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para #: book.translate.xml:97 msgid "" "Redistribution and use in source (XML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms (XML, " "HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without modification, are " "permitted provided that the following conditions are met:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:104 msgid "" "Redistributions of source code (XML DocBook) must retain the above copyright " "notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as the first " "lines of this file unmodified." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:110 msgid "" "Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs, converted to " "PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce the above copyright " "notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the " "documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: important/para #: book.translate.xml:119 msgid "" "THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD DOCUMENTATION PROJECT \"AS IS" "\" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE " "IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE " "ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD DOCUMENTATION PROJECT BE " "LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR " "CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF " "SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS " "INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN " "CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) " "ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF " "THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: abstract/para #: book.translate.xml:136 msgid "" "Thank you for becoming a part of the FreeBSD Documentation Project. Your " "contribution is extremely valuable, and we appreciate it." -msgstr "感謝您參與 FreeBSD 文件計劃，您的點滴貢獻，都相當寶貴。" +msgstr "感謝您參與 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃，您的點滴貢獻，都相當寶貴。" #. (itstool) path: abstract/para #: book.translate.xml:140 msgid "" "This primer covers details needed to start contributing to the FreeBSD " "Documentation Project, or FDP, including tools, software, " "and the philosophy behind the Documentation Project." msgstr "" -"本入手書內容包括：如何開始著手貢獻FreeBSD 文件計劃 (簡稱： FDP )的各項細節，以及會用到的一些工具、軟體 ，以及文件計畫的宗旨。" +"本入手書內容包括：如何開始著手貢獻 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃 (FreeBSD " +"Documentation Project, FDP) 的各項細節，以及會用到的一些工" +"具、軟體 ，以及文件計畫的宗旨。" #. (itstool) path: abstract/para #: book.translate.xml:146 msgid "" "This is a work in progress. Corrections and additions are always welcome." msgstr "本入門書仍在持續撰寫中。任何修正或新增內容的建議都非常歡迎。" #. (itstool) path: preface/title #: book.translate.xml:152 msgid "Preface" msgstr "序" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:155 msgid "Shell Prompts" -msgstr "Shell 提示符號(Prompts)" +msgstr "Shell 提示符號" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:157 msgid "" "This table shows the default system prompt and superuser prompt. The " "examples use these prompts to indicate which type of user is running the " "example." msgstr "" "下表顯示出一般使用者帳號與 root 的提示符號，在所有的文件例子中會用提示符號" "(prompt) ，來提醒您該用哪種帳號才對。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:165 msgid "User" msgstr "帳號" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:166 msgid "Prompt" msgstr "提示符號" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:172 msgid "Normal user" msgstr "一般使用者" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:173 book.translate.xml:4370 +#: book.translate.xml:173 book.translate.xml:4353 msgid "%" msgstr "%" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:177 msgid "root" msgstr "root" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:178 book.translate.xml:4363 +#: book.translate.xml:178 book.translate.xml:4346 msgid "#" msgstr "#" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:186 msgid "Typographic Conventions" msgstr "書中所用的編排風格" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:188 msgid "This table describes the typographic conventions used in this book." msgstr "下表為本書中所使用編排風格方式" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:195 msgid "Meaning" msgstr "代表意義" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #. (itstool) path: appendix/title -#: book.translate.xml:196 book.translate.xml:4870 book.translate.xml:9167 +#: book.translate.xml:196 book.translate.xml:4853 book.translate.xml:9225 msgid "Examples" -msgstr "舉例" +msgstr "範例" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:202 msgid "The names of commands." msgstr "指令" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:203 msgid "Use ls -l to list all files." msgstr "使用 ls -l 來列出所有的檔案。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:208 msgid "The names of files." msgstr "檔名" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:209 msgid "Edit .login." msgstr "編輯 .login 。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:213 msgid "On-screen computer output." msgstr "螢幕上會出現的訊息" #. (itstool) path: entry/screen #: book.translate.xml:214 #, no-wrap msgid "You have mail." msgstr "You have mail." #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:218 msgid "What the user types, contrasted with on-screen computer output." msgstr "輸入指令後，螢幕上會出現的對應內容。" #. (itstool) path: entry/screen #: book.translate.xml:221 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% date +\"The time is %H:%M\"\n" "The time is 09:18" msgstr "" "% date +\"The time is %H:%M\"\n" "The time is 09:18" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:226 msgid "Manual page references." msgstr "要參考的線上手冊" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:227 msgid "" "Use su1 to change user identity." msgstr "" "使用 su1 來切換帳號。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:231 msgid "User and group names." msgstr "使用者名稱和群組名稱" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:232 msgid "Only root can do this." msgstr "" "只有 root 才可以做這件事。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:237 msgid "Emphasis." msgstr "語氣的強調。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:238 msgid "The user must do this." msgstr "使用者必須這樣做" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:243 msgid "Text that the user is expected to replace with the actual text." msgstr "打指令時，可替換的部份" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:246 msgid "" "To search for a keyword in the manual pages, type man -k " "keyword" msgstr "" "要搜尋線上手冊的關鍵字，請輸入 man -k 關鍵字" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:252 msgid "Environment variables." msgstr "環境變數。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:253 msgid "$HOME is set to the user's home directory." msgstr "$HOME 是指帳號的家目錄所在處。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:262 msgid "Notes, Tips, Important Information, Warnings, and Examples" -msgstr "注意、技巧、重要訊息、警告、與範例的運用。" +msgstr "注意、提示、重要、警告與範例" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:265 msgid "Notes, warnings, and examples appear within the text." msgstr "出現在本文中的注意、警告、與範例。" #. (itstool) path: note/para #: book.translate.xml:269 msgid "" "Notes are represented like this, and contain information to take note of, as " "it may affect what the user does." msgstr "" "注意：表示需要注意的事項，其中包括您需要注意的事情，因為這些事情可能會影響到" "操作結果。" #. (itstool) path: tip/para #: book.translate.xml:275 msgid "" "Tips are represented like this, and contain information helpful to the user, " "like showing an easier way to do something." msgstr "提示：提供可能對您有用的資訊，例如簡化操作方式的技巧說明。" #. (itstool) path: important/para #: book.translate.xml:281 msgid "" "Important information is represented like this. Typically, these show extra " "steps the user may need to take." msgstr "" "重要：表示要特別注意的事情。一般來說，它們會包括操作指令時需要加的額外參數。" #. (itstool) path: warning/para #: book.translate.xml:287 msgid "" "Warnings are represented like this, and contain information warning about " "possible damage if the instructions are not followed. This damage may be " "physical, to the hardware or the user, or it may be non-physical, such as " "the inadvertent deletion of important files." msgstr "" "警告：表示警告事項，比如如果您不則可能導致的損失。這些損失可能是對您或硬體造" "成實際傷害， 也可能是無法估計的損害，例如一時疏忽而刪除重要檔案...。" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:295 msgid "A Sample Example" -msgstr "一個範例" +msgstr "範例的範本" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:297 msgid "" "Examples are represented like this, and typically contain examples showing a " "walkthrough, or the results of a particular action." msgstr "" "這是舉例說明而已，通常包含應遵循的指令範例，或顯示某些特定動作所可能發生的結" "果。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:304 msgid "Acknowledgments" msgstr "感謝" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:306 msgid "" "My thanks to Sue Blake, Patrick Durusau, Jon Hamilton, Peter Flynn, and " "Christopher Maden, who took the time to read early drafts of this document " "and offer many valuable comments and criticisms." msgstr "" "在此要感謝 Sue Blake, Patrick Durusau, Jon Hamilton, Peter Flynn, " "Christopher Maden 這些人的協助與閱讀初期草稿，並提供許多寶貴的潤稿意見與評" "論。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:346 book.translate.xml:2052 msgid "Overview" msgstr "概論" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:348 msgid "" "Welcome to the FreeBSD Documentation Project (FDP). " "Quality documentation is crucial to the success of FreeBSD, and we value " "your contributions very highly." msgstr "" -"歡迎參與 FreeBSD 文件計劃( 簡稱 FDP ) 。維持優秀質量的文件" -"對 FreeBSD 的成功來說十分重要，您的點滴貢獻都是十分寶貴的。" +"歡迎參與 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃 (FreeBSD Documentation Project, FDP)。維持優秀質量的文件對 FreeBSD 的成功來說十分重要，您的點滴貢獻都是" +"十分寶貴的。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:353 msgid "" "This document describes how the FDP is organized, how to " "write and submit documentation, and how to effectively use the available " "tools." msgstr "" "本文件描述：『 FDP 的架構有哪些』、『如何撰寫並提交文" "件』、 『如何有效運用工具來協助撰稿』。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:357 msgid "" "Everyone is welcome to contribute to the FDP. Willingness " "to contribute is the only membership requirement." msgstr "" "歡迎大家對 FDP 做出貢獻。唯一的成員要求就有貢獻的意願。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:361 msgid "This primer shows how to:" msgstr "本入門書指出如何：" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:365 msgid "" "Identify which parts of FreeBSD are maintained by the FDP." msgstr "瞭解有哪些文件是由 FDP 所維護的。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:370 msgid "Install the required documentation tools and files." -msgstr "安裝所需的文件工具和檔案" +msgstr "安裝所需的說明文件工具和檔案。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:374 msgid "Make changes to the documentation." -msgstr "修改文件" +msgstr "修改說明文件。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:378 msgid "" "Submit changes back for review and inclusion in the FreeBSD documentation." -msgstr "提交修改以供審核並納入 FreeBSD 文件" +msgstr "提交修改以供審核並納入 FreeBSD 說明文件。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:384 book.translate.xml:7338 +#: book.translate.xml:384 book.translate.xml:7321 msgid "Quick Start" msgstr "快速上手" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:386 msgid "" "Some preparatory steps must be taken before editing the FreeBSD " "documentation. First, subscribe to the FreeBSD documentation project " "mailing list. Some team members also interact on the " "#bsddocs IRC channel on EFnet. These people can help with " "questions or problems involving the documentation." msgstr "" -"在編輯 FreeBSD 文件之前，有一些準備工作要做。 首先，請訂閱 FreeBSD 文件計劃郵" -"件論壇。 有些團隊成員也會出現在EFnet的#bsddocs IRC 頻" -"道。這些人可以幫忙解決文件相關的問題。" +"在編輯 FreeBSD 說明文件之前，有一些準備工作要做。 首先，請訂閱 FreeBSD 文件計" +"劃郵件論壇。 有些團隊成員也會出現在 EFnet 的#bsddocs IRC 頻道。這些人可以幫忙解決文件相關的問題。" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:396 msgid "" "Install the textproc/docproj package or port. This meta-" "port installs all of the software needed to edit and build FreeBSD " "documentation." msgstr "" -"安裝 textproc/docproj 套件或 port。這個meta-port 會安裝所" -"有編輯和建構 FreeBSD 文件需要的軟體。" +"安裝 textproc/docproj 套件或 Port。這個 meta-port 會安裝所" +"有編輯和建置 FreeBSD 說明文件需要的軟體。" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:403 msgid "" "Install a local working copy of the documentation from the FreeBSD " "repository in ~/doc (see )." msgstr "" -"在~/doc安裝 FreeBSD 文件庫的本地端工作副本 ( 請見 )。" +"在 ~/doc 安裝 FreeBSD 說明文件檔案庫的本地端工作副本 (請" +"見 )。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen #. (itstool) path: sect1/screen #: book.translate.xml:408 book.translate.xml:798 #, no-wrap msgid "% svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head ~/doc" msgstr "% svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head ~/doc" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:412 msgid "Configure the text editor:" msgstr "設定文字編輯器：" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:416 msgid "Word wrap set to 70 characters." -msgstr "Word wrap 設為70個字元。" +msgstr "自動換行 (Word wrap) 設為 70 個字元。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:420 msgid "Tab stops set to 2." -msgstr "Tab stops 設成 。" +msgstr "Tab 定位點 (Tab stops) 設成 2。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:424 msgid "Replace each group of 8 leading spaces with a single tab." -msgstr "將句首每八個空白以一個 tab 替換。" +msgstr "將行首每 8 個空白取代成 1 個 Tab。" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:429 msgid "" "Specific editor configurations are listed in ." msgstr "特定編輯器的設定方式列於 。" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:434 msgid "Update the local working copy:" msgstr "更新本地端工作副本" #. (itstool) path: step/screen #: book.translate.xml:436 #, no-wrap msgid "% svn up ~/doc" msgstr "% svn up ~/doc" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:440 msgid "" "Edit the documentation files that require changes. If a file needs major " "changes, consult the mailing list for input." -msgstr "編輯需要修改的文件檔案。如果檔案需要大幅度的編修，請先諮詢郵件論壇。" +msgstr "" +"編輯需要修改的說明文件檔案。如果檔案需要大幅度的編修，請先諮詢郵件論壇。" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:444 msgid "" "References to tag and entity usage can be found in and ." msgstr "" -"標籤 ( tag ) 和 entity 的使用方式可以參考 " -"和 . 。" +"標籤 (Tag) 和 Entity 的使用方式可以參考 和 " +". 。" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:450 msgid "After editing, check for problems by running:" msgstr "編輯完後，執行以下指令來檢查是否有問題：" #. (itstool) path: step/screen #: book.translate.xml:452 #, no-wrap msgid "% igor -R filename.xml | less -RS" msgstr "% igor -R filename.xml | less -RS" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:454 msgid "" "Review the output and edit the file to fix any problems shown, then rerun " "the command to find any remaining problems. Repeat until all of the errors " "are resolved." msgstr "" "檢查輸出並重新編輯檔案來修正顯示的錯誤，然後重新執行指令來找出剩下的問題。重" "複執行直到所有錯誤都解決完。" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:461 msgid "" "Always build-test changes before submitting them. " "Running make in the top-level directory of the " "documentation being edited will generate that documentation in split HTML " "format. For example, to build the English version of the Handbook in " "HTML, run make in the en_US." "ISO8859-1/books/handbook/ directory." msgstr "" -"修正送出前請先建構測試 (build-test ) 。在編輯的文件目錄最頂層執行 " -"make，將會產生 split HTML 格式的文件。例如要建構 " -"HTML 格式的英文版使用手冊，請在 en_US.ISO8859-1/" -"books/handbook/ 目錄執行 make 。" +"永遠要送出修正前請先做建置測試 (Build-test) 。在編輯的說" +"明文件目錄最頂層執行 make，將會產生分頁的 HTML 格式 " +"(Split HTML) 的文件。例如要建置 HTML 格式的英文版使用手" +"冊，請在 en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/ 目錄執行 " +"make 。" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:472 msgid "" "When changes are complete and tested, generate a diff file:" -msgstr "修改並測試完後，產生diff 檔：" +msgstr "修改並測試完後，產生 diff 檔：" #. (itstool) path: step/screen #: book.translate.xml:475 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc\n" "% svn diff > bsdinstall.diff.txt" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc\n" "% svn diff > bsdinstall.diff.txt" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:478 msgid "" "Give the diff file a descriptive name. In the example above, changes have " "been made to the bsdinstall portion of the Handbook." msgstr "" -"設一個可辨識的檔名。如上例中，是使用手冊的bsdinstall 部" +"設一個可辨識的檔名。如上例中，是使用手冊的 bsdinstall 部" "份的修改。" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:485 msgid "" "Submit the diff file using the web-based Problem Report system. If " "using the web form, enter a synopsis of [patch] short " "description of problem. Select the category " "docs and the class doc-bug. In the " "body of the message, enter a short description of the changes and any " "important details about them. Use the [ Browse... ] " "button to attach the diff file." msgstr "" -"使用網頁版 Problem " -"Report 系統提交 diff 檔。 如果使用網頁版，請輸入[修正檔] " -"問題簡短描述的概要 。選擇 " +"使用網頁版 問題回報" +" 系統提交 diff 檔。 如果使用網頁版，請輸入 [patch] " +"問題簡短描述 的概要 。選擇 " "docs 分類和 doc-bug類別。在訊息的主體" -"中，輸入修正的簡短描述和其他相關的重要的細節。使用[ Browse... ][ Browse... ] 按鈕來附加 diff 檔。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:502 msgid "The FreeBSD Documentation Set" -msgstr "FreeBSD 文件組" +msgstr "FreeBSD 說明文件集" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:504 msgid "" "The FDP is responsible for four categories of FreeBSD " "documentation." -msgstr "FDP 負責四類 FreeBSD 文件" +msgstr "FDP 負責四類 FreeBSD 說明文件。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:509 msgid "" "Handbook: The Handbook is the comprehensive online " "resource and reference for FreeBSD users." msgstr "" -"使用手冊： 使用手冊主要是給 FreeBSD 使用者提供詳盡的線上" -"參考資料。" +"使用手冊 (Handbook)：使用手冊主要是給 FreeBSD 使用者提供" +"詳盡的線上參考資料。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:515 msgid "" "FAQ: The FAQ uses a short question " "and answer format to address questions that are frequently asked on the " "various mailing lists and forums devoted to FreeBSD. This format does not " "permit long and comprehensive answers." msgstr "" -"FAQ 主要是收集在各郵件論壇或論壇會常問到或有可能會問到" -"的 FreeBSD 相關問題與答案 。 (簡單講，就是『問答集』格式) 通常會擺在這裡面的" -"問答格式，不會放太長的詳細內容。" +"常見問答集 (FAQ)：主要是收集在各郵件論壇或論壇會常問到或" +"有可能會問到的 FreeBSD 相關問題與答案 。 (簡單講，就是『問答集』格式) 通常會" +"擺在這裡面的問答格式，不會放太長的詳細內容。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:523 msgid "" "Manual pages: The English language system manual pages " "are usually not written by the FDP, as they are part of " "the base system. However, the FDP can reword parts of " "existing manual pages to make them clearer or to correct inaccuracies." msgstr "" -"線上手冊 ( manual pages ):英文版的系統 manual 並不是由 " -"FDP 所撰寫的，因為它們是屬於 base system 的部份。 然而，" -"FDP 可以修改這些文件，來讓這些文件寫得更清楚，甚至是勘正錯" -"誤的地方。" +"操作手冊 (Manual page)：英文版的系統手冊並不是由 " +"FDP 所撰寫的，因為它們是屬於基礎系統 (Base system) 的部" +"份。 然而，FDP 可以修改這些文件，來讓這些文件寫得更清楚，" +"甚至是勘正錯誤的地方。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:532 msgid "" "Web site: This is the main FreeBSD presence on the web, " "visible at http://www." "FreeBSD.org/ and many mirrors around the world. The web site is " "typically a new user's first exposure to FreeBSD." msgstr "" -"網站: 這是 FreeBSD 在網路上的主要部份，位於 網站：這是 FreeBSD 在網路上的主要部份，位於 http://www.FreeBSD.org/ 以" -"及許多其他 mirror 站。這網站是許多人第一次接觸 FreeBSD 的地方" +"及許多其他鏡像站 (Mirror)。這網站是許多人第一次接觸 FreeBSD 的地方" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:539 msgid "" "Translation teams are responsible for translating the Handbook and web site " "into different languages. Manual pages are not translated at present." msgstr "翻譯團隊負責翻譯使用手冊和網站到不同的語言。線上手冊目前並未翻譯" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:543 msgid "" "Documentation source for the FreeBSD web site, Handbook, and FAQ is available in the documentation repository at https://" "svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/." msgstr "" "FreeBSD 網站、使用手冊、和 FAQ 的文件原始碼可以在 " -"https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/ 的文件庫取得。" +"https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/ 的文件檔案庫取得。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:548 msgid "" "Source for manual pages is available in a separate source repository located " "at https://svn.FreeBSD.org/base/." msgstr "" "線上手冊的原始碼則是在 https://svn.FreeBSD.org/base/ 的原" "始碼庫可以取得。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:552 msgid "" "Documentation commit messages are visible with svn log. " "Commit messages are also archived at http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/" "svn-doc-all." msgstr "" -"文件提交訊息可以用 svn log 察看。 提交訊息也會保存在http://" -"lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/svn-doc-all。" +"說明文件提交訊息可以用 svn log 察看。 提交訊息也會封存在 " +"http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/svn-doc-all。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:556 msgid "" "Web frontends to both of these repositories are available at and ." msgstr "" -"這些儲存庫的網頁版位於 " -"和 。" +"這些儲存庫的網頁版位於 和 。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:558 msgid "" "Many people have written tutorials or how-to articles about FreeBSD. Some " "are stored as part of the FDP files. In other cases, the " "author has decided to keep the documentation separate. The FDP endeavors to provide links to as much of this external " "documentation as possible." msgstr "" "許多人會寫 FreeBSD 的教學文件或是 how-to 文章。有些保存在 FDP 的檔案中。其他一些文件則是作者希望放在他處。FDP " -"會盡力提供這些文件的連結。" +"acronym> 的檔案中。其他一些說明文件則是作者希望放在他處。FDP 會盡力提供這些說明文件的連結。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title #: book.translate.xml:600 msgid "Tools" msgstr "工具" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:602 msgid "" "Several software tools are used to manage the FreeBSD documentation and " "render it to different output formats. Some of these tools are required and " "must be installed before working through the examples in the following " "chapters. Some are optional, adding capabilities or making the job of " "creating documentation less demanding." msgstr "" -"有些工具軟體用來管理 FreeBSD 文件，並將他轉換成不同的輸出格式。 有些則是在使" -"用接下來章節的範例之前一定要安裝。有些工具是選擇性安裝的，但是裝了之後會更容" -"易進行文件製作工作。" +"有些工具軟體用來管理 FreeBSD 說明文件，並將他轉換成不同的輸出格式。 有些則是" +"在使用接下來章節的範例之前一定要安裝。有些工具是選擇性安裝的，但是裝了之後會" +"更容易進行文件製作工作。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:610 msgid "Required Tools" msgstr "必備工具" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:612 msgid "" "Install textproc/docproj from the Ports Collection. This " "meta-port installs all the applications required to do " "useful work with the FreeBSD documentation. Some further notes on particular " "components are given below." msgstr "" -"從 Ports Collection 安裝 textproc/docproj。這個 " -"組合型 port (meta-port) 會安裝處理 FreeBSD 文件需要的所" -"有應用程式。以下列出特定元件的進一步說明。" +"從 Port 套件集安裝 textproc/docproj。這個 meta-" +"port 會安裝處理 FreeBSD 說明文件需要的所有應用程式。以下列出特定元" +"件的進一步說明。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #: book.translate.xml:620 msgid "DTDs and Entities" msgstr "DTDs 與 Entities" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:623 msgid "" "FreeBSD documentation uses several Document Type Definitions (DTDs) and sets of XML entities. These are all " "installed by the textproc/docproj port." msgstr "" -"FreeBSD 文件使用幾種文件類型定義 (DTDs) 與 XML entities 組。這些都會經由 textproc/docproj port " -"來安裝。" +"FreeBSD 說明文件使用幾種文件類型定義 (DTDs) 與 " +"XML entities 集合。這些都會經由 textproc/" +"docproj Port 來安裝。" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:631 msgid "" "XHTML DTD (textproc/xhtml)" msgstr "" "XHTML DTD (textproc/xhtml)" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:635 msgid "" "XHTML is the markup language of choice for the World Wide " "Web, and is used throughout the FreeBSD web site." msgstr "" "XHTML 是全球資訊網的一種標記語言，也是整個 FreeBSD 網站所" "使用的格式。" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:642 #, fuzzy msgid "" "DocBook DTD (textproc/docbook-xml)" msgstr "" "DocBook DTD (textproc/docbook-xml-450)" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:645 msgid "" "DocBook is designed for marking up technical documentation. Most of the " "FreeBSD documentation is written in DocBook." msgstr "" -"DocBook 設計來製作技術文件的標記語言版本。FreeBSD 文件是以 DocBook 來撰寫。" +"DocBook 設計來製作技術說明文件的標記語言版本。FreeBSD 說明文件是以 DocBook 來" +"撰寫。" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:652 msgid "ISO 8879 entities (textproc/iso8879)" msgstr "ISO 8879 entities (textproc/iso8879)" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:656 msgid "" "Character entities from the ISO 8879:1986 standard used by many " "DTDs. Includes named mathematical symbols, additional " "characters in the Latin character set (accents, diacriticals, and so on), " "and Greek symbols." msgstr "" "在 ISO 8879:1986 之中的 entity 被許多 DTD 所大量使用， 包" "括了數學符號、拉丁字母符號(尖重音等音節符號也是)以及希臘符號。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:668 msgid "Optional Tools" -msgstr "輔助工具" +msgstr "選用工具" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:670 msgid "" "These applications are not required, but can make working on the " "documentation easier or add capabilities." -msgstr "不一定得裝下列的應用程式才行，但是，出的格式也更具彈性。" +msgstr "以下應用程式並非必要，但有了可讓在說明文件的作業上更簡單或提升能力。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #: book.translate.xml:674 msgid "Software" msgstr "軟體" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:679 msgid "Vim (editors/vim)" msgstr "Vim (editors/vim)" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:683 msgid "" "A popular editor for working with XML and derived " "documents, like DocBook XML." msgstr "" "一個很受歡迎的編輯器，可以處理 XML 和他的衍生相關文件，例" "如 DocBook XML。" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:690 msgid "" "Emacs or XEmacs " "(editors/emacs or editors/xemacs)" msgstr "" "Emacs 或 XEmacs " "(editors/emacs 或 editors/xemacs)" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:696 msgid "" "Both of these editors include a special mode for editing documents marked up " "according to an XML DTD. This mode " "includes commands to reduce the amount of typing needed, and help reduce the " "possibility of errors." msgstr "" "這兩個編輯器都包含特別模式來編輯用 XML DTD 標記的文件。這個模式包含指令來減少打字量，並可以幫忙減少錯誤的發生。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title #: book.translate.xml:739 msgid "The Working Copy" msgstr "工作副本" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:741 msgid "" "The working copy is a copy of the FreeBSD repository " "documentation tree downloaded onto the local computer. Changes are made to " "the local working copy, tested, and then submitted as patches to be " "committed to the main repository." msgstr "" +"工作副本 (Working copy) 指的是已下載到本地電腦的 " +"FreeBSD 說明文件樹檔案庫，所有對工作副本的更改會經過測試後再以修補檔 (Patch) " +"的格式提交到主要檔案庫。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:747 msgid "" "A full copy of the documentation tree can occupy 700 megabytes of disk " "space. Allow for a full gigabyte of space to have room for temporary files " "and test versions of various output formats." msgstr "" +"完整的說明文件樹副本會佔據 700 MB 的磁碟空間，要有空間能夠儲存暫存檔及各種輸" +"出格式的測試版本需要 1 GB 的空間。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:752 msgid "" "Subversion is used to manage the " "FreeBSD documentation files. It is installed by textproc/docproj as one of the required applications." msgstr "" +"FreeBSD 說明文件檔案使用 Subversion 來管理，由於 Subversion 為 " +"textproc/docproj 的必要應用程式之一，所以會隨著 " +"textproc/docproj 一併安裝。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:758 msgid "Documentation and Manual Pages" -msgstr "" +msgstr "說明文件與操作手冊" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:760 msgid "" "FreeBSD documentation is not just books and articles. Manual pages for all " "the commands and configuration files are also part of the documentation, and " "part of the FDP's territory. Two repositories are " "involved: doc for the books and articles, and " "base for the operating system and manual pages. To edit " "manual pages, the base repository must be checked out " "separately." msgstr "" +"FreeBSD 說明文件不只有書籍與文章，還有所有指令與設定檔的操作手冊 (Manual " +"page) 也是文件的一部份，其中也有一部份是 FDP 的地盤。相關" +"的檔案庫有兩個：doc 中有書籍與文章，而 base 中有作業系統以及操作手冊。要編輯操作手冊則必須另外取出 (Checkout) " +"base 檔案庫。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:769 msgid "" "Repositories may contain multiple versions of documentation and source code. " "New modifications are almost always made only to the latest version, called " "head." msgstr "" +"檔案庫中可能會含有數個版本的說明文件與原始碼。新的修改幾乎都只對最新版本 " +"head 做更新。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:775 msgid "Choosing a Directory" -msgstr "" +msgstr "選擇一個目錄" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:777 msgid "" "FreeBSD documentation is traditionally stored in /usr/doc/, and system source code with manual pages in /usr/src/. These directory trees are relocatable, and users may want to put " "the working copies in other locations to avoid interfering with existing " "information in the main directories. The examples that follow use " "~/doc and ~/src, both " "subdirectories of the user's home directory." msgstr "" +"FreeBSD 說明文件一般會儲存在 /usr/doc/，而系統原始碼及操" +"作手冊則會存在 /usr/src/。這些目錄樹可改放在其他地方，使" +"用者可能會為了避免與現有在主要目錄的資料搞混，把工作副本放在其他的地方。以下" +"的例子會放在 ~/doc 以及 ~/src 兩個" +"在使用者家目錄下的目錄。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:790 msgid "Checking Out a Copy" -msgstr "" +msgstr "取出一份副本" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:792 msgid "" "A download of a working copy from the repository is called a " "checkout, and done with svn checkout. This example checks out a copy of the latest version " "(head) of the main documentation tree:" msgstr "" +"從檔案庫下載工作副本的動作稱作 取出 (Checkout)，使用 " +"svn checkout 來完成。本範例會取出主要說明文件樹最新版本的" +"副本：" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:800 msgid "A checkout of the source code to work on manual pages is very similar:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "取出原始碼編輯操作手冊的動作非常相似：" #. (itstool) path: sect1/screen #: book.translate.xml:803 #, no-wrap msgid "% svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/base/head ~/src" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:807 msgid "Updating a Working Copy" -msgstr "" +msgstr "更新工作副本" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:809 msgid "" "The documents and files in the FreeBSD repository change daily. People " "modify files and commit changes frequently. Even a short time after an " "initial checkout, there will already be differences between the local " "working copy and the main FreeBSD repository. To update the local version " "with the changes that have been made to the main repository, use " "svn update on the directory containing the local working " "copy:" msgstr "" +"在 FreeBSD 檔案庫中的文件與檔案每天都會更改，人們會修改檔案與提交變更的頻率非" +"常快，即使取出 (Checkout) 只過小一段時間，本地的工作副本可能就與主要 FreeBSD " +"檔案庫有差異了。要更新本地版本以同步對主要檔案庫的變更可在有本地工作副本的目" +"錄下使用 svn update：" #. (itstool) path: sect1/screen #: book.translate.xml:818 #, no-wrap msgid "% svn update ~/doc" msgstr "% svn update ~/doc" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:820 msgid "" "Get in the protective habit of using svn update before " "editing document files. Someone else may have edited that file very " "recently, and the local working copy will not include the latest changes " "until it has been updated. Editing the newest version of a file is much " "easier than trying to combine an older, edited local file with the newer " "version from the repository." msgstr "" +"養成良好的習慣在編輯文件檔前先執行 svn update，可能會有其" +"他人才剛編輯完該檔案，本地工作副本在尚未更新前不會有最後的變更內容，編輯最新" +"版本的檔案會比將舊版本地檔案與新版檔案庫檔案合併來的簡單多了。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:830 msgid "Reverting Changes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "還原變更" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:832 msgid "" "Sometimes it turns out that changes were not necessary after all, or the " "writer just wants to start over. Files can be reset to their " "unchanged form with svn revert. For example, to erase the " "edits made to chapter.xml and reset it to unmodified " "form:" msgstr "" +"有時才做完的變更可能就變的不需要了，或者作者剛想要重新搛寫。檔案可使以使用 " +"svn revert 來重設成尚未被修改刪的狀態，舉" +"例來說，要清除所有對 chapter.xml 的修改然後還原到未修改" +"的版本可：" #. (itstool) path: sect1/screen #: book.translate.xml:839 #, no-wrap msgid "% svn revert chapter.xml" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:843 msgid "Making a Diff" -msgstr "" +msgstr "比對差異" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:845 msgid "" "After edits to a file or group of files are completed, the differences " "between the local working copy and the version on the FreeBSD repository " "must be collected into a single file for submission. These diff files are produced by redirecting the output of svn diff into a file:" msgstr "" +"在編輯一個檔案或數個檔案完成之後，需將本地工作副本與 FreeBSD 檔案庫的差異儲存" +"到一個檔案然後提交。這些 差異 (Diff) 檔可透過將 " +"svn diff 的輸出轉向到檔案來建立： " #. (itstool) path: sect1/screen #: book.translate.xml:852 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc\n" "% svn diff > doc-fix-spelling.diff" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:855 msgid "" "Give the file a meaningful name that identifies the contents. The example " "above is for spelling fixes to the whole documentation tree." msgstr "" +"給檔案取一個有意義的名字來辨識這次修改的內容，上述範例為例則是要修正整個說明" +"文件樹的拼寫。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:859 msgid "" "If the diff file is to be submitted with the web Submit a FreeBSD problem " "report interface, add a .txt extension " "to give the earnest and simple-minded web form a clue that the contents are " "plain text." msgstr "" +"若 diff 檔要使用網站的 Submit a FreeBSD problem report 介面" +"來提交，請加上 .txt 副檔名來給認真又單純的網頁表單可以辨" +"識其內容為純文字的線索。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:866 msgid "" "Be careful: svn diff includes all changes made in the " "current directory and any subdirectories. If there are files in the working " "copy with edits that are not ready to be submitted yet, provide a list of " "only the files that are to be included:" msgstr "" +"請小心：svn diff 會產生所有在目前目錄及其子目錄的變更差" +"異，若在該工作副本中有已經編輯過的檔案還沒有要提交，請列出需要比較差異的檔案" +"清單：" #. (itstool) path: sect1/screen #: book.translate.xml:872 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc\n" "% svn diff disks/chapter.xml printers/chapter.xml > disks-printers.diff" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:877 msgid "Subversion References" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Subversion 參考文獻" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:879 msgid "" "These examples show very basic usage of Subversion. More detail is available in the Subversion Book and the Subversion documentation." msgstr "" +"以下範例會示範 Subversion 的基本用法，要取得更多資" +"訊可至 Subversion Book 與 Subversion " +"說明文件。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title #: book.translate.xml:920 msgid "Documentation Directory Structure" -msgstr "" +msgstr "說明文件目錄結構" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:922 msgid "" "Files and directories in the doc/ tree follow a " "structure meant to:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 doc/ 樹中的檔案與目錄需要遵守特定結構是因為：" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:928 msgid "Make it easy to automate converting the document to other formats." -msgstr "" +msgstr "讓自動轉換說明文件到各種格式更簡單。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:933 msgid "" "Promote consistency between the different documentation organizations, to " "make it easier to switch between working on different documents." -msgstr "" +msgstr "促進不同說明文件組織之間的一致性，以便更輕鬆的在不同說明文件之間切換。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:939 msgid "" "Make it easy to decide where in the tree new documentation should be placed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "可以很容易的決定新的說明文件應該放在文件樹中的哪個位置。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:944 msgid "" "In addition, the documentation tree must accommodate documents in many " "different languages and encodings. It is important that the documentation " "tree structure does not enforce any particular defaults or cultural " "preferences." msgstr "" +"除此之外，說明文件樹必須能容納各種不同語言與編碼的說明文件。很重要的一點是，" +"說明文件樹結構不應強制任何特定默認或文化的偏好。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:950 msgid "The Top Level, doc/" -msgstr "" +msgstr "最上層，doc/" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:953 msgid "" "There are two types of directory under doc/, each with " "very specific directory names and meanings." msgstr "" +"在 doc/ 底下有兩種類型的目錄，兩種都有非常明確的目錄名稱" +"與意義。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:961 book.translate.xml:1015 msgid "Directory" -msgstr "" +msgstr "目錄" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:962 book.translate.xml:1016 msgid "Usage" -msgstr "" +msgstr "用途" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:968 msgid "share" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:971 msgid "" "Contains files that are not specific to the various translations and " "encodings of the documentation. Contains subdirectories to further " "categorize the information. For example, the files that comprise the " "make1 infrastructure are in share/mk, while the " "additional XML support files (such as the FreeBSD " "extended DocBook DTD) are in share/xml." msgstr "" +"含有未特定用於各說明文件翻譯與編碼的檔案。其子目錄更進一步將不同資訊的分類，" +"例如，構成 make1 基礎設施的檔案放置於 share/mk，而額外的 XML 支援檔 (如 FreeBSD 延伸的 DocBook " +"DTD) 則放在 share/xml。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:983 msgid "" "lang.encoding" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:986 msgid "" "One directory exists for each available translation and encoding of the " "documentation, for example en_US.ISO8859-1/ and " "zh_TW.UTF-8/. The names are long, but by fully " "specifying the language and encoding we prevent any future headaches when a " "translation team wants to provide documentation in the same language but in " "more than one encoding. This also avoids problems that might be caused by a " "future switch to Unicode." msgstr "" +"每一個目錄代表可用的說明文件翻譯與編碼，例如 en_US.ISO8859-1/ 及 zh_TW.UTF-8/。名稱雖然長，但完整表達語言與" +"編碼可以避免未來當一個翻譯團隊要以不同編碼提供同一個語言的說明文件造成的問" +"題，這也同時避免往後要切換成萬國碼 (Unicode) 可能造成的問題。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:1003 msgid "" "The lang.encoding/ Directories" msgstr "" +"lang.encoding/ 目錄" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1007 msgid "" "These directories contain the documents themselves. The documentation is " "split into up to three more categories at this level, indicated by the " "different directory names." msgstr "" +"這些目錄中含有說明文件。在此階層說明文件分成三個分類，使用不同的目錄名稱來代" +"表。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1022 msgid "articles" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1025 msgid "" "Documentation marked up as a DocBook article (or equivalent). " "Reasonably short, and broken up into sections. Normally only available as " "one XHTML file." msgstr "" +"以 DocBook article (或同等級) 標記的說明文件。非常短，且會分成幾" +"個小節，通常取得時只會有一個 XHTML 檔案。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1032 msgid "books" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1034 msgid "" "Documentation marked up as a DocBook book (or equivalent). Book " "length, and broken up into chapters. Normally available as both one large " "XHTML file (for people with fast connections, or who want " "to print it easily from a browser) and as a collection of linked, smaller " "files." msgstr "" +"以 DocBook book (或同等級) 標記的說明文件。有跟書籍一樣的長度，會" +"分成數個章。通常取得時會包含一個大型的 XHTML 檔 (供有較快" +"連線速度的人使用，或者那些想直接在瀏覽器列印的人) 與數個連結的較小的檔案。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1044 msgid "man" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1047 msgid "" "For translations of the system manual pages. This directory will contain one " "or more mann directories, corresponding to the sections that have been " "translated." msgstr "" +"供系統操作手冊 (Manual page) 翻譯使用。這個目錄會包含一個或多個 mann 目錄來對應已經" +"翻譯的章節。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1056 msgid "" "Not every lang." "encoding directory will have all of " "these subdirectories. It depends on how much translation has been " "accomplished by that translation team." msgstr "" +"並非所有 lang." +"encoding 的目錄都會有這些子目錄，這要看" +"該翻譯團隊已經完成了多少翻譯來決定。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:1063 msgid "Document-Specific Information" -msgstr "" +msgstr "文件特定資訊" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1065 msgid "" "This section contains specific notes about particular documents managed by " "the FDP." -msgstr "" +msgstr "本節內含有關由 FDP 所管理的特定文件的特定注意事項。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #: book.translate.xml:1069 msgid "The Handbook" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用手冊 (Handbook)" #. (itstool) path: sect2/subtitle #: book.translate.xml:1071 msgid "books/handbook/" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1073 msgid "" "The Handbook is written in DocBook XML using the FreeBSD " "DocBook extended DTD." msgstr "" +"操作手冊是以使用 FreeBSD DocBook 擴充 DTD 的 DocBook " +"XML 所撰寫。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1076 msgid "" "The Handbook is organized as a DocBook book. The book is divided " "into parts, each of which contains several chapters. " "chapters are further subdivided into sections (sect1) " "and subsections (sect2, sect3) and so on." msgstr "" +"使用手冊使用 DocBook book 來組織，整個手冊區分成數個部份 " +"(part)，每個部份中內含數個章 (chapter)，而章 " +"(chapter) 又更進一步的細分成數個節 (sect1) 與小節 " +"(sect2, sect3) 以此類推。" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title #: book.translate.xml:1085 msgid "Physical Organization" -msgstr "" +msgstr "實體組織結構" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1087 msgid "" "There are a number of files and directories within the handbook directory." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 handbook 目錄中有數個檔案及目錄。" #. (itstool) path: note/para #: book.translate.xml:1091 msgid "" "The Handbook's organization may change over time, and this document may lag " "in detailing the organizational changes. Post questions about Handbook " "organization to the FreeBSD documentation project mailing list." msgstr "" +"使用手冊的組織結構可能會隨時改變，本文件所詳述的組織結構可能會與現況不盡相" +"同。有關使用手冊組織結構的問題可張貼到 FreeBSD documentation project " +"mailing list。" #. (itstool) path: sect4/title #: book.translate.xml:1098 msgid "Makefile" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1100 msgid "" "The Makefile defines some variables that affect how the " "XML source is converted to other formats, and lists the " "various source files that make up the Handbook. It then includes the " "standard doc.project.mk, to bring in the rest of the " "code that handles converting documents from one format to another." msgstr "" +"Makefile 定義了一些會影響 XML 原始碼" +"要如何轉換至其他格式的變數，並列出產生使用手冊所需的各原始檔，接著會引用可處" +"理在各種文件格式轉換的標準 doc.project.mk 程式碼。" #. (itstool) path: sect4/title #: book.translate.xml:1110 msgid "book.xml" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1112 msgid "" "This is the top level document in the Handbook. It contains the Handbook's " "DOCTYPE declaration, " "as well as the elements that describe the Handbook's structure." msgstr "" +"此為使用手冊的最上層文件，其中包含了使用手冊的 DOCTYPE 宣告以及用來描述使用手冊結構的元素。" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1117 msgid "" "book.xml uses parameter entities to load in the files with the " ".ent extension. These files (described later) then " "define general entities " "that are used throughout the rest of the Handbook." msgstr "" +"book.xml 會使用 參數 Entities 來載入 .ent 副檔名的檔" +"案。這些檔案 (稍後會詳述) 接著會定義使用手冊剩下篇幅會使用的 一般 Entities。" #. (itstool) path: sect4/title #: book.translate.xml:1126 msgid "" "directory/chapter." "xml" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1128 msgid "" "Each chapter in the Handbook is stored in a file called chapter." "xml in a separate directory from the other chapters. Each " "directory is named after the value of the id attribute on " "the chapter element." msgstr "" +"每個在使用手冊的章會儲存成名稱為 chapter.xml 的檔案，分" +"別放在不同的目錄中。每個目錄均是以在 chapter 元素中 id 屬性中的值來命名。" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1135 msgid "For example, if one of the chapter files contains:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "例如，若有一章的檔案內容為：" #. (itstool) path: sect4/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:1138 #, no-wrap msgid "" "chapter id=\"kernelconfig\"\n" "...\n" "chapter" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1142 msgid "" "Then it will be called chapter.xml in the " "kernelconfig directory. In general, the entire contents " "of the chapter are in this one file." msgstr "" +"那麼放置這個 chapter.xml 的目錄則會命名為 " +"kernelconfig。一般來說一章的所有內容會存放在這一個檔案。" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1148 msgid "" "When the XHTML version of the Handbook is produced, this " "will yield kernelconfig.html. This is because of the " "id value, and is not related to the name of the directory." msgstr "" +"當有 XHTML 版本的使用手冊之後，也會用這個檔產出 " +"kernelconfig.html，這個名稱是根據 id " +"的值而定，與目錄名稱無關。" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1154 msgid "" "In earlier versions of the Handbook, the files were stored in the same " "directory as book.xml, and named after the value of the " "id attribute on the file's chapter element. " "Now, it is possible to include images in each chapter. Images for each " "Handbook chapter are stored within share/images/books/handbook. The localized version of these images should be placed in the " "same directory as the XML sources for each chapter. " "Namespace collisions are inevitable, and it is easier to work with several " "directories with a few files in them than it is to work with one directory " "that has many files in it." msgstr "" +"在早期版本的使用手冊，檔案皆儲存在與 book.xml 相同的目錄" +"中，而名稱會以 chapter 元素中的 id 屬性的值來命" +"名。現在可在每個章節之中引用圖片，每個使用手冊章節的圖片會儲存在 " +"share/images/books/handbook，而在地化版本的圖片應放在與" +"每個章節 XML 原始碼相同的目錄。命名空間會衝突是必然的，但" +"以目錄多、檔案少與目錄少、檔案多的結構相比，目錄多、檔案少會較容易處理命名空" +"間衝突的問題。" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1168 msgid "" "A brief look will show that there are many directories with individual " "chapter.xml files, including basics/chapter." "xml, introduction/chapter.xml, and " "printing/chapter.xml." msgstr "" +"簡單來說會有很多個內含 chapter.xml 檔案的目錄，例如 " +"basics/chapter.xml, introduction/chapter.xml 以及 printing/chapter.xml。" #. (itstool) path: important/para #: book.translate.xml:1175 msgid "" "Do not name chapters or directories after their ordering within the " "Handbook. This ordering can change as the content within the Handbook is " "reorganized. Reorganization should be possible without renaming files, " "unless entire chapters are being promoted or demoted within the hierarchy." msgstr "" +"請勿以在使用手冊中的章節順序來命名章節或目錄，因為順序是會隨使用手冊重新組織" +"後的內容改變的。重新組織結構應不需要去重新命名檔案，除非整個章節的階層被提升" +"或下降。" #. (itstool) path: sect4/para #: book.translate.xml:1183 msgid "" "The chapter.xml files are not complete XML documents that can be built individually. They can only be built as " "parts of the whole Handbook." msgstr "" +"chapter.xml 檔案並不是可以被單獨建置的完整 " +"XML 文件，只能做為使用手冊的一部份來建置。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title #: book.translate.xml:1226 msgid "The Documentation Build Process" -msgstr "" +msgstr "說明文件建置流程" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:1228 msgid "" "This chapter covers organization of the documentation build process and how " "make1 is used to control it." msgstr "" +"本章內容涵蓋了說明文件建置流程以及如何使用 " +"make1 來控制如何建置。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:1232 msgid "Rendering DocBook into Output" -msgstr "" +msgstr "繪製 Docbook 為其他格式" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1234 msgid "" "Different types of output can be produced from a single DocBook source file. " "The type of output desired is set with the FORMATS " "variable. A list of known formats is stored in KNOWN_FORMATS:" msgstr "" +"從單一個 DocBook 原始檔可以產生各種不同類型的輸出，想要輸出的類型可用 " +"FORMATS 變數來設定。已知的格式清單列在 " +"KNOWN_FORMATS 中：" #. (itstool) path: sect1/screen #. (itstool) id: book.translate.xml#doc-build-rendering-known-formats #: book.translate.xml:1239 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook\n" "% make -V KNOWN_FORMATS" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: table/title #: book.translate.xml:1243 msgid "Common Output Formats" -msgstr "" +msgstr "常見輸出格式" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1248 msgid "FORMATS Value" -msgstr "" +msgstr "FORMATS 值" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1249 msgid "File Type" -msgstr "" +msgstr "檔案類型" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle -#: book.translate.xml:1250 book.translate.xml:7223 +#: book.translate.xml:1250 book.translate.xml:7206 msgid "Description" -msgstr "" +msgstr "說明" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:1256 book.translate.xml:2485 msgid "html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1257 msgid "HTML, one file" -msgstr "" +msgstr "HTML，單檔" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1258 msgid "" "A single book.html or article.html." msgstr "" +"單一 book.html 或 article.html。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1263 msgid "html-split" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1264 msgid "HTML, multiple files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "HTML，多檔" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1265 msgid "" "Multiple HTML files, one for each chapter or section, for " "use on a typical web site." msgstr "" +"多個 HTML 檔案，每個章或節一個檔案，供一般網站使用。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1271 msgid "pdf" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1272 msgid "PDF" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry #: book.translate.xml:1273 msgid "Portable Document Format" -msgstr "" +msgstr "可攜的文件格式" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1279 msgid "" "The default output format can vary by document, but is usually html-" "split. Other formats are chosen by setting FORMATS to a specific value. Multiple output formats can be created at a " "single time by setting FORMATS to a list of formats." msgstr "" +"預設輸出的格式會依文件而有所不同，但同常是 html-split。其" +"他格式可設定 FORMATS 為特定值來選擇。在 FORMATS 設定所需格式的清單可一次輸出多個格式。" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:1286 msgid "Build a Single HTML Output File" -msgstr "" +msgstr "建置單頁 HTML 輸出檔" #. (itstool) path: example/screen #: book.translate.xml:1288 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook\n" "% make FORMATS=html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:1293 msgid "Build HTML-Split and PDF Output Files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "建置分頁 HTML 及 PDF 輸出檔" #. (itstool) path: example/screen #: book.translate.xml:1296 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook\n" "% make FORMATS=\"html-split pdf\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:1302 msgid "The FreeBSD Documentation Build Toolset" -msgstr "" +msgstr "FreeBSD 說明文件建置工具集" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1304 msgid "" "These are the tools used to build and install the FDP " "documentation." -msgstr "" +msgstr "建置與安裝 FDP 說明文件會使用到以下工具。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1309 msgid "" "The primary build tool is make1, specifically " "Berkeley Make." msgstr "" +"主要的建置工具為 make1，特別是 " +"Berkeley Make。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1314 msgid "" "Package building is handled by FreeBSD's pkg-" "create8." msgstr "" +"套件建置會使用 FreeBSD 的 pkg-create8 來處理。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1319 msgid "" "gzip1 is used to create compressed versions of the document. " "bzip21 archives are also supported. tar1 is used for package " "building." msgstr "" +"gzip1 用來建立壓縮版的文件，也支援 " +"bzip21 封存。tar1 則用在套件建置。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1325 msgid "" "install1 is used to install the documentation." msgstr "" +"install1 用來安裝說明文件。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:1333 msgid "Understanding Makefiles in the Documentation Tree" -msgstr "" +msgstr "了解在說明文件樹中的 Makefile" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1336 msgid "" "There are three main types of Makefiles in the FreeBSD " "Documentation Project tree." msgstr "" +"在 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃樹底下的 Makefile 主要有三個類" +"型。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1341 msgid "" "Subdirectory Makefiles simply pass commands to those directories below them." msgstr "" +"子目錄的 Makefile 傳遞" +"指令給在其所在目錄底下的目錄。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1347 msgid "" "Documentation Makefiles describe the documents that are produced from this directory." msgstr "" +"說明文件的 Makefiles " +"用來描述要如何在其所在目錄產生文件。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1354 msgid "" "Make includes are the glue that perform the document production, and are usually of " "the form doc.xxx.mk." msgstr "" +"Make 引用檔 會連結一些產生文件所需的程式，通常為 doc.xxx.mk。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #: book.translate.xml:1362 msgid "Subdirectory Makefiles" -msgstr "" +msgstr "子目錄的 Makefile" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1364 msgid "These Makefiles usually take the form of:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:1367 #, no-wrap msgid "" "SUBDIR =articles\n" "SUBDIR+=books\n" "\n" "COMPAT_SYMLINK = en\n" "\n" "DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/..\n" ".include \"${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1375 msgid "" "The first four non-empty lines define the make1 variables " "SUBDIR, COMPAT_SYMLINK, and " "DOC_PREFIX." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1380 msgid "" "The SUBDIR statement and COMPAT_SYMLINK statement show how to assign a value to a variable, overriding any " "previous value." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1385 msgid "" "The second SUBDIR statement shows how a value is appended " "to the current value of a variable. The SUBDIR variable " "is now articles books." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1390 msgid "" "The DOC_PREFIX assignment shows how a value is assigned " "to the variable, but only if it is not already defined. This is useful if " "DOC_PREFIX is not where this Makefile thinks it is - the user can override this and provide the correct " "value." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1397 msgid "" "What does it all mean? SUBDIR mentions which " "subdirectories below this one the build process should pass any work on to." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1401 msgid "" "COMPAT_SYMLINK is specific to compatibility symlinks " "(amazingly enough) for languages to their official encoding (doc/" "en would point to en_US.ISO-8859-1)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1406 msgid "" "DOC_PREFIX is the path to the root of the FreeBSD " "Document Project tree. This is not always that easy to find, and is also " "easily overridden, to allow for flexibility. .CURDIR is a " "make1 builtin variable with the path to the current directory." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1413 msgid "" "The final line includes the FreeBSD Documentation Project's project-wide " "make1 system file doc.project.mk which is the " "glue which converts these variables into build instructions." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #: book.translate.xml:1420 msgid "Documentation Makefiles" -msgstr "" +msgstr "說明文件的 Makefile" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1422 msgid "" "These Makefiles set make1 variables that " "describe how to build the documentation contained in that directory." msgstr "" +"這些 Makefile 用來設定 " +"make1 變數來描述要如何建置在該目錄中的說明文件。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1426 msgid "Here is an example:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "這裡有一個例子：" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:1428 #, no-wrap msgid "" "MAINTAINER=nik@FreeBSD.org\n" "\n" "DOC?= book\n" "\n" "FORMATS?= html-split html\n" "\n" "INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz\n" "INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=\n" "\n" "# SGML content\n" "SRCS= book.xml\n" "\n" "DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..\n" "\n" ".include \"$(DOC_PREFIX)/share/mk/docproj.docbook.mk\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1444 msgid "" "The MAINTAINER variable allows committers to claim " "ownership of a document in the FreeBSD Documentation Project, and take " "responsibility for maintaining it." msgstr "" +"MAINTAINER 變數讓提交者可以聲明文件在 FreeBSD 說明文件計劃" +"中的所有權，並負責維護該文件。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1449 msgid "" "DOC is the name (sans the .xml " "extension) of the main document created by this directory. SRCS lists all the individual files that make up the document. This " "should also include important files in which a change should result in a " "rebuild." msgstr "" +"DOC 是由此目錄會建立的主要文件的名稱 (不需要 ." +"xml 副檔名)。SRCS 會列出產生文件所需的各別檔" +"案，此處也應引用要在重新建置 (Rebuild) 使用的重要的檔案。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1456 msgid "" "FORMATS indicates the default formats that should be " "built for this document. INSTALL_COMPRESSED is the " "default list of compression techniques that should be used in the document " "build. INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESS, empty by default, should be " "non-empty if only compressed documents are desired in the build." msgstr "" +"FORMATS 用來指定此份文件建置時預設應採用的格式。" +"INSTALL_COMPRESSED 是為在文件建置時預設要使用的壓縮技術清" +"單。INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESS 預設為空值的，若在建置時只想要產" +"生壓縮後的文件則改成非空值。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1464 msgid "" "The DOC_PREFIX and include statements should be familiar " "already." -msgstr "" +msgstr "DOC_PREFIX 以及 include 敘述句應不需再說明了。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:1470 msgid "FreeBSD Documentation Project Make Includes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "FreeBSD 說明文件計劃 Make 引用檔" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1473 msgid "" "make1 includes are best explained by inspection of the code. Here " "are the system include files:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1478 msgid "" "doc.project.mk is the main project include file, which " "includes all the following include files, as necessary." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1484 msgid "" "doc.subdir.mk handles traversing of the document tree " "during the build and install processes." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1490 msgid "" "doc.install.mk provides variables that affect ownership " "and installation of documents." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1495 msgid "" "doc.docbook.mk is included if DOCFORMAT is docbook and DOC is set." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #: book.translate.xml:1502 msgid "doc.project.mk" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1504 msgid "By inspection:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:1506 #, no-wrap msgid "" "DOCFORMAT?=\tdocbook\n" "MAINTAINER?=\tdoc@FreeBSD.org\n" "\n" "PREFIX?=\t/usr/local\n" "PRI_LANG?=\ten_US.ISO8859-1\n" "\n" ".if defined(DOC)\n" ".if ${DOCFORMAT} == \"docbook\"\n" ".include \"doc.docbook.mk\"\n" ".endif\n" ".endif\n" "\n" ".include \"doc.subdir.mk\"\n" ".include \"doc.install.mk\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title #: book.translate.xml:1523 book.translate.xml:1573 msgid "Variables" -msgstr "" +msgstr "變數" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1525 msgid "" "DOCFORMAT and MAINTAINER are assigned " "default values, if these are not set by the document make file." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1529 msgid "" "PREFIX is the prefix under which the documentation building tools are installed. For normal package and " "port installation, this is /usr/local." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1534 msgid "" "PRI_LANG should be set to whatever language and encoding " "is natural amongst users these documents are being built for. US English is " "the default." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para #: book.translate.xml:1540 msgid "" "PRI_LANG does not affect which documents can, or even " "will, be built. Its main use is creating links to commonly referenced " "documents into the FreeBSD documentation install root." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title #: book.translate.xml:1548 msgid "Conditionals" -msgstr "" +msgstr "條件" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1550 msgid "" "The .if defined(DOC) line is an example of a " "make1 conditional which, like in other programs, defines behavior if " "some condition is true or if it is false. defined is a " "function which returns whether the variable given is defined or not." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1556 msgid "" ".if ${DOCFORMAT} == \"docbook\", next, tests whether the " "DOCFORMAT variable is \"docbook\", and " "in this case, includes doc.docbook.mk." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1561 msgid "" "The two .endifs close the two above conditionals, marking " "the end of their application." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #: book.translate.xml:1567 msgid "doc.subdir.mk" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:1569 msgid "" "This file is too long to explain in detail. These notes describe the most " "important features." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1577 msgid "" "SUBDIR is a list of subdirectories that the build process " "should go further down into." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1583 msgid "" "ROOT_SYMLINKS is the name of directories that should be " "linked to the document install root from their actual locations, if the " "current language is the primary language (specified by PRI_LANG)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1591 msgid "" "COMPAT_SYMLINK is described in the Subdirectory Makefile section." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title #: book.translate.xml:1600 msgid "Targets and Macros" -msgstr "" +msgstr "目標與巨集" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1602 msgid "" "Dependencies are described by target: " "dependency1 dependency2 ... tuples, " "where to build target, the given dependencies must be " "built first." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1609 msgid "" "After that descriptive tuple, instructions on how to build the target may be " "given, if the conversion process between the target and its dependencies are " "not previously defined, or if this particular conversion is not the same as " "the default conversion method." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1615 msgid "" "A special dependency .USE defines the equivalent of a " "macro." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:1618 book.translate.xml:1705 #, no-wrap msgid "" "_SUBDIRUSE: .USE\n" ".for entry in ${SUBDIR}\n" "\t@${ECHO} \"===> ${DIRPRFX}${entry}\"\n" "\t@(cd ${.CURDIR}/${entry} && \\\n" "\t${MAKE} ${.TARGET:S/realpackage/package/:S/realinstall/install/} DIRPRFX=${DIRPRFX}${entry}/ )\n" ".endfor" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: para/buildtarget #: book.translate.xml:1625 book.translate.xml:1641 msgid "_SUBDIRUSE" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1625 msgid "" "In the above, <_:buildtarget-1/> is now a macro which will execute the given " "commands when it is listed as a dependency." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1629 msgid "" "What sets this macro apart from other targets? Basically, it is executed " "after the instructions given in the build procedure it " "is listed as a dependency to, and it does not adjust .TARGET, which is the variable which contains the name of the target " "currently being built." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:1637 #, no-wrap msgid "" "clean: _SUBDIRUSE\n" "\trm -f ${CLEANFILES}" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: para/buildtarget #: book.translate.xml:1640 book.translate.xml:1644 book.translate.xml:1664 -#: book.translate.xml:6091 book.translate.xml:6095 book.translate.xml:6099 +#: book.translate.xml:6074 book.translate.xml:6078 book.translate.xml:6082 msgid "clean" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1640 msgid "" "In the above, <_:buildtarget-1/> will use the <_:buildtarget-2/> macro after " "it has executed the instruction rm -f ${CLEANFILES}. In " "effect, this causes <_:buildtarget-3/> to go further and further down the " "directory tree, deleting built files as it goes down, " "not on the way back up." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect4/title #: book.translate.xml:1650 msgid "Provided Targets" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已提供的目標" #. (itstool) path: para/buildtarget #: book.translate.xml:1654 msgid "install" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: para/buildtarget #: book.translate.xml:1655 msgid "package" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: para/buildtarget #: book.translate.xml:1658 msgid "realinstall" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: para/buildtarget #: book.translate.xml:1659 msgid "realpackage" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1654 msgid "" "<_:buildtarget-1/> and <_:buildtarget-2/> both go down the directory tree " "calling the real versions of themselves in the subdirectories (<_:" "buildtarget-3/> and <_:buildtarget-4/> respectively)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: para/buildtarget #: book.translate.xml:1667 msgid "cleandir" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1664 msgid "" "<_:buildtarget-1/> removes files created by the build process (and goes down " "the directory tree too). <_:buildtarget-2/> does the same, and also removes " "the object directory, if any." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title #: book.translate.xml:1675 msgid "More on Conditionals" -msgstr "" +msgstr "更多條件" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1679 msgid "" "exists is another condition function which returns true " "if the given file exists." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1685 msgid "empty returns true if the given variable is empty." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1690 msgid "" "target returns true if the given target does not already " "exist." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title #: book.translate.xml:1697 msgid "Looping Constructs in make (.for)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 make (.for) 中的迴圈結構" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1700 msgid "" ".for provides a way to repeat a set of instructions for " "each space-separated element in a variable. It does this by assigning a " "variable to contain the current element in the list being examined." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:1712 msgid "" "In the above, if SUBDIR is empty, no action is taken; if " "it has one or more elements, the instructions between .for and .endfor would repeat for every element, with " "entry being replaced with the value of the current " "element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title #: book.translate.xml:1756 msgid "The Website" msgstr "網站" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:1758 msgid "" "The FreeBSD web site is part of the FreeBSD documents. Files for the web " "site are stored in the en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs " "subdirectory of the document tree directory, ~/doc in " "this example." msgstr "" "FreeBSD 網站是 FreeBSD 文件的一部份。網站的檔案儲存在文件樹目錄，此例中是 " "~/doc，的 en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs 子" "目錄。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:1765 msgid "Environment Variables" msgstr "環境變數" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1767 msgid "" -"Several environment variables control which parts of the the web site are " -"built or installed, and to which directories." -msgstr "有些環境變數控制網站的建構或安裝，和裝到哪個目錄" +"Several environment variables control which parts of the web site are built " +"or installed, and to which directories." +msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: tip/para #: book.translate.xml:1772 msgid "" "The web build system uses make1, and considers " "variables to be set when they have been defined, even if they are empty. The " "examples here show the recommended ways of defining and using these " "variables. Setting or defining these variables with other values or methods " "might lead to unexpected surprises." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:1782 msgid "DESTDIR" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1785 msgid "" "DESTDIR specifies the path where the web site files are to be installed." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1788 msgid "" "This variable is best set with env1 or the user shell's " "method of setting environment variables, setenv for " "csh1 or export for " "sh1." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:1798 msgid "ENGLISH_ONLY" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1801 msgid "Default: undefined. Build and include all translations." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1804 msgid "" "ENGLISH_ONLY=yes: use only the English documents and " "ignore all translations." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:1810 msgid "WEB_ONLY" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1813 msgid "" "Default: undefined. Build both the web site and all the books and articles." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1816 msgid "" "WEB_ONLY=yes: build or install only HTML pages from the en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs " "directory. Other directories and documents, including books and articles, " "will be ignored." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:1825 msgid "WEB_LANG" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1828 msgid "" "Default: undefined. Build and include all the available languages on the web " "site." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:1831 msgid "" "Set to a space-separated list of languages to be included in the build or " "install. The formats are the same as the directory names in the document " "root directory. For example, to include the German and French documents:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/screen #: book.translate.xml:1837 #, no-wrap msgid "WEB_LANG=\"de_DE.ISO8859-1 fr_FR.ISO8859-1\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1842 msgid "" "WEB_ONLY, WEB_LANG, and " "ENGLISH_ONLY are make1 variables and can be " "set in /etc/make.conf, Makefile.inc, as environment variables on the command line, or in dot files." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:1850 msgid "Building and Installing the Web Pages" -msgstr "" +msgstr "建置並安裝網頁" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1852 msgid "" "Having obtained the documentation and web site source files, the web site " "can be built." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1855 msgid "" "An actual installation of the web site is run as the root user because the permissions on the web " "server directory will not allow files to be installed by an unprivileged " "user. For testing, it can be useful to install the files as a normal user to " "a temporary directory." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1861 msgid "" "In these examples, the web site files are built by user jru in their home directory, ~/doc, with a full path of /usr/home/jru/doc." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: tip/para #: book.translate.xml:1867 msgid "" "The web site build uses the INDEX from the Ports " "Collection and might fail if that file or /usr/ports is " "not present. The simplest approach is to install the Ports Collection." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:1875 msgid "Build the Full Web Site and All Documents" -msgstr "" +msgstr "建置完整網站與所有說明文件" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:1877 msgid "" "Build the web site and all documents. The resulting files are left in the " "document tree:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/screen #: book.translate.xml:1880 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs/\n" "% make all" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:1885 msgid "Build Only the Web Site in English" -msgstr "" +msgstr "只建置英文版網站" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:1887 msgid "" "Build the web site only, in English, as user jru, and install the resulting files into /tmp/" "www for testing:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/screen #: book.translate.xml:1892 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs/\n" "% env DESTDIR=/tmp/www make ENGLISH_ONLY=yes WEB_ONLY=yes all install" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:1895 msgid "" "Changes to static files can usually be tested by viewing the modified files " "directly with a web browser. If the site has been built as shown above, a " "modified main page can be viewed with:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/screen #: book.translate.xml:1900 #, no-wrap msgid "% firefox /tmp/www/data/index.html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:1902 msgid "" "Modifications to dynamic files can be tested with a web server running on " "the local system. After building the site as shown above, this /" "usr/local/etc/apache24/httpd.conf can be used with www/" "apache24:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:1908 #, no-wrap msgid "" "# httpd.conf for testing the FreeBSD website\n" "Define TestRoot \"/tmp/www/data\"\n" "\n" "# directory for configuration files\n" "ServerRoot \"/usr/local\"\n" "\n" "Listen 80\n" "\n" "# minimum required modules\n" "LoadModule authz_core_module libexec/apache24/mod_authz_core.so\n" "LoadModule mime_module libexec/apache24/mod_mime.so\n" "LoadModule unixd_module libexec/apache24/mod_unixd.so\n" "LoadModule cgi_module libexec/apache24/mod_cgi.so\n" "LoadModule dir_module libexec/apache24/mod_dir.so\n" "\n" "# run the webserver as user and group\n" "User www\n" "Group www\n" "\n" "ServerAdmin you@example.com\n" "ServerName fbsdtest\n" "\n" "# deny access to all files\n" "<Directory />\n" " AllowOverride none\n" " Require all denied\n" "</Directory>\n" "\n" "# allow access to the website directory\n" "DocumentRoot \"${TestRoot}\"\n" "<Directory \"${TestRoot}\">\n" " Options Indexes FollowSymLinks\n" " AllowOverride None\n" " Require all granted\n" "</Directory>\n" "\n" "# prevent access to .htaccess and .htpasswd files\n" "<Files \".ht*\">\n" " Require all denied\n" "</Files>\n" "\n" "ErrorLog \"/var/log/httpd-error.log\"\n" "LogLevel warn\n" "\n" "# set up the CGI script directory\n" "<Directory \"${TestRoot}/cgi\">\n" " AllowOverride None\n" " Options None\n" " Require all granted\n" " Options +ExecCGI\n" " AddHandler cgi-script .cgi\n" "</Directory>\n" "\n" "Include etc/apache24/Includes/*.conf" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:1963 msgid "Start the web server with" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/screen #: book.translate.xml:1965 #, no-wrap msgid "# service apache24 onestart" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:1967 msgid "" "The web site can be viewed at . Be " "aware that many links refer to the real FreeBSD site by name, and those " "links will still go to the external site instead of the local test version. " "Fully testing the local site will require temporarily setting DNS so www.FreeBSD.org resolves to " "localhost or the local IP address." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:1979 msgid "Build and Install the Web Site" -msgstr "" +msgstr "建置並安裝網站" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:1981 msgid "" "Build the web site and all documents as user jru. Install the resulting files as root into the default directory, /root/" "public_html:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/screen #: book.translate.xml:1988 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs\n" "% make all\n" "% su -\n" "Password:\n" "# cd /usr/home/jru/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs\n" "# make install" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:1996 msgid "" "The install process does not delete any old or outdated files that existed " "previously in the same directory. If a new copy of the site is built and " "installed every day, this command will find and delete all files that have " "not been updated in three days:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/screen #: book.translate.xml:2002 #, no-wrap msgid "# find /usr/local/www -ctime 3 -delete" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title #: book.translate.xml:2039 msgid "XML Primer" -msgstr "" +msgstr "XML 入門" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:2041 msgid "" "Most FDP documentation is written with markup languages " "based on XML. This chapter explains what that means, how " "to read and understand the documentation source, and the XML techniques used." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para #: book.translate.xml:2047 msgid "" "Portions of this section were inspired by Mark Galassi's Get " "Going With DocBook." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2054 msgid "" "In the original days of computers, electronic text was simple. There were a " "few character sets like ASCII or EBCDIC, but that was about it. Text was text, and what you saw really was " "what you got. No frills, no formatting, no intelligence." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2060 msgid "" "Inevitably, this was not enough. When text is in a machine-usable format, " "machines are expected to be able to use and manipulate it intelligently. " "Authors want to indicate that certain phrases should be emphasized, or added " "to a glossary, or made into hyperlinks. Filenames could be shown in a " "typewriter style font for viewing on screen, but as " "italics when printed, or any of a myriad of other options for " "presentation." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2069 msgid "" "It was once hoped that Artificial Intelligence (AI) would make this easy. " "The computer would read the document and automatically identify key phrases, " "filenames, text that the reader should type in, examples, and more. " "Unfortunately, real life has not happened quite like that, and computers " "still require assistance before they can meaningfully process text." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2077 msgid "" "More precisely, they need help identifying what is what. Consider this text:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: blockquote/para #: book.translate.xml:2081 msgid "" "To remove /tmp/foo, use " "rm1." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: blockquote/screen #: book.translate.xml:2084 #, no-wrap msgid "% rm /tmp/foo" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2087 msgid "" "It is easy to see which parts are filenames, which are commands to be typed " "in, which parts are references to manual pages, and so on. But the computer " "processing the document cannot. For this we need markup." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2092 msgid "" "Markup is commonly used to describe adding value or increasing cost. The term takes on both these " "meanings when applied to text. Markup is additional text included in the " "document, distinguished from the document's content in some way, so that " "programs that process the document can read the markup and use it when " "making decisions about the document. Editors can hide the markup from the " "user, so the user is not distracted by it." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2102 msgid "" "The extra information stored in the markup adds value " "to the document. Adding the markup to the document must typically be done by " "a person—after all, if computers could recognize the text sufficiently well " "to add the markup then there would be no need to add it in the first place. " "This increases the cost (the effort required) to create " "the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2111 msgid "" "The previous example is actually represented in this document like this:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2114 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraTo remove filename/tmp/foofilename, use &man.rm.1;.para\n" "\n" "screen&prompt.user; userinputrm /tmp/foouserinputscreen" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2118 msgid "The markup is clearly separate from the content." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2120 msgid "" "Markup languages define what the markup means and how it should be " "interpreted." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2123 msgid "" "Of course, one markup language might not be enough. A markup language for " "technical documentation has very different requirements than a markup " "language that is intended for cookery recipes. This, in turn, would be very " "different from a markup language used to describe poetry. What is really " "needed is a first language used to write these other markup languages. A " "meta markup language." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2131 msgid "" "This is exactly what the eXtensible Markup Language (XML) " "is. Many markup languages have been written in XML, " "including the two most used by the FDP, XHTML and DocBook." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2137 msgid "" "Each language definition is more properly called a grammar, vocabulary, " "schema or Document Type Definition (DTD). There are " "various languages to specify an XML grammar, or " "schema." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #. (itstool) id: book.translate.xml#xml-primer-validating #: book.translate.xml:2143 msgid "" "A schema is a complete specification of all the " "elements that are allowed to appear, the order in which they should appear, " "which elements are mandatory, which are optional, and so forth. This makes " "it possible to write an XML parser " "which reads in both the schema and a document which claims to conform to the " "schema. The parser can then confirm whether or not all the elements required " "by the vocabulary are in the document in the right order, and whether there " "are any errors in the markup. This is normally referred to as " "validating the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para #: book.translate.xml:2157 msgid "" "Validation confirms that the choice of elements, their ordering, and so on, " "conforms to that listed in the grammar. It does not " "check whether appropriate markup has been used for the " "content. If all the filenames in a document were marked up as function " "names, the parser would not flag this as an error (assuming, of course, that " "the schema defines elements for filenames and functions, and that they are " "allowed to appear in the same place)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2168 msgid "" "Most contributions to the Documentation Project will be content marked up in " "either XHTML or DocBook, rather than alterations to the " "schemas. For this reason, this book will not touch on how to write a " "vocabulary." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:2176 msgid "Elements, Tags, and Attributes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "元素、標籤與屬性" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2178 msgid "" "All the vocabularies written in XML share certain " "characteristics. This is hardly surprising, as the philosophy behind " "XML will inevitably show through. One of the most obvious " "manifestations of this philosophy is that of content " "and elements." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2185 msgid "" "Documentation, whether it is a single web page, or a lengthy book, is " "considered to consist of content. This content is then divided and further " "subdivided into elements. The purpose of adding markup is to name and " "identify the boundaries of these elements for further processing." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2191 msgid "" "For example, consider a typical book. At the very top level, the book is " "itself an element. This book element obviously contains " "chapters, which can be considered to be elements in their own right. Each " "chapter will contain more elements, such as paragraphs, quotations, and " "footnotes. Each paragraph might contain further elements, identifying " "content that was direct speech, or the name of a character in the story." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2200 msgid "" "It may be helpful to think of this as chunking content. At " "the very top level is one chunk, the book. Look a little deeper, and there " "are more chunks, the individual chapters. These are chunked further into " "paragraphs, footnotes, character names, and so on." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2206 msgid "" "Notice how this differentiation between different elements of the content " "can be made without resorting to any XML terms. It really " "is surprisingly straightforward. This could be done with a highlighter pen " "and a printout of the book, using different colors to indicate different " "chunks of content." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2213 msgid "" "Of course, we do not have an electronic highlighter pen, so we need some " "other way of indicating which element each piece of content belongs to. In " "languages written in XML (XHTML, " "DocBook, et al) this is done by means of tags." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2219 msgid "" "A tag is used to identify where a particular element starts, and where the " "element ends. The tag is not part of the element itself. Because each grammar was normally written to mark up specific " "types of information, each one will recognize different elements, and will " "therefore have different names for the tags." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2226 msgid "" "For an element called element-name the start tag " "will normally look like element-name. The corresponding closing tag for this element is element-name." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:2232 msgid "Using an Element (Start and End Tags)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用元素 (開始與結束標籤)" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:2234 msgid "" "XHTML has an element for indicating that the content " "enclosed by the element is a paragraph, called p." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2238 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pThis is a paragraph. It starts with the start tag for\n" " the 'p' element, and it will end with the end tag for the 'p'\n" " element.p\n" "\n" "pThis is another paragraph. But this one is much shorter.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2245 msgid "" "Some elements have no content. For example, in XHTML, a " "horizontal line can be included in the document. For these empty elements, XML introduced a shorthand form that is " "completely equivalent to the two-tag version:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:2252 msgid "Using an Element Without Content" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用沒有內容的元素" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:2254 msgid "" "XHTML has an element for indicating a horizontal rule, " "called hr. This element does not wrap content, so it looks like " "this:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2258 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pOne paragraph.p\n" "hrhr\n" "\n" "pThis is another paragraph. A horizontal rule separates this\n" " from the previous paragraph.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para #: book.translate.xml:2264 msgid "The shorthand version consists of a single tag:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2266 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pOne paragraph.p\n" "hr\n" "\n" "pThis is another paragraph. A horizontal rule separates this\n" " from the previous paragraph.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2273 msgid "" "As shown above, elements can contain other elements. In the book example " "earlier, the book element contained all the chapter elements, which in turn " "contained all the paragraph elements, and so on." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:2279 msgid "Elements Within Elements; em" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在元素中的元素; em" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2281 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pThis is a simple emparagraphem where some\n" " of the emwordsem have been ememphasizedem.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2285 msgid "" "The grammar consists of rules that describe which elements can contain other " "elements, and exactly what they can contain." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: important/para #: book.translate.xml:2290 msgid "" "People often confuse the terms tags and elements, and use the terms as if " "they were interchangeable. They are not." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: important/para #: book.translate.xml:2294 msgid "" "An element is a conceptual part of your document. An element has a defined " "start and end. The tags mark where the element starts and ends." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: important/para #: book.translate.xml:2298 msgid "" "When this document (or anyone else knowledgeable about XML) refers to the p tag " "they mean the literal text consisting of the three characters <, p, and >. But the phrase " "the p element refers to the whole element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: important/para #: book.translate.xml:2307 msgid "" "This distinction is very subtle. But keep it in mind." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2311 msgid "" "Elements can have attributes. An attribute has a name and a value, and is " "used for adding extra information to the element. This might be information " "that indicates how the content should be rendered, or might be something " "that uniquely identifies that occurrence of the element, or it might be " "something else." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2317 msgid "" "An element's attributes are written inside the start " "tag for that element, and take the form attribute-" "name=\"attribute-value\"." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2322 msgid "" "In XHTML, the p element has an attribute " "called align, which suggests an alignment " "(justification) for the paragraph to the program displaying the " "XHTML." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2328 msgid "" "The align attribute can take one of four " "defined values, left, center, " "right and justify. If the attribute is " "not specified then the default is left." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:2335 msgid "Using an Element with an Attribute" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用元素的屬性" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2337 #, no-wrap msgid "" "p align=\"left\"The inclusion of the align attribute\n" " on this paragraph was superfluous, since the default is left.p\n" "\n" "p align=\"center\"This may appear in the center.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2343 msgid "" "Some attributes only take specific values, such as left " "or justify. Others allow any value." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title #: book.translate.xml:2348 msgid "Single Quotes Around Attributes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "屬性的單引號" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2350 #, no-wrap msgid "p align='right'I am on the right!p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2353 msgid "" "Attribute values in XML must be enclosed in either single " "or double quotes. Double quotes are traditional. Single quotes are useful " "when the attribute value contains double quotes." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2358 msgid "" "Information about attributes, elements, and tags is stored in catalog files. " "The Documentation Project uses standard DocBook catalogs and includes " "additional catalogs for FreeBSD-specific features. Paths to the catalog " "files are defined in an environment variable so they can be found by the " "document build tools." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:2366 book.translate.xml:2778 book.translate.xml:2912 -#: book.translate.xml:3099 book.translate.xml:3392 +#: book.translate.xml:2366 book.translate.xml:2761 book.translate.xml:2895 +#: book.translate.xml:3082 book.translate.xml:3375 msgid "To Do…" -msgstr "" +msgstr "待辦事項..." #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:2368 msgid "" "Before running the examples in this document, install textproc/" "docproj from the FreeBSD Ports Collection. This is a " "meta-port that downloads and installs the standard " "programs and supporting files needed by the Documentation Project. " "csh1 users must use rehash for the shell to " "recognize new programs after they have been installed, or log out and then " "log back in again." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:2380 msgid "Create example.xml, and enter this text:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2383 #, no-wrap msgid "" "!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\" \"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\"\n" "\n" "html xmlns=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml\"\n" " head\n" " titleAn Example XHTML Filetitle\n" " head\n" "\n" " body\n" " pThis is a paragraph containing some text.p\n" "\n" " pThis paragraph contains some more text.p\n" "\n" " p align=\"right\"This paragraph might be right-justified.p\n" " body\n" "html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:2401 msgid "Try to validate this file using an XML parser." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:2404 msgid "" "textproc/docproj includes the xmllint " "validating parser." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:2409 msgid "Use xmllint to validate the document:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/screen #: book.translate.xml:2412 #, no-wrap msgid "% xmllint --valid --noout example.xml" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:2414 msgid "" "xmllint returns without displaying any output, showing " "that the document validated successfully." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:2420 msgid "" "See what happens when required elements are omitted. Delete the line with " "the title and title tags, and re-run the validation." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/screen #: book.translate.xml:2426 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% xmllint --valid --noout example.xml\n" "example.xml:5: element head: validity error : Element head content does not follow the DTD, expecting ((script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)* , ((title , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)* , (base , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)*)?) | (base , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)* , title , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)*))), got ()" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:2429 msgid "" "This shows that the validation error comes from the fifth line of the example.xml file and " "that the content of the head is the part which " "does not follow the rules of the XHTML grammar." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:2436 msgid "" "Then xmllint shows the line where the error was found and " "marks the exact character position with a ^ sign." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para #: book.translate.xml:2442 msgid "Replace the title element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:2449 msgid "The DOCTYPE Declaration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "DOCTYPE 宣告" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2451 msgid "" "The beginning of each document can specify the name of the DTD to which the document conforms. This DOCTYPE declaration is used by " "XML parsers to identify the DTD and " "ensure that the document does conform to it." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2457 msgid "" "A typical declaration for a document written to conform with version 1.0 of " "the XHTML DTD looks like this:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2461 #, no-wrap msgid "!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\" \"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2463 msgid "That line contains a number of different components." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:2467 msgid "<!" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2470 msgid "" "The indicator shows this is an XML " "declaration." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:2476 msgid "DOCTYPE" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2479 msgid "" "Shows that this is an XML declaration of the document " "type." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2488 msgid "" "Names the first element that " "will appear in the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:2495 msgid "PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: para/indexterm #. (itstool) path: sect2/indexterm #: book.translate.xml:2500 book.translate.xml:2541 msgid "Formal Public Identifier" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2498 msgid "" "Lists the Formal Public Identifier (FPI) <_:indexterm-1/> " "for the DTD to which this document conforms. The " "XML parser uses this to find the correct DTD when processing this document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2508 msgid "" "PUBLIC is not a part of the FPI, but " "indicates to the XML processor how to find the " "DTD referenced in the FPI. Other ways " "of telling the XML parser how to find the DTD are shown later." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:2519 msgid "" "\"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2522 msgid "" "A local filename or a URL to find the DTD." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:2528 msgid ">" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2531 msgid "Ends the declaration and returns to the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #: book.translate.xml:2538 msgid "Formal Public Identifiers (FPIs)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "正式公用識別碼 (FPI)" #. (itstool) path: note/para #: book.translate.xml:2546 msgid "" "It is not necessary to know this, but it is useful background, and might " "help debug problems when the XML processor can not locate " "the DTD." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:2552 msgid "FPIs must follow a specific syntax:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2555 #, no-wrap msgid "\"Owner//Keyword Description//Language\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:2559 msgid "Owner" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2562 msgid "The owner of the FPI." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2564 msgid "" "The beginning of the string identifies the owner of the FPI. For example, the FPI \"ISO 8879:1986//" "ENTITIES Greek Symbols//EN\" lists ISO 8879:1986 as being the owner for the set of entities for Greek symbols. " "ISO 8879:1986 is the International Organization for " "Standardization (ISO) number for the SGML standard, the predecessor (and a superset) of XML." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2577 msgid "" "Otherwise, this string will either look like -//Owner or +//Owner (notice the only difference is the leading + or " "-)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2584 msgid "" "If the string starts with - then the owner information is " "unregistered, with a + identifying it as registered." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2589 msgid "" "ISO 9070:1991 defines how registered names are generated. " "It might be derived from the number of an ISO " "publication, an ISBN code, or an organization code " "assigned according to ISO 6523. Additionally, a " "registration authority could be created in order to assign registered names. " "The ISO council delegated this to the American National " "Standards Institute (ANSI)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2600 msgid "" "Because the FreeBSD Project has not been registered, the owner string is " "-//FreeBSD. As seen in the example, the W3C are not a registered owner either." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:2608 msgid "Keyword" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2611 msgid "" "There are several keywords that indicate the type of information in the " "file. Some of the most common keywords are DTD, " "ELEMENT, ENTITIES, and TEXT. DTD is used only for DTD " "files, ELEMENT is usually used for DTD " "fragments that contain only entity or element declarations. TEXT is used for XML content (text and tags)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:2626 msgid "Description" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2629 msgid "" "Any description can be given for the contents of this file. This may include " "version numbers or any short text that is meaningful and unique for the " "XML system." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term #: book.translate.xml:2637 msgid "Language" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para #: book.translate.xml:2640 msgid "" "An ISO two-character code that identifies the native " "language for the file. EN is used for English." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title #: book.translate.xml:2648 msgid "catalog Files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "catalog 檔案" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:2650 msgid "" "With the syntax above, an XML processor needs to have " "some way of turning the FPI into the name of the file " "containing the DTD. A catalog file (typically called " "catalog) contains lines that map FPIs to filenames. For example, if the catalog file contained the line:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2660 #, no-wrap msgid "PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\" \"1.0/transitional.dtd\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:2662 msgid "" "The XML processor knows that the DTD " "is called transitional.dtd in the 1.0 subdirectory of the directory that held catalog." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para #: book.translate.xml:2668 msgid "" "Examine the contents of /usr/local/share/xml/dtd/xhtml/catalog." "xml. This is the catalog file for the XHTML " "DTDs that were installed as part of the textproc/" "docproj port." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #: book.translate.xml:2677 msgid "Alternatives to FPIs" -msgstr "" +msgstr "FPI 的替代方案" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:2679 msgid "" "Instead of using an FPI to indicate the DTD to which the document conforms (and therefore, which file on the " "system contains the DTD), the filename can be explicitly " "specified." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:2685 msgid "The syntax is slightly different:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting #: book.translate.xml:2687 #, no-wrap msgid "!DOCTYPE html SYSTEM \"/path/to/file.dtd\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:2689 msgid "" "The SYSTEM keyword indicates that the XML processor should locate the DTD in a system " "specific fashion. This typically (but not always) means the DTD will be provided as a filename." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:2695 msgid "" "Using FPIs is preferred for reasons of portability. If " "the SYSTEM identifier is used, then the DTD must be provided and kept in the same location for everyone." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:2703 msgid "Escaping Back to XML" -msgstr "" +msgstr "跳脫回 XML" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2705 msgid "" "Some of the underlying XML syntax can be useful within " "documents. For example, comments can be included in the document, and will " "be ignored by the parser. Comments are entered using XML " "syntax. Other uses for XML syntax will be shown later." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2711 msgid "" "XML sections begin with a <! tag " "and end with a >. These sections contain instructions " "for the parser rather than elements of the document. Everything between " "these tags is XML syntax. The DOCTYPE declaration shown earlier is an example " "of XML syntax included in the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #: book.translate.xml:2723 msgid "Comments" -msgstr "" +msgstr "註解" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2725 msgid "" -"Comments are an XML construct, and are normally only " -"valid inside a DTD. However, as shows, it is possible to use XML " -"syntax within the document." +"An XML document may contain comments. They may appear " +"anywhere as long as they are not inside tags. They are even allowed in some " +"locations inside the DTD (e.g., between entity declarations)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:2730 +#: book.translate.xml:2731 msgid "" -"The delimiter for XML comments is the string --. The first occurrence of this string opens a comment, and the second " -"closes it." +"XML comments start with the string <!--" +" and end with the string -->." msgstr "" -#. (itstool) path: example/title +#. (itstool) path: sect1/para #: book.translate.xml:2735 -msgid "XML Generic Comment" +msgid "Here are some examples of valid XML comments:" msgstr "" +#. (itstool) path: example/title +#: book.translate.xml:2739 +msgid "XML Generic Comments" +msgstr "XML 通用註解" + #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:2737 +#: book.translate.xml:2741 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!-- This is inside the comment -->\n" "\n" -"<!-- This is another comment -->\n" +"<!--This is another comment-->\n" "\n" -"<!-- This is one way\n" -" of doing multiline comments -->\n" +"<!-- This is how you\n" +" write multiline comments -->\n" "\n" -"<!-- This is another way of --\n" -" -- doing multiline comments -->" +"<p>A simple <!-- Comment inside an element's content --> paragraph.</p>" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:2748 +#: book.translate.xml:2751 msgid "" -"XHTML users may be familiar with different rules for " -"comments. In particular, it is often believed that the string " -"<!-- opens a comment, and it is only closed by " -"-->." +"XML comments may contain any strings except " +"--:" msgstr "" -#. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:2753 -msgid "" -"This is not correct. Many web browsers have broken " -"XHTML parsers, and will accept incorrect input as valid. " -"However, the XML parsers used by the Documentation " -"Project are more strict, and will reject documents with that error." -msgstr "" - #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:2760 -msgid "Erroneous XML Comments" -msgstr "" +#: book.translate.xml:2755 +msgid "Erroneous XML Comment" +msgstr "錯誤的XML 註解" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:2762 +#: book.translate.xml:2757 #, no-wrap -msgid "" -"<!-- This is in the comment --\n" -"\n" -" THIS IS OUTSIDE THE COMMENT!\n" -"\n" -" -- back inside the comment -->" +msgid "<!-- This comment--is wrong -->" msgstr "" -#. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:2768 -msgid "" -"The XML parser will treat this as though it were actually:" -msgstr "" - -#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:2771 -#, no-wrap -msgid "<!THIS IS OUTSIDE THE COMMENT>" -msgstr "" - -#. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:2773 -msgid "" -"That is not valid XML, and may give confusing error " -"messages." -msgstr "" - #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:2782 +#: book.translate.xml:2765 msgid "" "Add some comments to example.xml, and check that the " "file still validates using xmllint." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:2788 +#: book.translate.xml:2771 msgid "" "Add some invalid comments to example.xml, and see the " "error messages that xmllint gives when it encounters an " "invalid comment." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:2798 +#: book.translate.xml:2781 msgid "Entities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Entities" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:2800 +#: book.translate.xml:2783 msgid "" "Entities are a mechanism for assigning names to chunks of content. As an " "XML parser processes a document, any entities it finds " "are replaced by the content of the entity." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:2805 +#: book.translate.xml:2788 msgid "" "This is a good way to have re-usable, easily changeable chunks of content in " "XML documents. It is also the only way to include one " "marked up file inside another using XML." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:2810 +#: book.translate.xml:2793 msgid "" "There are two types of entities for two different situations: " "general entities and parameter entities." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:2815 +#: book.translate.xml:2798 msgid "General Entities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "一般 Entities" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:2817 +#: book.translate.xml:2800 msgid "" "General entities are used to assign names to reusable chunks of text. These " "entities can only be used in the document. They cannot be used in an " "XML context." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:2822 +#: book.translate.xml:2805 msgid "" "To include the text of a general entity in the document, include " "&entity-name; in the text. " "For example, consider a general entity called current.version which expands to the current version number of a product. To use it " "in the document, write:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:2830 +#: book.translate.xml:2813 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraThe current version of our product is\n" " &current.version;.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:2833 +#: book.translate.xml:2816 msgid "" "When the version number changes, edit the definition of the general entity, " "replacing the value. Then reprocess the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:2837 +#: book.translate.xml:2820 msgid "" "General entities can also be used to enter characters that could not " "otherwise be included in an XML document. For example, " "< and & cannot normally appear " "in an XML document. The XML parser " "sees the < symbol as the start of a tag. Likewise, " "when the & symbol is seen, the next text is expected " "to be an entity name." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:2846 +#: book.translate.xml:2829 msgid "" "These symbols can be included by using two predefined general entities: " "&lt; and &amp;." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:2850 +#: book.translate.xml:2833 msgid "" "General entities can only be defined within an XML " "context. Such definitions are usually done immediately after the DOCTYPE " "declaration." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:2855 +#: book.translate.xml:2838 msgid "Defining General Entities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "定義一般 Entities" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:2857 +#: book.translate.xml:2840 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\"\n" "\"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\" [\n" "<!ENTITY current.version \"3.0-RELEASE\">\n" "<!ENTITY last.version \"2.2.7-RELEASE\">\n" "]>" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:2863 +#: book.translate.xml:2846 msgid "" "The DOCTYPE declaration has been extended by adding a square bracket at the " "end of the first line. The two entities are then defined over the next two " "lines, the square bracket is closed, and then the DOCTYPE declaration is " "closed." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:2869 +#: book.translate.xml:2852 msgid "" "The square brackets are necessary to indicate that the DTD indicated by the " "DOCTYPE declaration is being extended." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:2876 +#: book.translate.xml:2859 msgid "Parameter Entities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "參數 Entities" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:2878 +#: book.translate.xml:2861 msgid "" "Parameter entities, like general entities, are used to assign names to reusable chunks of " "text. But parameter entities can only be used within an XML context." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:2885 +#: book.translate.xml:2868 msgid "" "Parameter entity definitions are similar to those for general entities. " "However, parameter entries are included with %entity-" "name;. The definition also includes the % between the ENTITY keyword and the name of the " "entity." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:2893 +#: book.translate.xml:2876 msgid "" "For a mnemonic, think Parameter entities use the " "Percent symbol." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:2898 +#: book.translate.xml:2881 msgid "Defining Parameter Entities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "定義參數 Entities" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:2900 +#: book.translate.xml:2883 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\"\n" "\"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\" [\n" "<!ENTITY % param.some \"some\">\n" "<!ENTITY % param.text \"text\">\n" "<!ENTITY % param.new \"%param.some more %param.text\">\n" "\n" "<!-- %param.new now contains \"some more text\" -->\n" "]>" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:2916 +#: book.translate.xml:2899 msgid "Add a general entity to example.xml." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:2919 +#: book.translate.xml:2902 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\"\n" "\"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\" [\n" "<!ENTITY version \"1.1\">\n" "]>\n" "\n" "html xmlns=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml\"\n" " head\n" " titleAn Example XHTML Filetitle\n" " head\n" "\n" " <!-- There may be some comments in here as well -->\n" "\n" " body\n" " pThis is a paragraph containing some text.p\n" "\n" " pThis paragraph contains some more text.p\n" "\n" " p align=\"right\"This paragraph might be right-justified.p\n" "\n" " pThe current version of this document is: &version;p\n" " body\n" "html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:2944 +#: book.translate.xml:2927 msgid "Validate the document using xmllint." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:2949 +#: book.translate.xml:2932 msgid "" "Load example.xml into a web browser. It may have to be " "copied to example.html before the browser recognizes it " "as an XHTML document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:2955 +#: book.translate.xml:2938 msgid "" "Older browsers with simple parsers may not render this file as expected. The " "entity reference &version; may not be replaced by the " "version number, or the XML context closing ]>" " may not be recognized and instead shown in the output." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:2964 +#: book.translate.xml:2947 msgid "" "The solution is to normalize the document with an " "XML normalizer. The normalizer reads valid XML and writes equally valid XML which has been " "transformed in some way. One way the normalizer transforms the input is by " "expanding all the entity references in the document, replacing the entities " "with the text that they represent." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:2973 +#: book.translate.xml:2956 msgid "" "xmllint can be used for this. It also has an option to " "drop the initial DTD section so that the closing " "]> does not confuse browsers:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:2978 +#: book.translate.xml:2961 #, no-wrap msgid "% xmllint --noent --dropdtd example.xml > example.html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:2980 +#: book.translate.xml:2963 msgid "" "A normalized copy of the document with entities expanded is produced in " "example.html, ready to load into a web browser." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:2989 +#: book.translate.xml:2972 msgid "Using Entities to Include Files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在引用檔使用 Entities" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:2991 +#: book.translate.xml:2974 msgid "" "Both general and parameter entities are " "particularly useful for including one file inside another." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:2998 book.translate.xml:3014 +#: book.translate.xml:2981 book.translate.xml:2997 msgid "Using General Entities to Include Files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在引用檔使用一般 Entities" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3000 +#: book.translate.xml:2983 msgid "" "Consider some content for an XML book organized into " "files, one file per chapter, called chapter1.xml, " "chapter2.xml, and so forth, with a book.xml that will contain these chapters." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3007 +#: book.translate.xml:2990 msgid "" "In order to use the contents of these files as the values for entities, they " "are declared with the SYSTEM keyword. This directs the " "XML parser to include the contents of the named file as " "the value of the entity." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3016 +#: book.translate.xml:2999 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\"\n" "\"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\" [\n" "<!ENTITY chapter.1 SYSTEM \"chapter1.xml\">\n" "<!ENTITY chapter.2 SYSTEM \"chapter2.xml\">\n" "<!ENTITY chapter.3 SYSTEM \"chapter3.xml\">\n" "<!-- And so forth -->\n" "]>\n" "\n" "html xmlns=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml\"\n" " <!-- Use the entities to load in the chapters -->\n" "\n" " &chapter.1;\n" " &chapter.2;\n" " &chapter.3;\n" "html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: warning/para -#: book.translate.xml:3034 +#: book.translate.xml:3017 msgid "" "When using general entities to include other files within a document, the " "files being included (chapter1.xml, chapter2." "xml, and so on) must not start with a " "DOCTYPE declaration. This is a syntax error because entities are low-level " "constructs and they are resolved before any parsing happens." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3046 book.translate.xml:3065 +#: book.translate.xml:3029 book.translate.xml:3048 msgid "Using Parameter Entities to Include Files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在引用檔使用參數 Entities" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3048 +#: book.translate.xml:3031 msgid "" "Parameter entities can only be used inside an XML " "context. Including a file in an XML context can be used " "to ensure that general entities are reusable." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3053 +#: book.translate.xml:3036 msgid "" "Suppose that there are many chapters in the document, and these chapters " "were reused in two different books, each book organizing the chapters in a " "different fashion." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3057 +#: book.translate.xml:3040 msgid "" "The entities could be listed at the top of each book, but that quickly " "becomes cumbersome to manage." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3060 +#: book.translate.xml:3043 msgid "" "Instead, place the general entity definitions inside one file, and use a " "parameter entity to include that file within the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:3067 +#: book.translate.xml:3050 msgid "" "Place the entity definitions in a separate file called chapters." "ent and containing this text:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3071 +#: book.translate.xml:3054 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!ENTITY chapter.1 SYSTEM \"chapter1.xml\">\n" "<!ENTITY chapter.2 SYSTEM \"chapter2.xml\">\n" "<!ENTITY chapter.3 SYSTEM \"chapter3.xml\">" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:3075 +#: book.translate.xml:3058 msgid "" "Create a parameter entity to refer to the contents of the file. Then use the " "parameter entity to load the file into the document, which will then make " "all the general entities available for use. Then use the general entities as " "before:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3081 +#: book.translate.xml:3064 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\"\n" "\"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\" [\n" "<!-- Define a parameter entity to load in the chapter general entities -->\n" "<!ENTITY % chapters SYSTEM \"chapters.ent\">\n" "\n" "<!-- Now use the parameter entity to load in this file -->\n" "%chapters;\n" "]>\n" "\n" "html xmlns=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml\"\n" " &chapter.1;\n" " &chapter.2;\n" " &chapter.3;\n" "html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title -#: book.translate.xml:3102 +#: book.translate.xml:3085 msgid "Use General Entities to Include Files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在引用檔使用一般 Entities" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:3106 +#: book.translate.xml:3089 msgid "" "Create three files, para1.xml, para2.xml, and para3.xml." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:3110 +#: book.translate.xml:3093 msgid "Put content like this in each file:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3112 +#: book.translate.xml:3095 #, no-wrap msgid "pThis is the first paragraph.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:3116 book.translate.xml:3169 +#: book.translate.xml:3099 book.translate.xml:3152 msgid "Edit example.xml so that it looks like this:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3119 +#: book.translate.xml:3102 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\"\n" "\"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\" [\n" "<!ENTITY version \"1.1\">\n" "<!ENTITY para1 SYSTEM \"para1.xml\">\n" "<!ENTITY para2 SYSTEM \"para2.xml\">\n" "<!ENTITY para3 SYSTEM \"para3.xml\">\n" "]>\n" "\n" "html xmlns=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml\"\n" " head\n" " titleAn Example XHTML Filetitle\n" " head\n" "\n" " body\n" " pThe current version of this document is: &version;p\n" "\n" " &para1;\n" " &para2;\n" " &para3;\n" " body\n" "html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:3143 book.translate.xml:3204 +#: book.translate.xml:3126 book.translate.xml:3187 msgid "" "Produce example.html by normalizing example." "xml." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:3146 book.translate.xml:3207 +#: book.translate.xml:3129 book.translate.xml:3190 #, no-wrap msgid "% xmllint --dropdtd --noent example.xml > example.html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:3150 book.translate.xml:3211 +#: book.translate.xml:3133 book.translate.xml:3194 msgid "" "Load example.html into the web browser and confirm that " "the paran.xml files have " "been included in example.html." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title -#: book.translate.xml:3160 +#: book.translate.xml:3143 msgid "Use Parameter Entities to Include Files" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在引用檔使用參數 Entities" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:3163 +#: book.translate.xml:3146 msgid "The previous steps must have completed before this step." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3172 +#: book.translate.xml:3155 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\"\n" "\"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\" [\n" "<!ENTITY % entities SYSTEM \"entities.ent\"> %entities;\n" "]>\n" "\n" "html xmlns=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml\"\n" " head\n" " titleAn Example XHTML Filetitle\n" " head\n" "\n" " body\n" " pThe current version of this document is: &version;p\n" "\n" " &para1;\n" " &para2;\n" " &para3;\n" " body\n" "html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:3193 +#: book.translate.xml:3176 msgid "" "Create a new file called entities.ent with this content:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3197 +#: book.translate.xml:3180 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!ENTITY version \"1.1\">\n" "<!ENTITY para1 SYSTEM \"para1.xml\">\n" "<!ENTITY para2 SYSTEM \"para2.xml\">\n" "<!ENTITY para3 SYSTEM \"para3.xml\">" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:3223 +#: book.translate.xml:3206 msgid "Marked Sections" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已標記小節" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3225 +#: book.translate.xml:3208 msgid "" "XML provides a mechanism to indicate that particular " "pieces of the document should be processed in a special way. These are " "called marked sections." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3231 +#: book.translate.xml:3214 msgid "Structure of a Marked Section" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已標記的結構" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3233 +#: book.translate.xml:3216 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<![KEYWORD[\n" " Contents of marked section\n" "]]>" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3238 +#: book.translate.xml:3221 msgid "" "As expected of an XML construct, a marked section starts " "with <!." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3241 +#: book.translate.xml:3224 msgid "The first square bracket begins the marked section." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3243 +#: book.translate.xml:3226 msgid "" "KEYWORD describes how this marked section is to " "be processed by the parser." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3246 +#: book.translate.xml:3229 msgid "" "The second square bracket indicates the start of the marked section's " "content." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3249 +#: book.translate.xml:3232 msgid "" "The marked section is finished by closing the two square brackets, and then " "returning to the document context from the XML context " "with >." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3255 +#: book.translate.xml:3238 msgid "Marked Section Keywords" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已標記關鍵字" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title -#: book.translate.xml:3258 +#: book.translate.xml:3241 msgid "CDATA" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3260 +#: book.translate.xml:3243 msgid "" "These keywords denote the marked sections content model, and allow you to change it from the default." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3264 +#: book.translate.xml:3247 msgid "" "When an XML parser is processing a document, it keeps " "track of the content model." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3268 +#: book.translate.xml:3251 msgid "" "The content model describes the content the parser is expecting to see and " "what it will do with that content." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3272 +#: book.translate.xml:3255 msgid "The CDATA content model is one of the most useful." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3275 +#: book.translate.xml:3258 msgid "" "CDATA is for Character Data. When the " "parser is in this content model, it expects to see only characters. In this " "model the < and & symbols lose " "their special status, and will be treated as ordinary characters." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:3283 +#: book.translate.xml:3266 msgid "" "When using CDATA in examples of text marked up in " "XML, remember that the content of CDATA is not validated. The included text must be check with other means. " "For example, the content could be written in another document, validated, " "and then pasted into the CDATA section." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3293 +#: book.translate.xml:3276 msgid "Using a CDATA Marked Section" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 CDATA 已標記小節" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3296 +#: book.translate.xml:3279 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraHere is an example of how to include some text that contains\n" " many literal&lt;literal and literal&amp;literal\n" " symbols. The sample text is a fragment of\n" " acronymXHTMLacronym. The surrounding text (para and\n" " programlisting) are from DocBook.para\n" "\n" "programlisting<![CDATA[pThis is a sample that shows some of the\n" " elements within acronymXHTMLacronym. Since the angle\n" " brackets are used so many times, it is simpler to say the whole\n" " example is a CDATA marked section than to use the entity names for\n" " the left and right angle brackets throughout.p\n" "\n" " ul\n" " liThis is a listitemli\n" " liThis is a second listitemli\n" " liThis is a third listitemli\n" " ul\n" "\n" " pThis is the end of the example.p]]>programlisting" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title -#: book.translate.xml:3319 +#: book.translate.xml:3302 msgid "INCLUDE and IGNORE" -msgstr "" +msgstr "INCLUDE 與 IGNORE" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3322 +#: book.translate.xml:3305 msgid "" "When the keyword is INCLUDE, then the contents of the " "marked section will be processed. When the keyword is IGNORE, the marked section is ignored and will not be processed. It will " "not appear in the output." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3329 +#: book.translate.xml:3312 msgid "" "Using INCLUDE and IGNORE in Marked " "Sections" msgstr "" +"在已標記小節中使用 INCLUDE 及 IGNORE" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3332 +#: book.translate.xml:3315 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<![INCLUDE[\n" " This text will be processed and included.\n" "]]>\n" "\n" "<![IGNORE[\n" " This text will not be processed or included.\n" "]]>" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3341 +#: book.translate.xml:3324 msgid "" "By itself, this is not too useful. Text to be removed from the document " "could be cut out, or wrapped in comments." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3345 +#: book.translate.xml:3328 msgid "" "It becomes more useful when controlled by parameter entities, yet this usage is limited to " "entity files." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3350 +#: book.translate.xml:3333 msgid "" "For example, suppose that documentation was produced in a hard-copy version " "and an electronic version. Some extra text is desired in the electronic " "version content that was not to appear in the hard-copy." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3355 +#: book.translate.xml:3338 msgid "" "Create an entity file that defines general entities to include each chapter " "and guard these definitions with a parameter entity that can be set to " "either INCLUDE or IGNORE to control " "whether the entity is defined. After these conditional general entity " "definitions, place one more definition for each general entity to set them " "to an empty value. This technique makes use of the fact that entity " "definitions cannot be overridden but the first definition always takes " "effect. So the inclusion of the chapter is controlled with the corresponding " "parameter entity. Set to INCLUDE, the first general " "entity definition will be read and the second one will be ignored. Set to " "IGNORE, the first definition will be ignored and the " "second one will take effect." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3372 +#: book.translate.xml:3355 msgid "Using a Parameter Entity to Control a Marked Section" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用參數 Entities 來控制已標記小節" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3375 +#: book.translate.xml:3358 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!ENTITY % electronic.copy \"INCLUDE\">\n" "\n" "<![%electronic.copy;[\n" "<!ENTITY chap.preface\tSYSTEM \"preface.xml\">\n" "]]>\n" "\n" "<!ENTITY chap.preface \"\">" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:3383 +#: book.translate.xml:3366 msgid "" "When producing the hard-copy version, change the parameter entity's " "definition to:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3386 +#: book.translate.xml:3369 #, no-wrap msgid "<!ENTITY % electronic.copy \"IGNORE\">" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:3396 +#: book.translate.xml:3379 msgid "Modify entities.ent to contain the following:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3399 +#: book.translate.xml:3382 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!ENTITY version \"1.1\">\n" "<!ENTITY % conditional.text \"IGNORE\">\n" "\n" "<![%conditional.text;[\n" "<!ENTITY para1 SYSTEM \"para1.xml\">\n" "]]>\n" "\n" "<!ENTITY para1 \"\">\n" "\n" "<!ENTITY para2 SYSTEM \"para2.xml\">\n" "<!ENTITY para3 SYSTEM \"para3.xml\">" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:3413 +#: book.translate.xml:3396 msgid "" "Normalize example.xml and notice that the conditional " "text is not present in the output document. Set the parameter entity guard " "to INCLUDE and regenerate the normalized document and the " "text will appear again. This method makes sense if there are more " "conditional chunks depending on the same condition. For example, to control " "generating printed or online text." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:3428 +#: book.translate.xml:3411 msgid "Conclusion" -msgstr "" +msgstr "結論" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3430 +#: book.translate.xml:3413 msgid "" "That is the conclusion of this XML primer. For reasons of " "space and complexity, several things have not been covered in depth (or at " "all). However, the previous sections cover enough XML to " "introduce the organization of the FDP documentation." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title -#: book.translate.xml:3472 +#: book.translate.xml:3455 msgid "XHTML Markup" -msgstr "" +msgstr "XHTML 標籤" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:3475 book.translate.xml:4078 book.translate.xml:7325 +#: book.translate.xml:3458 book.translate.xml:4061 book.translate.xml:7308 msgid "Introduction" -msgstr "" +msgstr "簡介" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3477 +#: book.translate.xml:3460 msgid "" "This chapter describes usage of the XHTML markup language " "used for the FreeBSD web site." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3480 +#: book.translate.xml:3463 msgid "" "XHTML is the XML version of the " "HyperText Markup Language, the markup language of choice on the World Wide " "Web. More information can be found at http://www.w3.org/." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3485 +#: book.translate.xml:3468 msgid "" "XHTML is used to mark up pages on the FreeBSD web site. " "It is usually not used to mark up other documentation, since DocBook offers " "a far richer set of elements from which to choose. Consequently, " "XHTML pages will normally only be encountered when " "writing for the web site." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3492 +#: book.translate.xml:3475 msgid "" "HTML has gone through a number of versions. The " "XML-compliant version described here is called " "XHTML. The latest widespread version is XHTML 1.0, available in both strict and " "transitional variants." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3499 +#: book.translate.xml:3482 msgid "" "The XHTML DTDs are available from the " "Ports Collection in textproc/xhtml. They are " "automatically installed by the textproc/docproj port." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:3505 +#: book.translate.xml:3488 msgid "" "This is not an exhaustive list of elements, since that " "would just repeat the documentation for XHTML. The aim is " "to list those elements most commonly used. Please post questions about " "elements or uses not covered here to the FreeBSD documentation project " "mailing list." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/title -#: book.translate.xml:3513 book.translate.xml:4117 +#: book.translate.xml:3496 book.translate.xml:4100 msgid "Inline Versus Block" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:3515 book.translate.xml:4119 +#: book.translate.xml:3498 book.translate.xml:4102 msgid "" "In the remainder of this document, when describing elements, " "inline means that the element can occur within a block " "element, and does not cause a line break. A block " "element, by comparison, will cause a line break (and other processing) when " "it is encountered." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:3525 +#: book.translate.xml:3508 msgid "Formal Public Identifier (FPI)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "正式公用識別碼 (FPI)" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3527 +#: book.translate.xml:3510 msgid "" "There are a number of XHTML FPIs, " "depending upon the version, or level of XHTML to which a document conforms. Most XHTML " "documents on the FreeBSD web site comply with the transitional version of " "XHTML 1.0." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3534 +#: book.translate.xml:3517 #, no-wrap msgid "PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:3538 +#: book.translate.xml:3521 msgid "Sectional Elements" -msgstr "" +msgstr "分節元素" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3540 +#: book.translate.xml:3523 msgid "" "An XHTML document is normally split into two sections. " "The first section, called the head, contains meta-" "information about the document, such as its title, the name of the author, " "the parent document, and so on. The second section, the body, contains content that will be displayed to the user." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:3548 +#: book.translate.xml:3531 msgid "" "These sections are indicated with head and body " "elements respectively. These elements are contained within the top-level " "html element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3554 +#: book.translate.xml:3537 msgid "Normal XHTML Document Structure" -msgstr "" +msgstr "一般的 XHTML 文件結構" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3557 +#: book.translate.xml:3540 #, no-wrap msgid "" "html xmlns=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml\"\n" " head\n" "\t titleThe Document's Titletitle\n" " head\n" "\n" " body\n" "\n" " …\n" "\n" " body\n" "html" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:3572 book.translate.xml:4717 +#: book.translate.xml:3555 book.translate.xml:4700 msgid "Block Elements" -msgstr "" +msgstr "區塊元素" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3575 +#: book.translate.xml:3558 msgid "Headings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "標題" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3577 +#: book.translate.xml:3560 msgid "" "XHTML has tags to denote headings in the document at up " "to six different levels." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3580 +#: book.translate.xml:3563 msgid "" "The largest and most prominent heading is h1, then h2, " "continuing down to h6." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3584 +#: book.translate.xml:3567 msgid "The element's content is the text of the heading." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3587 +#: book.translate.xml:3570 msgid "h1, h2, and Other Header Tags" -msgstr "" +msgstr "h1, h2, 以及其他標題標籤" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:3590 book.translate.xml:3625 book.translate.xml:3641 -#: book.translate.xml:3686 book.translate.xml:3718 book.translate.xml:3795 -#: book.translate.xml:3823 book.translate.xml:3845 book.translate.xml:3867 -#: book.translate.xml:3923 book.translate.xml:3940 book.translate.xml:3970 -#: book.translate.xml:3995 book.translate.xml:4736 book.translate.xml:4762 -#: book.translate.xml:4843 book.translate.xml:4877 book.translate.xml:4924 -#: book.translate.xml:4984 book.translate.xml:5046 book.translate.xml:5126 -#: book.translate.xml:5260 book.translate.xml:5421 book.translate.xml:5480 -#: book.translate.xml:5507 book.translate.xml:5537 book.translate.xml:5576 -#: book.translate.xml:5684 book.translate.xml:5741 book.translate.xml:5792 -#: book.translate.xml:5911 book.translate.xml:5979 book.translate.xml:6008 -#: book.translate.xml:6029 book.translate.xml:6071 book.translate.xml:6126 -#: book.translate.xml:6159 book.translate.xml:6176 book.translate.xml:6210 -#: book.translate.xml:6234 book.translate.xml:6714 book.translate.xml:6730 +#: book.translate.xml:3573 book.translate.xml:3608 book.translate.xml:3624 +#: book.translate.xml:3669 book.translate.xml:3701 book.translate.xml:3778 +#: book.translate.xml:3806 book.translate.xml:3828 book.translate.xml:3850 +#: book.translate.xml:3906 book.translate.xml:3923 book.translate.xml:3953 +#: book.translate.xml:3978 book.translate.xml:4719 book.translate.xml:4745 +#: book.translate.xml:4826 book.translate.xml:4860 book.translate.xml:4907 +#: book.translate.xml:4967 book.translate.xml:5029 book.translate.xml:5109 +#: book.translate.xml:5243 book.translate.xml:5404 book.translate.xml:5463 +#: book.translate.xml:5490 book.translate.xml:5520 book.translate.xml:5559 +#: book.translate.xml:5667 book.translate.xml:5724 book.translate.xml:5775 +#: book.translate.xml:5894 book.translate.xml:5962 book.translate.xml:5991 +#: book.translate.xml:6012 book.translate.xml:6054 book.translate.xml:6109 +#: book.translate.xml:6142 book.translate.xml:6159 book.translate.xml:6193 +#: book.translate.xml:6217 book.translate.xml:6697 book.translate.xml:6713 msgid "Usage:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "用法：" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3592 +#: book.translate.xml:3575 #, no-wrap msgid "" "h1First sectionh1\n" "\n" "<!-- Document introduction goes here -->\n" "\n" "h2This is the heading for the first sectionh2\n" "\n" "<!-- Content for the first section goes here -->\n" "\n" "h3This is the heading for the first sub-sectionh3\n" "\n" "<!-- Content for the first sub-section goes here -->\n" "\n" "h2This is the heading for the second sectionh2\n" "\n" "<!-- Content for the second section goes here -->" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3609 +#: book.translate.xml:3592 msgid "" "Generally, an XHTML page should have one first level " "heading (h1). This can contain many second level headings " "(h2), which can in turn contain many third level headings. Do not " "leave gaps in the numbering." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3617 book.translate.xml:4720 +#: book.translate.xml:3600 book.translate.xml:4703 msgid "Paragraphs" -msgstr "" +msgstr "段落" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3619 +#: book.translate.xml:3602 msgid "" "XHTML supports a single paragraph element, p." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3623 +#: book.translate.xml:3606 msgid "p Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "p 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3627 +#: book.translate.xml:3610 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pThis is a paragraph. It can contain just about any\n" " other element.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3633 book.translate.xml:4749 +#: book.translate.xml:3616 book.translate.xml:4732 msgid "Block Quotations" -msgstr "" +msgstr "區塊引言" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3635 +#: book.translate.xml:3618 msgid "" "A block quotation is an extended quotation from another document that will " "appear in a separate paragraph." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3639 book.translate.xml:4760 +#: book.translate.xml:3622 book.translate.xml:4743 msgid "blockquote Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "blockquote 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3643 +#: book.translate.xml:3626 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pA small excerpt from the US Constitution:p\n" "\n" "blockquoteWe the People of the United States, in Order to form\n" " a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic\n" " Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the general\n" " Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our\n" " Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the\n" " United States of America.blockquote" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3655 +#: book.translate.xml:3638 msgid "Lists" -msgstr "" +msgstr "清單" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3657 +#: book.translate.xml:3640 msgid "" "XHTML can present the user with three types of lists: " "ordered, unordered, and definition." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3660 +#: book.translate.xml:3643 msgid "" "Entries in an ordered list will be numbered, while entries in an unordered " "list will be preceded by bullet points. Definition lists have two sections " "for each entry. The first section is the term being defined, and the second " "section is the definition." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3666 +#: book.translate.xml:3649 msgid "" "Ordered lists are indicated by the ol element, unordered lists by " "the ul element, and definition lists by the dl element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3671 +#: book.translate.xml:3654 msgid "" "Ordered and unordered lists contain listitems, indicated by the li element. A listitem can contain textual content, or it may be further " "wrapped in one or more p elements." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3676 +#: book.translate.xml:3659 msgid "" "Definition lists contain definition terms (dt) and definition " "descriptions (dd). A definition term can only contain inline " "elements. A definition description can contain other block elements." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3683 +#: book.translate.xml:3666 msgid "ul and ol Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "ul 與 ol 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3688 +#: book.translate.xml:3671 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pAn unordered list. Listitems will probably be\n" " preceded by bullets.p\n" "\n" "ul\n" " liFirst itemli\n" "\n" " liSecond itemli\n" "\n" " liThird itemli\n" "ul\n" "\n" "pAn ordered list, with list items consisting of multiple\n" " paragraphs. Each item (note: not each paragraph) will be\n" " numbered.p\n" "\n" "ol\n" " lipThis is the first item. It only has one paragraph.pli\n" "\n" " lipThis is the first paragraph of the second item.p\n" "\n" " pThis is the second paragraph of the second item.pli\n" "\n" " lipThis is the first and only paragraph of the third\n" " item.pli\n" "ol" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3716 +#: book.translate.xml:3699 msgid "Definition Lists with dl" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 dl 列定義清單" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3720 +#: book.translate.xml:3703 #, no-wrap msgid "" "dl\n" " dtTerm 1dt\n" "\n" " ddpParagraph 1 of definition 1.p\n" "\n" " pParagraph 2 of definition 1.pdd\n" "\n" " dtTerm 2dt\n" "\n" " ddpParagraph 1 of definition 2.pdd\n" "\n" " dtTerm 3dt\n" "\n" " ddpParagraph 1 of definition 3.pdd\n" "dl" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3739 +#: book.translate.xml:3722 msgid "Pre-formatted Text" -msgstr "" +msgstr "已預排文字" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3741 +#: book.translate.xml:3724 msgid "" "Pre-formatted text is shown to the user exactly as it is in the file. Text " "is shown in a fixed font. Multiple spaces and line breaks are shown exactly " "as they are in the file." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3746 +#: book.translate.xml:3729 msgid "Wrap pre-formatted text in the pre element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3750 +#: book.translate.xml:3733 msgid "pre Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "pre 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:3752 +#: book.translate.xml:3735 msgid "" "For example, the pre tags could be used to mark up an email " "message:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3755 +#: book.translate.xml:3738 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pre From: nik@FreeBSD.org\n" " To: freebsd-doc@FreeBSD.org\n" " Subject: New documentation available\n" "\n" " There is a new copy of my primer for contributors to the FreeBSD\n" " Documentation Project available at\n" "\n" " &lt;URL:http://people.FreeBSD.org/~nik/primer/index.html&gt;\n" "\n" " Comments appreciated.\n" "\n" " Npre" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:3768 +#: book.translate.xml:3751 msgid "" "Keep in mind that < and & still " "are recognized as special characters in pre-formatted text. This is why the " "example shown had to use &lt; instead of <" ". For consistency, &gt; was used in place " "of >, too. Watch out for the special characters that " "may appear in text copied from a plain-text source, like an email message or " "program code." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3781 book.translate.xml:5233 +#: book.translate.xml:3764 book.translate.xml:5216 msgid "Tables" -msgstr "" +msgstr "表格" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3783 +#: book.translate.xml:3766 msgid "" "Mark up tabular information using the table element. A table " "consists of one or more table rows (tr), each containing one or " "more cells of table data (td). Each cell can contain other block " "elements, such as paragraphs or lists. It can also contain another table " "(this nesting can repeat indefinitely). If the cell only contains one " "paragraph then the pelement is not needed." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3793 +#: book.translate.xml:3776 msgid "Simple Use of table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "table 的簡單用法" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3797 +#: book.translate.xml:3780 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pThis is a simple 2x2 table.p\n" "\n" "table\n" " tr\n" " tdTop left celltd\n" "\n" " tdTop right celltd\n" " tr\n" "\n" " tr\n" " tdBottom left celltd\n" "\n" " tdBottom right celltd\n" " tr\n" "table" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3814 +#: book.translate.xml:3797 msgid "" "A cell can span multiple rows and columns by adding the rowspan or colspan " "attributes with values for the number of rows or columns to be spanned." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3820 +#: book.translate.xml:3803 msgid "Using rowspan" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 rowspan" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3825 +#: book.translate.xml:3808 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pOne tall thin cell on the left, two short cells next to\n" " it on the right.p\n" "\n" "table\n" " tr\n" " td rowspan=\"2\"Long and thintd\n" " tr\n" "\n" " tr\n" " tdTop celltd\n" "\n" " tdBottom celltd\n" " tr\n" "table" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3842 +#: book.translate.xml:3825 msgid "Using colspan" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 colspan" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3847 +#: book.translate.xml:3830 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pOne long cell on top, two short cells below it.p\n" "\n" "table\n" " tr\n" " td colspan=\"2\"Top celltd\n" " tr\n" "\n" " tr\n" " tdBottom left celltd\n" "\n" " tdBottom right celltd\n" " tr\n" "table" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3863 +#: book.translate.xml:3846 msgid "" "Using rowspan and colspan Together" msgstr "" +"rowspan 與 colspan 一起使用" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3869 +#: book.translate.xml:3852 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pOn a 3x3 grid, the top left block is a 2x2 set of\n" " cells merged into one. The other cells are normal.p\n" "\n" "table\n" " tr\n" " td colspan=\"2\" rowspan=\"2\"Top left large celltd\n" "\n" " tdTop right celltd\n" " tr\n" "\n" " tr\n" " <!-- Because the large cell on the left merges into\n" " this row, the first <td> will occur on its\n" " right -->\n" "\n" " tdMiddle right celltd\n" " tr\n" "\n" " tr\n" " tdBottom left celltd\n" "\n" " tdBottom middle celltd\n" "\n" " tdBottom right celltd\n" " tr\n" "table" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:3900 book.translate.xml:5459 +#: book.translate.xml:3883 book.translate.xml:5442 msgid "In-line Elements" -msgstr "" +msgstr "行內元素" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3903 book.translate.xml:5462 +#: book.translate.xml:3886 book.translate.xml:5445 msgid "Emphasizing Information" -msgstr "" +msgstr "強調資訊" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3905 +#: book.translate.xml:3888 msgid "" "Two levels of emphasis are available in XHTML, em and strong. em is for a normal level of emphasis " "and strong indicates stronger emphasis." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3911 +#: book.translate.xml:3894 msgid "" "em is typically rendered in italic and strong is " "rendered in bold. This is not always the case, and should not be relied " "upon. According to best practices, web pages only hold structural and " "semantical information, and stylesheets are later applied to them. Think of " "semantics, not formatting, when using these tags." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3920 +#: book.translate.xml:3903 msgid "em and strong Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "em 與 strong 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3925 +#: book.translate.xml:3908 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pemThisem has been emphasized, while\n" " strongthisstrong has been strongly emphasized.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3931 +#: book.translate.xml:3914 msgid "Indicating Fixed-Pitch Text" -msgstr "" +msgstr "標示等寬文字" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:3933 +#: book.translate.xml:3916 msgid "" "Content that should be rendered in a fixed pitch (typewriter) typeface is " "tagged with tt (for teletype)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3938 +#: book.translate.xml:3921 msgid "tt Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "tt 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3942 +#: book.translate.xml:3925 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pMany system settings are stored in\n" " tt/etctt.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:3948 book.translate.xml:6552 +#: book.translate.xml:3931 book.translate.xml:6535 msgid "Links" -msgstr "" +msgstr "連結" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:3951 +#: book.translate.xml:3934 msgid "Links are also inline elements." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:3955 book.translate.xml:6647 +#: book.translate.xml:3938 book.translate.xml:6630 msgid "Linking to Other Documents on the Web" -msgstr "" +msgstr "連結在網站上的其他文件" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3957 +#: book.translate.xml:3940 msgid "" "A link points to the URL of a document on the web. The " "link is indicated with a, and the href attribute contains the URL of the target document. " "The content of the element becomes the link, indicated to the user by " "showing it in a different color or with an underline." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3967 +#: book.translate.xml:3950 msgid "Using a href=\"...\"" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 a href=\"...\"" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3972 +#: book.translate.xml:3955 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pMore information is available at the\n" " a href=\"http://www.&os;.org/\"&os; web sitea.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3976 +#: book.translate.xml:3959 msgid "This link always takes the user to the top of the linked document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title -#: book.translate.xml:3981 +#: book.translate.xml:3964 msgid "Linking to Specific Parts of Documents" -msgstr "" +msgstr "連結說明文件的特定章節" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:3983 +#: book.translate.xml:3966 msgid "" "To link to a specific point within a document, that document must include an " "anchor at the desired point. Anchors are included by " "setting the id attribute of an element to a " "name. This example creates an anchor by setting the id attribute of a p element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:3993 +#: book.translate.xml:3976 msgid "Creating an Anchor" -msgstr "" +msgstr "建立錨點" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:3997 +#: book.translate.xml:3980 #, no-wrap msgid "" "p id=\"samplepara\"This paragraph can be referenced\n" " in other links with the name ttsampleparatt.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:4001 +#: book.translate.xml:3984 msgid "" "Links to anchors are similar to plain links, but include a # symbol and the anchor's ID at the end of the " "URL." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4007 +#: book.translate.xml:3990 msgid "Linking to a Named Part of a Different Document" -msgstr "" +msgstr "連結到另一份文件中已命名的段落" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:4010 +#: book.translate.xml:3993 msgid "" "The samplepara example is part of a document called " "foo.html. A link to that specific paragraph in the " "document is constructed in this example." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4015 +#: book.translate.xml:3998 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pMore information can be found in the\n" " a href=\"foo.html#samplepara\"sample paragrapha of\n" " ttfoo.htmltt.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:4020 +#: book.translate.xml:4003 msgid "" "To link to a named anchor within the same document, omit the document's " "URL, and just use the # symbol " "followed by the name of the anchor." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4026 +#: book.translate.xml:4009 msgid "Linking to a Named Part of the Same Document" -msgstr "" +msgstr "連結到同一份文件已命名的段茖" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:4028 +#: book.translate.xml:4011 msgid "" "The samplepara example resides in this document. To link " "to it:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4031 +#: book.translate.xml:4014 #, no-wrap msgid "" "pMore information can be found in the\n" " a href=\"#samplepara\"sample paragrapha of this\n" " document.p" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title -#: book.translate.xml:4075 +#: book.translate.xml:4058 msgid "DocBook Markup" -msgstr "" +msgstr "DocBook 標籤" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4080 +#: book.translate.xml:4063 msgid "" "This chapter is an introduction to DocBook as it is used for FreeBSD " "documentation. DocBook is a large and complex markup system, but the subset " "described here covers the parts that are most widely used for FreeBSD " "documentation. While a moderate subset is covered, it is impossible to " "anticipate every situation. Please post questions that this document does " "not answer to the FreeBSD documentation project mailing list." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: footnote/para -#: book.translate.xml:4091 +#: book.translate.xml:4074 msgid "" "A short history can be found under http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/intro." "shtml#d0e41." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4088 +#: book.translate.xml:4071 msgid "" "DocBook was originally developed by HaL Computer Systems and O'Reilly & " "Associates to be a Document Type Definition (DTD) for " "writing technical documentation <_:footnote-1/>. Since 1998 it is maintained " "by the DocBook Technical Committee. As such, and unlike " "LinuxDoc and XHTML, DocBook is very heavily oriented " "towards markup that describes what something is, rather " "than describing how it should be presented." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4099 +#: book.translate.xml:4082 msgid "" "The DocBook DTD is available from the Ports Collection in " "the textproc/docbook-xml port. It is automatically " "installed as part of the textproc/docproj port." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/title -#: book.translate.xml:4107 +#: book.translate.xml:4090 msgid "Formal Versus Informal" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:4109 +#: book.translate.xml:4092 msgid "" "Some elements may exist in two forms, formal and " "informal. Typically, the formal version of the element " "will consist of a title followed by the informal version of the element. The " "informal version will not have a title." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:4129 +#: book.translate.xml:4112 msgid "FreeBSD Extensions" -msgstr "" +msgstr "FreeBSD 擴充項目" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4131 +#: book.translate.xml:4114 msgid "" "The FreeBSD Documentation Project has extended the DocBook DTD with additional elements and entities. These additions serve to " "make some of the markup easier or more precise." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4136 +#: book.translate.xml:4119 msgid "" "Throughout the rest of this document, the term DocBook is " "used to mean the FreeBSD-extended DocBook DTD." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:4141 +#: book.translate.xml:4124 msgid "" "Most of these extensions are not unique to FreeBSD, it was just felt that " "they were useful enhancements for this particular project. Should anyone " "from any of the other *nix camps (NetBSD, OpenBSD, Linux, …) be interested " "in collaborating on a standard DocBook extension set, please contact " "Documentation Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:4150 +#: book.translate.xml:4133 msgid "FreeBSD Elements" -msgstr "" +msgstr "FreeBSD 元素" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4152 +#: book.translate.xml:4135 msgid "" "The additional FreeBSD elements are not (currently) in the Ports Collection. " "They are stored in the FreeBSD Subversion tree, as head/share/xml/freebsd." "dtd." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4156 +#: book.translate.xml:4139 msgid "" "FreeBSD-specific elements used in the examples below are clearly marked." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:4161 +#: book.translate.xml:4144 msgid "FreeBSD Entities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "FreeBSD Entities" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4163 +#: book.translate.xml:4146 msgid "" "This table shows some of the most useful entities available in the " "FDP. For a complete list, see the *.ent files in doc/share/xml." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4183 +#: book.translate.xml:4166 msgid "FreeBSD Name Entities" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4188 +#: book.translate.xml:4171 msgid "&os;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4189 +#: book.translate.xml:4172 msgid "FreeBSD" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4194 +#: book.translate.xml:4177 msgid "&os.stable;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4195 +#: book.translate.xml:4178 msgid "FreeBSD-STABLE" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4200 +#: book.translate.xml:4183 msgid "&os.current;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4201 +#: book.translate.xml:4184 msgid "FreeBSD-CURRENT" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4212 +#: book.translate.xml:4195 msgid "Manual Page Entities" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4217 +#: book.translate.xml:4200 msgid "&man.ls.1;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4218 +#: book.translate.xml:4201 msgid "" "ls1" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4219 +#: book.translate.xml:4202 msgid "" "Usage: &man.ls.1; is the manual page for <command>ls</" "command>." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4225 +#: book.translate.xml:4208 msgid "&man.cp.1;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4226 +#: book.translate.xml:4209 msgid "" "cp1" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4227 +#: book.translate.xml:4210 msgid "" "Usage: The manual page for <command>cp</command> is " "&man.cp.1;." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4233 +#: book.translate.xml:4216 msgid "" "&man.command." "sectionnumber;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4234 +#: book.translate.xml:4217 msgid "" "link to command manual page in section " "sectionnumber" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4238 +#: book.translate.xml:4221 msgid "" "Entities are defined for all the FreeBSD manual pages." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4250 +#: book.translate.xml:4233 msgid "FreeBSD Mailing List Entities" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4255 +#: book.translate.xml:4238 msgid "&a.doc;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4256 +#: book.translate.xml:4239 msgid "" "FreeBSD documentation project mailing list" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4257 +#: book.translate.xml:4240 msgid "Usage: A link to the &a.doc;." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4262 +#: book.translate.xml:4245 msgid "&a.questions;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4263 +#: book.translate.xml:4246 msgid "" "FreeBSD general questions mailing list" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4264 +#: book.translate.xml:4247 msgid "Usage: A link to the &a.questions;." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4269 +#: book.translate.xml:4252 msgid "&a.listname;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4270 +#: book.translate.xml:4253 msgid "link to listname" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4272 +#: book.translate.xml:4255 msgid "" "Entities are defined for all the FreeBSD " "mailing lists." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4283 +#: book.translate.xml:4266 msgid "FreeBSD Document Link Entities" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4288 +#: book.translate.xml:4271 msgid "&url.books.handbook;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4289 +#: book.translate.xml:4272 msgid "@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4290 +#: book.translate.xml:4273 msgid "" "Usage: A link to the <link xlink:href=\"&url.books.handbook;/" "advanced-networking.html\">Advanced Networking</link> chapter of " "the Handbook." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4297 +#: book.translate.xml:4280 msgid "&url.books.bookname;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4298 +#: book.translate.xml:4281 msgid "" "relative path to bookname" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4300 +#: book.translate.xml:4283 msgid "" "Entities are defined for all the FreeBSD books." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4305 +#: book.translate.xml:4288 msgid "&url.articles.committers-guide;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4306 +#: book.translate.xml:4289 msgid "" "@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/committers-guide" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4307 +#: book.translate.xml:4290 msgid "" "Usage: A link to the <link xlink:href=\"&url.articles." "committers-guide;\">Committer's Guide</link> article." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4314 +#: book.translate.xml:4297 msgid "" "&url.articles.articlename;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4315 +#: book.translate.xml:4298 msgid "" "relative path to articlename" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4317 +#: book.translate.xml:4300 msgid "" "Entities are defined for all the FreeBSD articles." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4328 +#: book.translate.xml:4311 msgid "Other Operating System Name Entities" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4333 +#: book.translate.xml:4316 msgid "&linux;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4334 +#: book.translate.xml:4317 msgid "Linux" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4335 +#: book.translate.xml:4318 msgid "The Linux operating system." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4339 book.translate.xml:8833 +#: book.translate.xml:4322 book.translate.xml:8816 msgid "&unix;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4340 book.translate.xml:8832 +#: book.translate.xml:4323 book.translate.xml:8815 msgid "UNIX" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4341 +#: book.translate.xml:4324 msgid "The UNIX operating system." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4345 +#: book.translate.xml:4328 msgid "&windows;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4346 +#: book.translate.xml:4329 msgid "Windows" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4347 +#: book.translate.xml:4330 msgid "" "The Windows operating system." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4357 +#: book.translate.xml:4340 msgid "Miscellaneous Entities" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4362 +#: book.translate.xml:4345 msgid "&prompt.root;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4364 +#: book.translate.xml:4347 msgid "The root user prompt." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4369 +#: book.translate.xml:4352 msgid "&prompt.user;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4371 +#: book.translate.xml:4354 msgid "A prompt for an unprivileged user." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4375 +#: book.translate.xml:4358 msgid "&postscript;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4376 +#: book.translate.xml:4359 msgid "PostScript" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4377 +#: book.translate.xml:4360 msgid "" "The PostScript programming " "language." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4382 +#: book.translate.xml:4365 msgid "&tex;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4383 +#: book.translate.xml:4366 msgid "TeX" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4384 +#: book.translate.xml:4367 msgid "The TeX typesetting language." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4389 +#: book.translate.xml:4372 msgid "&xorg;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4390 +#: book.translate.xml:4373 msgid "Xorg" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:4391 +#: book.translate.xml:4374 msgid "The Xorg open source X Window System." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:4401 +#: book.translate.xml:4384 msgid "Formal Public Identifier (FPI)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "正式公用識別碼 (FPI)" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4403 +#: book.translate.xml:4386 msgid "" "In compliance with the DocBook guidelines for writing FPIs for DocBook customizations, the FPI for the " "FreeBSD extended DocBook DTD is:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4408 +#: book.translate.xml:4391 #, no-wrap msgid "PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook V4.2-Based Extension//EN\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:4412 +#: book.translate.xml:4395 msgid "Document Structure" -msgstr "" +msgstr "文件結構" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4414 +#: book.translate.xml:4397 msgid "" "DocBook allows structuring documentation in several ways. The FreeBSD " "Documentation Project uses two primary types of DocBook document: the book " "and the article." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4418 +#: book.translate.xml:4401 msgid "" "Books are organized into chapters. This is a mandatory " "requirement. There may be parts between the book and the chapter " "to provide another layer of organization. For example, the Handbook is " "arranged in this way." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4424 +#: book.translate.xml:4407 msgid "" "A chapter may (or may not) contain one or more sections. These are indicated " "with the sect1 element. If a section contains another section " "then use the sect2 element, and so on, up to sect5." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4430 +#: book.translate.xml:4413 msgid "Chapters and sections contain the remainder of the content." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4433 +#: book.translate.xml:4416 msgid "" "An article is simpler than a book, and does not use chapters. Instead, the " "content of an article is organized into one or more sections, using the same " "sect1 (and sect2 and so on) elements that are used in " "books." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4439 +#: book.translate.xml:4422 msgid "" "The nature of the document being written should be used to determine whether " "it is best marked up as a book or an article. Articles are well suited to " "information that does not need to be broken down into several chapters, and " "that is, relatively speaking, quite short, at up to 20-25 pages of content. " "Books are best suited to information that can be broken up into several " "chapters, possibly with appendices and similar content as well." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:4448 +#: book.translate.xml:4431 msgid "" "The FreeBSD tutorials are all marked up as articles, while this document, the FAQ, and the Handbook are all marked up as books, for " "example." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:4455 +#: book.translate.xml:4438 msgid "Starting a Book" -msgstr "" +msgstr "開始撰寫書籍" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4457 +#: book.translate.xml:4440 msgid "" "The content of a book is contained within the book element. As " "well as containing structural markup, this element can contain elements that " "include additional information about the book. This is either meta-" "information, used for reference purposes, or additional content used to " "produce a title page." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4464 book.translate.xml:4519 +#: book.translate.xml:4447 book.translate.xml:4502 msgid "This additional information is contained within info." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4468 +#: book.translate.xml:4451 msgid "Boilerplate book with info" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 info 的 book 樣板" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4474 +#: book.translate.xml:4457 +#, no-wrap msgid "" "book\n" " info\n" " titleYour Title Heretitle\n" "\n" " author\n" " personname\n" " firstnameYour first namefirstname\n" " surnameYour surnamesurname\n" " personname\n" "\n" " affiliation\n" "\taddress\n" " emailYour email addressemail\n" "\taddress\n" " affiliation\n" " author\n" "\n" " copyright\n" " year1998year\n" " holder role=\"mailto:your email address\"Your nameholder\n" " copyright\n" "\n" " releaseinfo$FreeBSD$releaseinfo\n" "\n" " abstract\n" " paraInclude an abstract of the book's contents here.para\n" " abstract\n" " info\n" "\n" " …\n" "\n" "book" msgstr "" -"<!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN\"\n" -"\t\"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd\">\n" -"\n" -"article xmlns=\"http://docbook.org/ns/docbook\"\n" -" xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" version=\"5.0\"\n" -" xml:lang=\"en\"\n" -"\n" -" info\n" -" titleAn Example Articletitle\n" -"\n" -" author\n" -" personname\n" -" firstnameYour first namefirstname\n" -" surnameYour surnamesurname\n" -" personname\n" -"\n" -" affiliation\n" -"\taddress\n" -"\t emailfoo@example.comemail\n" -"\taddress\n" -" affiliation\n" -" author\n" -"\n" -" copyright\n" -" year2000year\n" -" holderCopyright string hereholder\n" -" copyright\n" -"\n" -" abstract\n" -" paraIf your article has an abstract then it should go here。para\n" -" abstract\n" -" info\n" -"\n" -" sect1\n" -" titleMy First Sectiontitle\n" -"\n" -" paraThis is the first section in my article。para\n" -"\n" -" sect2\n" -" titleMy First Sub-Sectiontitle\n" -"\n" -" paraThis is the first sub-section in my article。para\n" -" sect2\n" -" sect1\n" -"article" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:4510 +#: book.translate.xml:4493 msgid "Starting an Article" -msgstr "" +msgstr "開始撰寫文章" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4512 +#: book.translate.xml:4495 msgid "" "The content of the article is contained within the article " "element. As well as containing structural markup, this element can contain " "elements that include additional information about the article. This is " "either meta-information, used for reference purposes, or additional content " "used to produce a title page." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4523 +#: book.translate.xml:4506 msgid "Boilerplate article with info" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 info 的 article 樣板" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4529 +#: book.translate.xml:4512 +#, no-wrap msgid "" "article\n" " info\n" " titleYour title heretitle\n" "\n" " author\n" " personname\n" "\tfirstnameYour first namefirstname\n" "\tsurnameYour surnamesurname\n" " personname\n" "\n" " affiliation\n" "\taddress\n" "\t emailYour email addressemailaddress\n" "\taddress\n" " affiliation\n" " author\n" "\n" " copyright\n" " year1998year\n" " holder role=\"mailto:your email address\"Your nameholder\n" " copyright\n" "\n" " releaseinfo$FreeBSD$releaseinfo\n" "\n" " abstract\n" " paraInclude an abstract of the article's contents here.para\n" " abstract\n" " info\n" "\n" " …\n" "\n" "article" msgstr "" -"<!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN\"\n" -"\t\"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd\">\n" -"\n" -"article xmlns=\"http://docbook.org/ns/docbook\"\n" -" xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" version=\"5.0\"\n" -" xml:lang=\"en\"\n" -"\n" -" info\n" -" titleAn Example Articletitle\n" -"\n" -" author\n" -" personname\n" -" firstnameYour first namefirstname\n" -" surnameYour surnamesurname\n" -" personname\n" -"\n" -" affiliation\n" -"\taddress\n" -"\t emailfoo@example.comemail\n" -"\taddress\n" -" affiliation\n" -" author\n" -"\n" -" copyright\n" -" year2000year\n" -" holderCopyright string hereholder\n" -" copyright\n" -"\n" -" abstract\n" -" paraIf your article has an abstract then it should go here。para\n" -" abstract\n" -" info\n" -"\n" -" sect1\n" -" titleMy First Sectiontitle\n" -"\n" -" paraThis is the first section in my article。para\n" -"\n" -" sect2\n" -" titleMy First Sub-Sectiontitle\n" -"\n" -" paraThis is the first sub-section in my article。para\n" -" sect2\n" -" sect1\n" -"article" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:4565 +#: book.translate.xml:4548 msgid "Indicating Chapters" -msgstr "" +msgstr "標示章節" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4567 +#: book.translate.xml:4550 msgid "" "Use chapter to mark up your chapters. Each chapter has a " "mandatory title. Articles do not contain chapters, they are " "reserved for books." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4573 +#: book.translate.xml:4556 msgid "A Simple Chapter" -msgstr "" +msgstr "簡單的章節" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4575 +#: book.translate.xml:4558 #, no-wrap msgid "" "chapter\n" " titleThe Chapter's Titletitle\n" "\n" " ...\n" "chapter" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4582 +#: book.translate.xml:4565 msgid "" "A chapter cannot be empty; it must contain elements in addition to " "title. If you need to include an empty chapter then just use an " "empty paragraph." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4588 +#: book.translate.xml:4571 msgid "Empty Chapters" -msgstr "" +msgstr "空白章節" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4590 +#: book.translate.xml:4573 #, no-wrap msgid "" "chapter\n" " titleThis is An Empty Chaptertitle\n" "\n" " parapara\n" "chapter" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:4599 +#: book.translate.xml:4582 msgid "Sections Below Chapters" -msgstr "" +msgstr "章底下的小節" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4601 +#: book.translate.xml:4584 msgid "" "In books, chapters may (but do not need to) be broken up into sections, " "subsections, and so on. In articles, sections are the main structural " "element, and each article must contain at least one section. Use the " "sectn element. The n indicates the section number, which identifies the section " "level." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4609 +#: book.translate.xml:4592 msgid "" "The first sectn is sect1. " "You can have one or more of these in a chapter. They can contain one or more " "sect2 elements, and so on, down to sect5." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4617 +#: book.translate.xml:4600 msgid "Sections in Chapters" -msgstr "" +msgstr "章中的小節" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4619 +#: book.translate.xml:4602 #, no-wrap msgid "" "chapter\n" " titleA Sample Chaptertitle\n" "\n" " paraSome text in the chapter.para\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " titleFirst Sectiontitle\n" "\n" " …\n" " sect1\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " titleSecond Sectiontitle\n" "\n" " sect2\n" " titleFirst Sub-Sectiontitle\n" "\n" " sect3\n" "\ttitleFirst Sub-Sub-Sectiontitle\n" "\n" "\t…\n" " sect3\n" " sect2\n" "\n" " sect2\n" " titleSecond Sub-Section (1.2.2)title\n" "\n" " …\n" " sect2\n" " sect1\n" "chapter" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:4653 +#: book.translate.xml:4636 msgid "" "Section numbers are automatically generated and prepended to titles when the " "document is rendered to an output format. The generated section numbers and " "titles from the example above will be:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4660 +#: book.translate.xml:4643 msgid "1.1. First Section" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4664 +#: book.translate.xml:4647 msgid "1.2. Second Section" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4668 +#: book.translate.xml:4651 msgid "1.2.1. First Sub-Section" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4672 +#: book.translate.xml:4655 msgid "1.2.1.1. First Sub-Sub-Section" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4676 +#: book.translate.xml:4659 msgid "1.2.2. Second Sub-Section" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:4683 +#: book.translate.xml:4666 msgid "Subdividing Using part Elements" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 part 元素來分部" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4686 +#: book.translate.xml:4669 msgid "" "parts introduce another level of organization between book and chapter with one or more parts. This cannot " "be done in an article." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4692 +#: book.translate.xml:4675 #, no-wrap msgid "" "part\n" " titleIntroductiontitle\n" "\n" " chapter\n" " titleOverviewtitle\n" "\n" " ...\n" " chapter\n" "\n" " chapter\n" " titleWhat is FreeBSD?title\n" "\n" " ...\n" " chapter\n" "\n" " chapter\n" " titleHistorytitle\n" "\n" " ...\n" " chapter\n" "part" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4722 +#: book.translate.xml:4705 msgid "" "DocBook supports three types of paragraphs: formalpara, " "para, and simpara." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4726 +#: book.translate.xml:4709 msgid "" "Almost all paragraphs in FreeBSD documentation use para. " "formalpara includes a title element, and simpara disallows some elements from within para. Stick with " "para." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4734 +#: book.translate.xml:4717 msgid "para Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "para 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4738 +#: book.translate.xml:4721 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraThis is a paragraph. It can contain just about any\n" " other element.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4741 book.translate.xml:4779 book.translate.xml:4856 -#: book.translate.xml:4887 book.translate.xml:4946 book.translate.xml:5008 -#: book.translate.xml:5076 book.translate.xml:5143 book.translate.xml:5201 -#: book.translate.xml:5285 book.translate.xml:5325 book.translate.xml:5434 -#: book.translate.xml:5486 book.translate.xml:5515 book.translate.xml:5543 -#: book.translate.xml:5591 book.translate.xml:5703 book.translate.xml:5753 -#: book.translate.xml:5800 book.translate.xml:5937 book.translate.xml:5985 -#: book.translate.xml:6014 book.translate.xml:6035 book.translate.xml:6087 -#: book.translate.xml:6133 book.translate.xml:6163 book.translate.xml:6186 -#: book.translate.xml:6216 book.translate.xml:6238 book.translate.xml:6690 -#: book.translate.xml:6704 book.translate.xml:6719 book.translate.xml:6737 +#: book.translate.xml:4724 book.translate.xml:4762 book.translate.xml:4839 +#: book.translate.xml:4870 book.translate.xml:4929 book.translate.xml:4991 +#: book.translate.xml:5059 book.translate.xml:5126 book.translate.xml:5184 +#: book.translate.xml:5268 book.translate.xml:5308 book.translate.xml:5417 +#: book.translate.xml:5469 book.translate.xml:5498 book.translate.xml:5526 +#: book.translate.xml:5574 book.translate.xml:5686 book.translate.xml:5736 +#: book.translate.xml:5783 book.translate.xml:5920 book.translate.xml:5968 +#: book.translate.xml:5997 book.translate.xml:6018 book.translate.xml:6070 +#: book.translate.xml:6116 book.translate.xml:6146 book.translate.xml:6169 +#: book.translate.xml:6199 book.translate.xml:6221 book.translate.xml:6673 +#: book.translate.xml:6687 book.translate.xml:6702 book.translate.xml:6720 msgid "Appearance:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "輸出結果：" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:4743 +#: book.translate.xml:4726 msgid "This is a paragraph. It can contain just about any other element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4751 +#: book.translate.xml:4734 msgid "" "A block quotation is an extended quotation from another document that should " "not appear within the current paragraph. These are rarely needed." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4755 +#: book.translate.xml:4738 msgid "" "Blockquotes can optionally contain a title and an attribution (or they can " "be left untitled and unattributed)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4764 +#: book.translate.xml:4747 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraA small excerpt from the US Constitution:para\n" "\n" "blockquote\n" " titlePreamble to the Constitution of the United Statestitle\n" "\n" " attributionCopied from a web site somewhereattribution\n" "\n" " paraWe the People of the United States, in Order to form a more\n" " perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility,\n" " provide for the common defence, promote the general Welfare, and\n" " secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our Posterity, do\n" " ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of\n" " America.para\n" "blockquote" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:4781 +#: book.translate.xml:4764 msgid "A small excerpt from the US Constitution:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: blockquote/title -#: book.translate.xml:4784 +#: book.translate.xml:4767 msgid "Preamble to the Constitution of the United States" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: blockquote/attribution -#: book.translate.xml:4787 +#: book.translate.xml:4770 msgid "Copied from a web site somewhere" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: blockquote/para -#: book.translate.xml:4790 +#: book.translate.xml:4773 msgid "" "We the People of the United States, in Order to form a more perfect Union, " "establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility, provide for the common " "defence, promote the general Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to " "ourselves and our Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for " "the United States of America." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:4802 +#: book.translate.xml:4785 msgid "Tips, Notes, Warnings, Cautions, and Important Information" -msgstr "" +msgstr "提示、注意、警告、注意事項及重要資訊" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4805 +#: book.translate.xml:4788 msgid "" "Extra information may need to be separated from the main body of the text. " "Typically this is meta information of which the user should " "be aware." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4810 +#: book.translate.xml:4793 msgid "" "Several types of admonitions are available: tip, note, " "warning, caution, and important." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4815 +#: book.translate.xml:4798 msgid "" "Which admonition to choose depends on the situation. The DocBook " "documentation suggests:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4821 +#: book.translate.xml:4804 msgid "Note is for information that should be heeded by all readers." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4826 +#: book.translate.xml:4809 msgid "Important is a variation on Note." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4830 +#: book.translate.xml:4813 msgid "" "Caution is for information regarding possible data loss or software damage." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4835 +#: book.translate.xml:4818 msgid "" "Warning is for information regarding possible hardware damage or injury to " "life or limb." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4841 +#: book.translate.xml:4824 msgid "tip and important Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "tip 與 important 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4845 +#: book.translate.xml:4828 #, no-wrap msgid "" "tip\n" " para&os; may reduce stress.para\n" "tip\n" "\n" "important\n" " paraPlease use admonitions sparingly. Too many admonitions\n" " are visually jarring and can have the opposite of the\n" " intended effect.para\n" "important" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: tip/para -#: book.translate.xml:4859 +#: book.translate.xml:4842 msgid "FreeBSD may reduce stress." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: important/para -#: book.translate.xml:4863 +#: book.translate.xml:4846 msgid "" "Please use admonitions sparingly. Too many admonitions are visually jarring " "and can have the opposite of the intended effect." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4872 +#: book.translate.xml:4855 msgid "Examples can be shown with example." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4875 +#: book.translate.xml:4858 msgid "example Source" -msgstr "" +msgstr "example 原始碼" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4879 +#: book.translate.xml:4862 #, no-wrap msgid "" "example\n" " paraEmpty files can be created easily:para\n" "\n" " screen&prompt.user; userinputtouch file1 file2 file3userinputscreen\n" "example" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4890 +#: book.translate.xml:4873 msgid "Rendered example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "example 的結果" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:4892 +#: book.translate.xml:4875 msgid "Empty files can be created easily:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/screen -#: book.translate.xml:4894 +#: book.translate.xml:4877 #, no-wrap msgid "% touch file1 file2 file3" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:4899 +#: book.translate.xml:4882 msgid "Lists and Procedures" -msgstr "" +msgstr "清單與步驟" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4901 +#: book.translate.xml:4884 msgid "" "Information often needs to be presented as lists, or as a number of steps " "that must be carried out in order to accomplish a particular goal." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4905 +#: book.translate.xml:4888 msgid "" "To do this, use itemizedlist, orderedlist, " "variablelist, or procedure. There are other types of " "list elements in DocBook, but we will not cover them here." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4910 +#: book.translate.xml:4893 msgid "" "itemizedlist and orderedlist are similar to their " "counterparts in HTML, ul and ol. " "Each one consists of one or more listitem elements, and each " "listitem contains one or more block elements. The listitem elements are analogous to HTML's li tags. " "However, unlike HTML, they are required." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4921 +#: book.translate.xml:4904 msgid "itemizedlist and orderedlist Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "itemizedlist 與 orderedlist 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4926 +#: book.translate.xml:4909 #, no-wrap msgid "" "itemizedlist\n" " listitem\n" " paraThis is the first itemized item.para\n" " listitem\n" "\n" " listitem\n" " paraThis is the second itemized item.para\n" " listitem\n" "itemizedlist\n" "\n" "orderedlist\n" " listitem\n" " paraThis is the first ordered item.para\n" " listitem\n" "\n" " listitem\n" " paraThis is the second ordered item.para\n" " listitem\n" "orderedlist" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4950 +#: book.translate.xml:4933 msgid "This is the first itemized item." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4954 +#: book.translate.xml:4937 msgid "This is the second itemized item." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4960 +#: book.translate.xml:4943 msgid "This is the first ordered item." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:4964 +#: book.translate.xml:4947 msgid "This is the second ordered item." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #. (itstool) id: book.translate.xml#docbook-markup-varlist -#: book.translate.xml:4969 +#: book.translate.xml:4952 msgid "" "An alternate and often useful way of presenting information is the " "variablelist. These are lists where each entry has a term and a " "description. They are well suited for many types of descriptions, and " "present information in a form that is often easier for the reader than " "sections and subsections." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:4977 +#: book.translate.xml:4960 msgid "" "A variablelist has a title, and then pairs of " "term and listitem entries." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:4982 +#: book.translate.xml:4965 msgid "variablelist Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "variablelist 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:4986 +#: book.translate.xml:4969 #, no-wrap msgid "" "variablelist\n" " varlistentry\n" " termParallelterm\n" "\n" " listitem\n" " paraIn parallel communications, groups of bits arrive\n" "\tat the same time over multiple communications\n" "\tchannels.para\n" " listitem\n" " varlistentry\n" "\n" " varlistentry\n" " termSerialterm\n" "\n" " listitem\n" " paraIn serial communications, bits arrive one at a\n" "\ttime over a single communications\n" "\tchannel.para\n" " listitem\n" " varlistentry\n" "variablelist" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5012 +#: book.translate.xml:4995 msgid "Parallel" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5015 +#: book.translate.xml:4998 msgid "" "In parallel communications, groups of bits arrive at the same time over " "multiple communications channels." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5022 +#: book.translate.xml:5005 msgid "Serial" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5025 +#: book.translate.xml:5008 msgid "" "In serial communications, bits arrive one at a time over a single " "communications channel." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5032 +#: book.translate.xml:5015 msgid "" "A procedure shows a series of steps, which may in turn " "consist of more steps or substeps. Each step contains block elements and may include an optional title." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5038 +#: book.translate.xml:5021 msgid "" "Sometimes, steps are not sequential, but present a choice: do " "this or do that, but not both. For " "these alternative choices, use stepalternatives." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5044 +#: book.translate.xml:5027 msgid "procedure Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "procedure 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5048 +#: book.translate.xml:5031 #, no-wrap msgid "" "procedure\n" " step\n" " paraDo this.para\n" " step\n" "\n" " step\n" " paraThen do this.para\n" " step\n" "\n" " step\n" " paraAnd now do this.para\n" " step\n" "\n" " step\n" " paraFinally, do one of these.para\n" "\n" " stepalternatives\n" " step\n" "\tparaGo left.para\n" " step\n" "\n" " step\n" "\tparaGo right.para\n" " step\n" " stepalternatives\n" " step\n" "procedure" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:5080 +#: book.translate.xml:5063 msgid "Do this." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:5084 +#: book.translate.xml:5067 msgid "Then do this." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:5088 +#: book.translate.xml:5071 msgid "And now do this." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:5092 +#: book.translate.xml:5075 msgid "Finally, do one of these:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:5096 +#: book.translate.xml:5079 msgid "Go left." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:5100 +#: book.translate.xml:5083 msgid "Go right." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5109 +#: book.translate.xml:5092 msgid "Showing File Samples" -msgstr "" +msgstr "顯示檔案範本" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5111 +#: book.translate.xml:5094 msgid "" "Fragments of a file (or perhaps a complete file) are shown by wrapping them " "in the programlisting element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5115 +#: book.translate.xml:5098 msgid "" "White space and line breaks within programlisting are significant. In particular, this means that the opening tag should " "appear on the same line as the first line of the output, and the closing tag " "should appear on the same line as the last line of the output, otherwise " "spurious blank lines may be included." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5124 +#: book.translate.xml:5107 msgid "programlisting Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "programlisting 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5128 +#: book.translate.xml:5111 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraWhen finished, the program will look like\n" " this:para\n" "\n" "programlisting#include &lt;stdio.h&gt;\n" "\n" "int\n" "main(void)\n" "{\n" " printf(\"hello, world\\n\");\n" "}programlisting" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5139 +#: book.translate.xml:5122 msgid "" "Notice how the angle brackets in the #include line need " "to be referenced by their entities instead of being included literally." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5145 book.translate.xml:5203 +#: book.translate.xml:5128 book.translate.xml:5186 msgid "When finished, the program will look like this:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5147 +#: book.translate.xml:5130 #, no-wrap msgid "" "#include <stdio.h>\n" "\n" "int\n" "main(void)\n" "{\n" " printf(\"hello, world\\n\");\n" "}" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5158 +#: book.translate.xml:5141 msgid "Callouts" -msgstr "" +msgstr "標註" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5160 +#: book.translate.xml:5143 msgid "" "A callout is a visual marker for referring to a piece of text or specific " "position within an example." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5164 +#: book.translate.xml:5147 msgid "" "Callouts are marked with the co element. Each element must have a " "unique id assigned to it. After the example, include a " "calloutlist that describes each callout." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5171 +#: book.translate.xml:5154 msgid "co and calloutlist Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "co 與 calloutlist 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5174 +#: book.translate.xml:5157 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraWhen finished, the program will look like\n" " this:para\n" "\n" "programlisting#include &lt;stdio.h&gt; co xml:id=\"co-ex-include\"\n" "\n" "int co xml:id=\"co-ex-return\"\n" "main(void)\n" "{\n" " printf(\"hello, world\\n\"); co xml:id=\"co-ex-printf\"\n" "}programlisting\n" "\n" "calloutlist\n" " callout arearefs=\"co-ex-include\"\n" " paraIncludes the standard IO header file.para\n" " callout\n" "\n" " callout arearefs=\"co-ex-return\"\n" " paraSpecifies that functionmain()function returns an\n" " int.para\n" " callout\n" "\n" " callout arearefs=\"co-ex-printf\"\n" " paraThe functionprintf()function call that writes\n" " literalhello, worldliteral to standard output.para\n" " callout\n" "calloutlist" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5205 +#: book.translate.xml:5188 #, no-wrap msgid "" "#include <stdio.h> \n" "\n" "int \n" "main(void)\n" "{\n" " printf(\"hello, world\\n\"); \n" "}" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: callout/para -#: book.translate.xml:5215 +#: book.translate.xml:5198 msgid "Includes the standard IO header file." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: callout/para -#: book.translate.xml:5219 +#: book.translate.xml:5202 msgid "Specifies that main() returns an int." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: callout/para -#: book.translate.xml:5224 +#: book.translate.xml:5207 msgid "" "The printf() call that writes hello, world to standard output." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5235 +#: book.translate.xml:5218 msgid "" "Unlike HTML, DocBook does not need tables for layout " "purposes, as the stylesheet handles those issues. Instead, just use tables " "for marking up tabular data." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5240 +#: book.translate.xml:5223 msgid "" "In general terms (and see the DocBook documentation for more detail) a table " "(which can be either formal or informal) consists of a table " "element. This contains at least one tgroup element, which " "specifies (as an attribute) the number of columns in this table group. " "Within the tablegroup there is one thead element, which contains " "elements for the table headings (column headings), and one tbody " "which contains the body of the table." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5251 +#: book.translate.xml:5234 msgid "" "Both tgroup and thead contain row elements, " "which in turn contain entry elements. Each entry " "element specifies one cell in the table." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5258 +#: book.translate.xml:5241 msgid "informaltable Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "informaltable 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5262 +#: book.translate.xml:5245 #, no-wrap msgid "" "informaltable pgwide=\"1\"\n" " tgroup cols=\"2\"\n" " thead\n" " row\n" " entryThis is Column Head 1entry\n" " entryThis is Column Head 2entry\n" " row\n" " thead\n" "\n" " tbody\n" " row\n" "\tentryRow 1, column 1entry\n" "\tentryRow 1, column 2entry\n" " row\n" "\n" " row\n" "\tentryRow 2, column 1entry\n" "\tentryRow 2, column 2entry\n" " row\n" " tbody\n" " tgroup\n" "informaltable" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:5291 book.translate.xml:5331 +#: book.translate.xml:5274 book.translate.xml:5314 msgid "This is Column Head 1" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:5292 book.translate.xml:5332 +#: book.translate.xml:5275 book.translate.xml:5315 msgid "This is Column Head 2" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:5298 book.translate.xml:5338 +#: book.translate.xml:5281 book.translate.xml:5321 msgid "Row 1, column 1" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:5299 book.translate.xml:5339 +#: book.translate.xml:5282 book.translate.xml:5322 msgid "Row 1, column 2" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:5303 book.translate.xml:5343 +#: book.translate.xml:5286 book.translate.xml:5326 msgid "Row 2, column 1" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:5304 book.translate.xml:5344 +#: book.translate.xml:5287 book.translate.xml:5327 msgid "Row 2, column 2" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5311 +#: book.translate.xml:5294 msgid "" "Always use the pgwide attribute with a value of " "1 with the informaltable element. A bug in " "Internet Explorer can cause the table to render incorrectly if this is " "omitted." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5317 +#: book.translate.xml:5300 msgid "" "Table borders can be suppressed by setting the frame " "attribute to none in the informaltable " "element. For example, informaltable frame=\"none\"." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5323 +#: book.translate.xml:5306 msgid "Table with frame=\"none\" Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "表格使用 frame=\"none\" 範例" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5353 +#: book.translate.xml:5336 msgid "Examples for the User to Follow" -msgstr "" +msgstr "給使用者遵循的範例" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5355 +#: book.translate.xml:5338 msgid "" "Examples for the user to follow are often necessary. Typically, these will " "consist of dialogs with the computer; the user types in a command, the user " "gets a response back, the user types another command, and so on." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5360 +#: book.translate.xml:5343 msgid "A number of distinct elements and entities come into play here." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5365 +#: book.translate.xml:5348 msgid "screen" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5368 +#: book.translate.xml:5351 msgid "" "Everything the user sees in this example will be on the computer screen, so " "the next element is screen." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5372 +#: book.translate.xml:5355 msgid "Within screen, white space is significant." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5378 +#: book.translate.xml:5361 msgid "" "prompt, &prompt.root; and &" "prompt.user;" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5383 +#: book.translate.xml:5366 msgid "" "Some of the things the user will be seeing on the screen are prompts from " "the computer (either from the operating system, command shell, or " "application). These should be marked up using prompt." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5389 +#: book.translate.xml:5372 msgid "" "As a special case, the two shell prompts for the normal user and the root " "user have been provided as entities. To indicate the user is at a shell " "prompt, use one of &prompt.root; and &" "prompt.user; as necessary. They do not need to be inside " "prompt." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:5398 +#: book.translate.xml:5381 msgid "" "&prompt.root; and &prompt.user; are FreeBSD extensions to DocBook, and are not part of the original " "DTD." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5407 +#: book.translate.xml:5390 msgid "userinput" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5410 +#: book.translate.xml:5393 msgid "" "When displaying text that the user should type in, wrap it in " "userinput tags. It will be displayed differently than system " "output text." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5418 +#: book.translate.xml:5401 msgid "screen, prompt, and userinput Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "screen, prompt 與 userinput 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5423 +#: book.translate.xml:5406 #, no-wrap msgid "" "screen&prompt.user; userinputls -1userinput\n" "foo1\n" "foo2\n" "foo3\n" "&prompt.user; userinputls -1 | grep foo2userinput\n" "foo2\n" "&prompt.user; userinputsuuserinput\n" "promptPassword: prompt\n" "&prompt.root; userinputcat foo2userinput\n" "This is the file called 'foo2'screen" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/screen -#: book.translate.xml:5436 +#: book.translate.xml:5419 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% ls -1\n" "foo1\n" "foo2\n" "foo3\n" "% ls -1 | grep foo2\n" "foo2\n" "% su\n" "Password: \n" "# cat foo2\n" "This is the file called 'foo2'" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:5449 +#: book.translate.xml:5432 msgid "" "Even though we are displaying the contents of the file foo2, it is not marked up as programlisting. Reserve programlisting for showing fragments of files " "outside the context of user actions." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5464 +#: book.translate.xml:5447 msgid "" "To emphasize a particular word or phrase, use emphasis. This may " "be presented as italic, or bold, or might be spoken differently with a text-" "to-speech system." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5469 +#: book.translate.xml:5452 msgid "" "There is no way to change the presentation of the emphasis within the " "document, no equivalent of HTML's b and " "i. If the information being presented is important, then consider " "presenting it in important rather than emphasis." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5478 +#: book.translate.xml:5461 msgid "emphasis Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "emphasis 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5482 +#: book.translate.xml:5465 #, no-wrap msgid "" "para&os; is without doubt emphasistheemphasis\n" " premiere &unix;-like operating system for the Intel\n" " architecture.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5488 +#: book.translate.xml:5471 msgid "" "FreeBSD is without doubt the premiere UNIX-like operating system for the Intel " "architecture." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5495 book.translate.xml:8529 +#: book.translate.xml:5478 book.translate.xml:8512 msgid "Acronyms" -msgstr "" +msgstr "縮寫" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5497 +#: book.translate.xml:5480 msgid "" "Many computer terms are acronyms, words formed from the " "first letter of each word in a phrase. Acronyms are marked up into " "acronym elements. It is helpful to the reader when an acronym is " "defined on the first use, as shown in the example below." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5505 +#: book.translate.xml:5488 msgid "acronym Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "acronym 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5509 +#: book.translate.xml:5492 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraRequest For Comments (acronymRFCacronym) 1149\n" " defined the use of avian carriers for transmission of\n" " Internet Protocol (acronymIPacronym) data. The\n" " quantity of acronymIPacronym data currently\n" " transmitted in that manner is unknown.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5517 +#: book.translate.xml:5500 msgid "" "Request For Comments (RFC) 1149 defined the use of avian " "carriers for transmission of Internet Protocol (IP) data. " "The quantity of IP data currently transmitted in that " "manner is unknown." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5526 +#: book.translate.xml:5509 msgid "Quotations" -msgstr "" +msgstr "引言" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5528 +#: book.translate.xml:5511 msgid "" "To quote text from another document or source, or to denote a phrase that is " "used figuratively, use quote. Most of the markup tags available " "for normal text are also available from within a quote." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5535 +#: book.translate.xml:5518 msgid "quote Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "quote 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5539 +#: book.translate.xml:5522 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraHowever, make sure that the search does not go beyond the\n" " quoteboundary between local and public administrationquote,\n" " as acronymRFCacronym 1535 calls it.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5545 +#: book.translate.xml:5528 msgid "" "However, make sure that the search does not go beyond the boundary " "between local and public administration, as RFC " "1535 calls it." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5553 +#: book.translate.xml:5536 msgid "Keys, Mouse Buttons, and Combinations" -msgstr "" +msgstr "鍵盤按鍵、滑鼠按鍵及組合鍵" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5555 +#: book.translate.xml:5538 msgid "" "To refer to a specific key on the keyboard, use keycap. To refer " "to a mouse button, use mousebutton. And to refer to combinations " "of key presses or mouse clicks, wrap them all in keycombo." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5561 +#: book.translate.xml:5544 msgid "" "keycombo has an attribute called action, which " "may be one of click, double-click, " "other, press, seq, " "or simul. The last two values denote whether the keys or " "buttons should be pressed in sequence, or simultaneously." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5569 +#: book.translate.xml:5552 msgid "" "The stylesheets automatically add any connecting symbols, such as " "+, between the key names, when wrapped in keycombo." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5574 +#: book.translate.xml:5557 msgid "Keys, Mouse Buttons, and Combinations Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "鍵盤按鍵、滑鼠案件及組合鍵範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5578 +#: book.translate.xml:5561 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraTo switch to the second virtual terminal, press\n" " keycombo action=\"simul\"keycapAltkeycap\n" " keycapF1keycapkeycombo.para\n" "\n" "paraTo exit commandvicommand without saving changes, type\n" " keycombo action=\"seq\"keycapEsckeycapkeycap:keycap\n" " keycapqkeycapkeycap!keycapkeycombo.para\n" "\n" "paraMy window manager is configured so that\n" " keycombo action=\"simul\"keycapAltkeycap\n" " mousebuttonrightmousebutton\n" " keycombo mouse button is used to move windows.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5593 +#: book.translate.xml:5576 msgid "" "To switch to the second virtual terminal, press Alt F1." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5597 +#: book.translate.xml:5580 msgid "" "To exit vi without saving changes, type Esc : q !" "." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5604 +#: book.translate.xml:5587 msgid "" "My window manager is configured so that " "Alt right mouse " "button is used to move windows." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5613 +#: book.translate.xml:5596 msgid "Applications, Commands, Options, and Cites" -msgstr "" +msgstr "應用程式、指令、選項與引用" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5615 +#: book.translate.xml:5598 msgid "" "Both applications and commands are frequently referred to when writing " "documentation. The distinction between them is that an application is the " "name of a program or suite of programs that fulfill a particular task. A " "command is the filename of a program that the user can type and run at a " "command line." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5622 +#: book.translate.xml:5605 msgid "" "It is often necessary to show some of the options that a command might take." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5625 +#: book.translate.xml:5608 msgid "" "Finally, it is often useful to list a command with its manual section " "number, in the command(number) format so common in Unix " "manuals." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5629 +#: book.translate.xml:5612 msgid "Mark up application names with application." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5632 +#: book.translate.xml:5615 msgid "" "To list a command with its manual section number (which should be most of " "the time) the DocBook element is citerefentry. This will contain " "a further two elements, refentrytitle and manvolnum. " "The content of refentrytitle is the name of the command, and the " "content of manvolnum is the manual page section." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5642 +#: book.translate.xml:5625 msgid "" "This can be cumbersome to write, and so a series of general entities have been created to make " "this easier. Each entity takes the form &man." "manual-page.manual-section;." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5648 +#: book.translate.xml:5631 msgid "" "The file that contains these entities is in doc/share/xml/man-refs." "ent, and can be referred to using this FPI:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5652 +#: book.translate.xml:5635 #, no-wrap msgid "PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//ENTITIES DocBook Manual Page Entities//EN\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5654 +#: book.translate.xml:5637 msgid "" "Therefore, the introduction to FreeBSD documentation will usually include " "this:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5657 +#: book.translate.xml:5640 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook V4.1-Based Extension//EN\" [\n" "\n" "<!ENTITY % man PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//ENTITIES DocBook Manual Page Entities//EN\">\n" "%man;\n" "\n" "…\n" "\n" "]>" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5666 +#: book.translate.xml:5649 msgid "" "Use command to include a command name in-line but " "present it as something the user should type." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5670 +#: book.translate.xml:5653 msgid "" "Use option to mark up the options which will be passed to a " "command." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5673 +#: book.translate.xml:5656 msgid "" "When referring to the same command multiple times in close proximity, it is " "preferred to use the &man.command." "section; notation to markup the first " "reference and use command to markup subsequent references. This " "makes the generated output, especially HTML, appear " "visually better." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5682 +#: book.translate.xml:5665 msgid "Applications, Commands, and Options Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "應用程式、指令、選項範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5686 +#: book.translate.xml:5669 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraapplicationSendmailapplication is the most\n" " widely used Unix mail application.para\n" "\n" "paraapplicationSendmailapplication includes the\n" " citerefentry\n" " refentrytitlesendmailrefentrytitle\n" " manvolnum8manvolnum\n" " citerefentry, &man.mailq.1;, and &man.newaliases.1;\n" " programs.para\n" "\n" "paraOne of the command line parameters to citerefentry\n" " refentrytitlesendmailrefentrytitle\n" " manvolnum8manvolnum\n" " citerefentry, option-bpoption, will display the current\n" " status of messages in the mail queue. Check this on the command\n" " line by running commandsendmail -bpcommand.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5705 +#: book.translate.xml:5688 msgid "" "Sendmail is the most widely used Unix mail " "application." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5708 +#: book.translate.xml:5691 msgid "" "Sendmail includes the " "sendmail 8 , mailq1, and " "newaliases1 programs." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5715 +#: book.translate.xml:5698 msgid "" "One of the command line parameters to " "sendmail 8 , , will display the current status of " "messages in the mail queue. Check this on the command line by running " "sendmail -bp." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:5726 +#: book.translate.xml:5709 msgid "" "Notice how the &man.command." "section; notation is easier to follow." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5733 +#: book.translate.xml:5716 msgid "Files, Directories, Extensions, Device Names" -msgstr "" +msgstr "檔案、目錄、副檔名、裝置名稱" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5735 +#: book.translate.xml:5718 msgid "" "To refer to the name of a file, a directory, a file extension, or a device " "name, use filename." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5739 +#: book.translate.xml:5722 msgid "filename Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "filename 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5743 +#: book.translate.xml:5726 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraThe source for the Handbook in English is found in\n" " filename/usr/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/filename.\n" " The main file is called filenamebook.xmlfilename.\n" " There is also a filenameMakefilefilename and a\n" " number of files with a filename.entfilename extension.para\n" "\n" "parafilenamekbd0filename is the first keyboard detected\n" " by the system, and appears in\n" " filename/devfilename.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5755 +#: book.translate.xml:5738 msgid "" "The source for the Handbook in English is found in /usr/doc/en_US." "ISO8859-1/books/handbook/. The main file is called book." "xml. There is also a Makefile and a number " "of files with a .ent extension." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5761 +#: book.translate.xml:5744 msgid "" "kbd0 is the first keyboard detected by the system, and " "appears in /dev." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5768 +#: book.translate.xml:5751 msgid "The Name of Ports" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Port 名稱" #. (itstool) path: note/title -#: book.translate.xml:5771 book.translate.xml:5815 book.translate.xml:6047 +#: book.translate.xml:5754 book.translate.xml:5798 book.translate.xml:6030 msgid "FreeBSD Extension" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:5773 book.translate.xml:5817 book.translate.xml:6049 +#: book.translate.xml:5756 book.translate.xml:5800 book.translate.xml:6032 msgid "" "These elements are part of the FreeBSD extension to DocBook, and do not " "exist in the original DocBook DTD." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5778 +#: book.translate.xml:5761 msgid "" "To include the name of a program from the FreeBSD Ports Collection in the " "document, use the package tag. Since the Ports Collection can be " "installed in any number of locations, only include the category and the port " "name; do not include /usr/ports." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5784 +#: book.translate.xml:5767 msgid "" "By default, package refers to a binary package. To refer to a " "port that will be built from source, set the role " "attribute to port." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5790 +#: book.translate.xml:5773 msgid "package Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "package 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5794 +#: book.translate.xml:5777 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraInstall the packagenet/wiresharkpackage binary\n" " package to view network traffic.para\n" "\n" "parapackage role=\"port\"net/wiresharkpackage can also be\n" " built and installed from the Ports Collection.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5802 +#: book.translate.xml:5785 msgid "" "Install the net/wireshark binary package to view network " "traffic." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5805 +#: book.translate.xml:5788 msgid "" "net/wireshark can also be built and " "installed from the Ports Collection." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5811 +#: book.translate.xml:5794 msgid "" "Hosts, Domains, IP Addresses, User Names, Group Names, and Other System Items" -msgstr "" +msgstr "主機、網域、IP 位址、使用名稱、群組名稱及其他系統項目" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5822 +#: book.translate.xml:5805 msgid "" "Information for system items is marked up with " "systemitem. The class attribute is used to " "identify the particular type of information shown." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5829 +#: book.translate.xml:5812 msgid "class=\"domainname\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5832 +#: book.translate.xml:5815 msgid "" "The text is a domain name, such as FreeBSD.org or " "ngo.org.uk. There is no hostname component." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5840 +#: book.translate.xml:5823 msgid "class=\"etheraddress\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5843 +#: book.translate.xml:5826 msgid "" "The text is an Ethernet MAC address, expressed as a " "series of 2 digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5850 +#: book.translate.xml:5833 msgid "class=\"fqdomainname\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5853 +#: book.translate.xml:5836 msgid "" "The text is a Fully Qualified Domain Name, with both hostname and domain " "name parts." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5859 +#: book.translate.xml:5842 msgid "class=\"ipaddress\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5862 +#: book.translate.xml:5845 msgid "" "The text is an IP address, probably expressed as a dotted " "quad." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5868 +#: book.translate.xml:5851 msgid "class=\"netmask\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5871 +#: book.translate.xml:5854 msgid "" "The text is a network mask, which might be expressed as a dotted quad, a " "hexadecimal string, or as a / followed by a number " "(CIDR notation)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5879 +#: book.translate.xml:5862 msgid "class=\"systemname\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5882 +#: book.translate.xml:5865 msgid "" "With class=\"systemname\" the marked up information is " "the simple hostname, such as freefall or " "wcarchive." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5890 +#: book.translate.xml:5873 msgid "class=\"username\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5893 +#: book.translate.xml:5876 msgid "The text is a username, like root." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:5899 +#: book.translate.xml:5882 msgid "class=\"groupname\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:5902 +#: book.translate.xml:5885 msgid "The text is a groupname, like wheel." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5909 +#: book.translate.xml:5892 msgid "systemitem and Classes Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "systemitem 與類別 (Class) 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5913 +#: book.translate.xml:5896 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraThe local machine can always be referred to by the\n" " name systemitem class=\"systemname\"localhostsystemitem, which will have the IP\n" " address systemitem class=\"ipaddress\"127.0.0.1systemitem.para\n" "\n" "paraThe systemitem class=\"domainname\"FreeBSD.orgsystemitem\n" " domain contains a number of different hosts, including\n" " systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\"freefall.FreeBSD.orgsystemitem and\n" " systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\"bento.FreeBSD.orgsystemitem.para\n" "\n" "paraWhen adding an acronymIPacronym alias to an\n" " interface (using commandifconfigcommand)\n" " emphasisalwaysemphasis use a netmask of\n" " systemitem class=\"netmask\"255.255.255.255systemitem (which can\n" " also be expressed as\n" " systemitem class=\"netmask\"0xffffffffsystemitem).para\n" "\n" "paraThe acronymMACacronym address uniquely identifies\n" " every network card in existence. A typical\n" " acronymMACacronym address looks like\n" " systemitem class=\"etheraddress\"08:00:20:87:ef:d0systemitem.para\n" "\n" "paraTo carry out most system administration functions\n" " requires logging in as systemitem class=\"username\"rootsystemitem.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5939 +#: book.translate.xml:5922 msgid "" "The local machine can always be referred to by the name " "localhost, which will have the IP address " "127.0.0.1." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5944 +#: book.translate.xml:5927 msgid "" "The FreeBSD.org domain " "contains a number of different hosts, including freefall.FreeBSD.org and bento.FreeBSD.org." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5950 +#: book.translate.xml:5933 msgid "" "When adding an IP alias to an interface (using " "ifconfig) always use a netmask of " "255.255.255.255 (which can also " "be expressed as 0xffffffff)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5957 +#: book.translate.xml:5940 msgid "" "The MAC address uniquely identifies every network card in " "existence. A typical MAC address looks like 08:00:20:87:ef:d0." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5961 +#: book.translate.xml:5944 msgid "" "To carry out most system administration functions requires logging in as " "root." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5968 +#: book.translate.xml:5951 msgid "Uniform Resource Identifiers (URIs)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "統一資源識別碼 (URI)" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5971 +#: book.translate.xml:5954 msgid "" "Occasionally it is useful to show a Uniform Resource Identifier " "(URI) without making it an active hyperlink. The " "uri element makes this possible:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:5977 +#: book.translate.xml:5960 msgid "uri Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "uri 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:5981 +#: book.translate.xml:5964 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraThis URL shows only as text:\n" " urihttps://www.FreeBSD.orguri. It does not\n" " create a link.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:5987 +#: book.translate.xml:5970 msgid "" "This URL shows only as text: https://www.FreeBSD." "org. It does not create a link." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5992 +#: book.translate.xml:5975 msgid "To create links, see ." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:5997 +#: book.translate.xml:5980 msgid "Email Addresses" -msgstr "" +msgstr "郵件地址" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:5999 +#: book.translate.xml:5982 msgid "" "Email addresses are marked up as email elements. In the " "HTML output format, the wrapped text becomes a hyperlink " "to the email address. Other output formats that support hyperlinks may also " "make the email address into a link." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6006 +#: book.translate.xml:5989 msgid "email with a Hyperlink Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "有超連結的 email 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6010 +#: book.translate.xml:5993 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraAn email address that does not actually exist, like\n" " emailnotreal@example.comemail, can be used as an\n" " example.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6016 +#: book.translate.xml:5999 msgid "" "An email address that does not actually exist, like notreal@example." "com, can be used as an example." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6021 +#: book.translate.xml:6004 msgid "" "A FreeBSD-specific extension allows setting the role " "attribute to nolink to prevent the creation of the " "hyperlink to the email address." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6027 +#: book.translate.xml:6010 msgid "email Without a Hyperlink Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "沒有超連結的 email 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6031 +#: book.translate.xml:6014 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraSometimes a link to an email address like\n" " email role=\"nolink\"notreal@example.comemail is not\n" " desired.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6037 +#: book.translate.xml:6020 msgid "" "Sometimes a link to an email address like notreal@example.com is not desired." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6044 +#: book.translate.xml:6027 msgid "Describing Makefiles" -msgstr "" +msgstr "說明 Makefile" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6054 +#: book.translate.xml:6037 msgid "" "Two elements exist to describe parts of Makefiles, " "buildtarget and varname." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6058 +#: book.translate.xml:6041 msgid "" "buildtarget identifies a build target exported by a " "Makefile that can be given as a parameter to " "make. varname identifies a variable that can " "be set (in the environment, on the command line with make, or within the Makefile) to influence the " "process." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6068 +#: book.translate.xml:6051 msgid "buildtarget and varname Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "buildtarget 與 varname 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6073 +#: book.translate.xml:6056 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraTwo common targets in a filenameMakefilefilename\n" " are buildtargetallbuildtarget and\n" " buildtargetcleanbuildtarget.para\n" "\n" "paraTypically, invoking buildtargetallbuildtarget will\n" " rebuild the application, and invoking\n" " buildtargetcleanbuildtarget will remove the temporary\n" " files (filename.ofilename for example) created by the\n" " build process.para\n" "\n" "parabuildtargetcleanbuildtarget may be controlled by a\n" " number of variables, including varnameCLOBBERvarname\n" " and varnameRECURSEvarname.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: para/buildtarget -#: book.translate.xml:6090 book.translate.xml:6093 +#: book.translate.xml:6073 book.translate.xml:6076 msgid "all" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6089 +#: book.translate.xml:6072 msgid "" "Two common targets in a Makefile are <_:buildtarget-1/> " "and <_:buildtarget-2/>." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6093 +#: book.translate.xml:6076 msgid "" "Typically, invoking <_:buildtarget-1/> will rebuild the application, and " "invoking <_:buildtarget-2/> will remove the temporary files (.o for example) created by the build process." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6099 +#: book.translate.xml:6082 msgid "" "<_:buildtarget-1/> may be controlled by a number of variables, including " "CLOBBER and RECURSE." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6106 +#: book.translate.xml:6089 msgid "Literal Text" -msgstr "" +msgstr "實際文字 (Literal)" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6108 +#: book.translate.xml:6091 msgid "" "Literal text, or text which should be entered verbatim, is often needed in " "documentation. This is text that is excerpted from another file, or which " "should be copied exactly as shown from the documentation into another file." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6113 +#: book.translate.xml:6096 msgid "" "Some of the time, programlisting will be sufficient to denote " "this text. But programlisting is not always appropriate, " "particularly when you want to include a portion of a file in-line with the rest of the paragraph." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6120 +#: book.translate.xml:6103 msgid "On these occasions, use literal." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6124 +#: book.translate.xml:6107 msgid "literal Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "literal 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6128 +#: book.translate.xml:6111 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraThe literalmaxusers 10literal line in the kernel\n" " configuration file determines the size of many system tables, and is\n" " a rough guide to how many simultaneous logins the system will\n" " support.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6135 +#: book.translate.xml:6118 msgid "" "The maxusers 10 line in the kernel configuration file " "determines the size of many system tables, and is a rough guide to how many " "simultaneous logins the system will support." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6143 +#: book.translate.xml:6126 msgid "Showing Items That the User Must Fill In" -msgstr "" +msgstr "顯示使用者必填的項目" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6146 +#: book.translate.xml:6129 msgid "" "There will often be times when the user is shown what to do, or referred to " "a file or command line, but cannot simply copy the example provided. " "Instead, they must supply some information themselves." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6151 +#: book.translate.xml:6134 msgid "" "replaceable is designed for this eventuality. Use it " "inside other elements to indicate parts of that " "element's content that the user must replace." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6157 +#: book.translate.xml:6140 msgid "replaceable Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "replaceable 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6161 +#: book.translate.xml:6144 #, no-wrap msgid "screen&prompt.user; userinputman replaceablecommandreplaceableuserinputscreen" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: informalexample/screen -#: book.translate.xml:6166 +#: book.translate.xml:6149 #, no-wrap msgid "% man command" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6169 +#: book.translate.xml:6152 msgid "" "replaceable can be used in many different elements, including " "literal. This example also shows that replaceable " "should only be wrapped around the content that the user is meant to provide. The other content should be left alone." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6178 +#: book.translate.xml:6161 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraThe literalmaxusers replaceablenreplaceableliteral\n" " line in the kernel configuration file determines the size of many system\n" " tables, and is a rough guide to how many simultaneous logins the system will\n" " support.para\n" "\n" "paraFor a desktop workstation, literal32literal is a good value\n" " for replaceablenreplaceable.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6188 +#: book.translate.xml:6171 msgid "" "The maxusers n line in the " "kernel configuration file determines the size of many system tables, and is " "a rough guide to how many simultaneous logins the system will support." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6194 +#: book.translate.xml:6177 msgid "" "For a desktop workstation, 32 is a good value for " "n." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6200 +#: book.translate.xml:6183 msgid "Showing GUI Buttons" -msgstr "" +msgstr "顯示 GUI 按鈕" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6202 +#: book.translate.xml:6185 msgid "" "Buttons presented by a graphical user interface are marked with " "guibutton. To make the text look more like a graphical button, " "brackets and non-breaking spaces are added surrounding the text." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6208 +#: book.translate.xml:6191 msgid "guibutton Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "guibutton 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6212 +#: book.translate.xml:6195 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraEdit the file, then click\n" " guibutton[&nbsp;Save&nbsp;]guibutton to save the\n" " changes.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6218 +#: book.translate.xml:6201 msgid "" "Edit the file, then click [ Save ] to save the " "changes." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6225 +#: book.translate.xml:6208 msgid "Quoting System Errors" -msgstr "" +msgstr "引用系統錯誤" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6227 +#: book.translate.xml:6210 msgid "" "System errors generated by FreeBSD are marked with errorname. " "This indicates the exact error that appears." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6232 +#: book.translate.xml:6215 msgid "errorname Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "errorname 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6236 +#: book.translate.xml:6219 #, no-wrap msgid "screenerrornamePanic: cannot mount rooterrornamescreen" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: informalexample/screen -#: book.translate.xml:6241 +#: book.translate.xml:6224 #, no-wrap msgid "Panic: cannot mount root" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:6248 +#: book.translate.xml:6231 msgid "Images" -msgstr "" +msgstr "圖片" #. (itstool) path: important/para -#: book.translate.xml:6251 +#: book.translate.xml:6234 msgid "" "Image support in the documentation is somewhat experimental. The mechanisms " "described here are unlikely to change, but that is not guaranteed." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: important/para -#: book.translate.xml:6255 +#: book.translate.xml:6238 msgid "" "To provide conversion between different image formats, the graphics/" "ImageMagick port must be installed. This port is not included in " "the textproc/docproj meta port, and must be installed " "separately." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: important/para -#: book.translate.xml:6261 +#: book.translate.xml:6244 msgid "" "A good example of the use of images is the doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/" "articles/vm-design/ document. Examine the files in that directory " "to see how these elements are used together. Build different output formats " "to see how the format determines what images are shown in the rendered " "document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6270 +#: book.translate.xml:6253 msgid "Image Formats" -msgstr "" +msgstr "圖片格式" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6272 +#: book.translate.xml:6255 msgid "" "The following image formats are currently supported. An image file will " "automatically be converted to bitmap or vector image depending on the output " "document format." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6276 +#: book.translate.xml:6259 msgid "" "These are the only formats in which images should be " "committed to the documentation repository." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:6282 +#: book.translate.xml:6265 msgid "EPS (Encapsulated Postscript)" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:6286 +#: book.translate.xml:6269 msgid "" "Images that are primarily vector based, such as network diagrams, time " "lines, and similar, should be in this format. These images have a ." "eps extension." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:6294 +#: book.translate.xml:6277 msgid "PNG (Portable Network Graphic)" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:6298 +#: book.translate.xml:6281 msgid "" "For bitmaps, such as screen captures, use this format. These images have the " ".png extension." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:6305 +#: book.translate.xml:6288 msgid "PIC (PIC graphics language)" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:6308 +#: book.translate.xml:6291 msgid "" "PIC is a language for drawing simple vector-based figures " "used in the pic1 utility. These images have the .pic extension." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:6316 +#: book.translate.xml:6299 msgid "SCR (SCReen capture)" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:6319 +#: book.translate.xml:6302 msgid "" "This format is specific to screenshots of console output. The following " "command generates an SCR file shot.scr from video " "buffer of /dev/ttyv0:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/screen -#: book.translate.xml:6324 +#: book.translate.xml:6307 #, no-wrap msgid "# vidcontrol -p < /dev/ttyv0 > shot.scr" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:6326 +#: book.translate.xml:6309 msgid "" "This is preferable to PNG format for screenshots because " "the SCR file contains plain text of the command lines so " "that it can be converted to a PNG image or a plain text " "depending on the output document format." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6336 +#: book.translate.xml:6319 msgid "" "Use the appropriate format for each image. Documentation will often have a " "mix of EPS and PNG images. The " "Makefiles ensure that the correct format image is " "chosen depending on the output format used. Do not commit the same " "image to the repository in two different formats." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: important/para -#: book.translate.xml:6345 +#: book.translate.xml:6328 msgid "" "The Documentation Project may eventually switch to using the SVG (Scalable Vector Graphic) format for vector images. However, the " "current state of SVG capable editing tools makes this " "impractical." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6354 +#: book.translate.xml:6337 msgid "Image File Locations" -msgstr "" +msgstr "圖片檔案位置" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6356 +#: book.translate.xml:6339 msgid "" "Image files can be stored in one of several locations, depending on the " "document and image:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:6361 +#: book.translate.xml:6344 msgid "" "In the same directory as the document itself, usually done for articles and " "small books that keep all their files in a single directory." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:6367 +#: book.translate.xml:6350 msgid "" "In a subdirectory of the main document. Typically done when a large book " "uses separate subdirectories to organize individual chapters." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:6371 +#: book.translate.xml:6354 msgid "" "When images are stored in a subdirectory of the main document directory, the " "subdirectory name must be included in their paths in the Makefile and the imagedata element." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:6379 +#: book.translate.xml:6362 msgid "" "In a subdirectory of doc/share/images named after the " "document. For example, images for the Handbook are stored in doc/" "share/images/books/handbook. Images that work for multiple " "translations are stored in this upper level of the documentation file tree. " "Generally, these are images that can be used unchanged in non-English " "translations of the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6392 +#: book.translate.xml:6375 msgid "Image Markup" -msgstr "" +msgstr "圖片標籤" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6394 +#: book.translate.xml:6377 msgid "" "Images are included as part of a mediaobject. The " "mediaobject can contain other, more specific objects. We are " "concerned with two, the imageobject and the textobject." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6399 +#: book.translate.xml:6382 msgid "" "Include one imageobject, and two textobject elements. " "The imageobject will point to the name of the image file without " "the extension. The textobject elements contain information that " "will be presented to the user as well as, or instead of, the image itself." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6406 +#: book.translate.xml:6389 msgid "" "Text elements are shown to the reader in several situations. When the " "document is viewed in HTML, text elements are shown while " "the image is loading, or if the mouse pointer is hovered over the image, or " "if a text-only browser is being used. In formats like plain text where " "graphics are not possible, the text elements are shown instead of the " "graphical ones." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6414 +#: book.translate.xml:6397 msgid "" "This example shows how to include an image called fig1.png in a document. The image is a rectangle with an A inside it:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6418 +#: book.translate.xml:6401 #, no-wrap msgid "" "mediaobject\n" " imageobject\n" " imagedata fileref=\"fig1\" \n" " imageobject\n" "\n" " textobject\n" " literallayout class=\"monospaced\"+---------------+ \n" "| A |\n" "+---------------+literallayout\n" " textobject\n" "\n" " textobject\n" " phraseA picturephrase \n" " textobject\n" "mediaobject" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: callout/para -#: book.translate.xml:6436 +#: book.translate.xml:6419 msgid "" "Include an imagedata element inside the imageobject " "element. The fileref attribute should contain the " "filename of the image to include, without the extension. The stylesheets " "will work out which extension should be added to the filename automatically." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: callout/para -#: book.translate.xml:6446 +#: book.translate.xml:6429 msgid "" "The first textobject contains a literallayout element, " "where the class attribute is set to monospaced. This is an opportunity to demonstrate ASCII art " "skills. This content will be used if the document is converted to plain text." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: callout/para -#: book.translate.xml:6454 +#: book.translate.xml:6437 msgid "" "Notice how the first and last lines of the content of the " "literallayout element butt up next to the element's tags. This " "ensures no extraneous white space is included." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: callout/para -#: book.translate.xml:6461 +#: book.translate.xml:6444 msgid "" "The second textobject contains a single phrase " "element. The contents of this phrase will become the alt " "attribute for the image when this document is converted to HTML." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6471 +#: book.translate.xml:6454 msgid "Image Makefile Entries" -msgstr "" +msgstr "圖片 Makefile 項目" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6473 +#: book.translate.xml:6456 msgid "" "Images must be listed in the Makefile in the " "IMAGES variable. This variable must contain the names of " "all the source images. For example, if there are three " "figures, fig1.eps, fig2.png, " "fig3.png, then the Makefile should " "have lines like this in it." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6482 +#: book.translate.xml:6465 #, no-wrap msgid "" "…\n" "IMAGES= fig1.eps fig2.png fig3.png\n" "…" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:6486 book.translate.xml:7074 +#: book.translate.xml:6469 book.translate.xml:7057 msgid "or" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6488 +#: book.translate.xml:6471 #, no-wrap msgid "" "…\n" "IMAGES= fig1.eps\n" "IMAGES+= fig2.png\n" "IMAGES+= fig3.png\n" "…" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6494 +#: book.translate.xml:6477 msgid "" "Again, the Makefile will work out the complete list of " "images it needs to build the source document, you only need to list the " "image files you provided." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6501 +#: book.translate.xml:6484 msgid "Images and Chapters in Subdirectories" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在子目錄中的圖片與章節" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6503 +#: book.translate.xml:6486 msgid "" "Be careful when separating documentation into smaller files in different " "directories (see )." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6506 +#: book.translate.xml:6489 msgid "" "Suppose there is a book with three chapters, and the chapters are stored in " "their own directories, called chapter1/chapter.xml, " "chapter2/chapter.xml, and chapter3/chapter." "xml. If each chapter has images associated with it, place those " "images in each chapter's subdirectory (chapter1/, " "chapter2/, and chapter3/)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6516 +#: book.translate.xml:6499 msgid "" "However, doing this requires including the directory names in the " "IMAGES variable in the Makefile, " "and including the directory name in the imagedata element in the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6522 +#: book.translate.xml:6505 msgid "" "For example, if the book has chapter1/fig1.png, then " "chapter1/chapter.xml should contain:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6527 +#: book.translate.xml:6510 #, no-wrap msgid "" "mediaobject\n" " imageobject\n" " imagedata fileref=\"chapter1/fig1\" \n" " imageobject\n" "\n" " …\n" "\n" "mediaobject" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: callout/para -#: book.translate.xml:6538 +#: book.translate.xml:6521 msgid "" "The directory name must be included in the fileref " "attribute." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6543 +#: book.translate.xml:6526 msgid "The Makefile must contain:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6545 +#: book.translate.xml:6528 #, no-wrap msgid "" "…\n" "IMAGES= chapter1/fig1.png\n" "…" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:6555 +#: book.translate.xml:6538 msgid "" "Links are also in-line elements. To show a URI without " "creating a link, see ." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6561 +#: book.translate.xml:6544 msgid "xml:id Attributes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "xml:id 屬性" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6563 +#: book.translate.xml:6546 msgid "" "Most DocBook elements accept an xml:id attribute to give " "that part of the document a unique name. The xml:id can " "be used as a target for a crossreference or link." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6568 +#: book.translate.xml:6551 msgid "" "Any portion of the document that will be a link target must have an " "xml:id attribute. Assigning an xml:id " "to all chapters and sections, even if there are no current plans to link to " "them, is a good idea. These xml:ids can be used as unique " "reference points by anyone referring to the HTML version " "of the document." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6577 +#: book.translate.xml:6560 msgid "xml:id on Chapters and Sections Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在章與節上加 xml:id 的範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6580 +#: book.translate.xml:6563 #, no-wrap msgid "" "chapter xml:id=\"introduction\"\n" " titleIntroductiontitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is the introduction. It contains a subsection,\n" " which is identified as well.para\n" "\n" " sect1 xml:id=\"introduction-moredetails\"\n" " titleMore Detailstitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is a subsection.para\n" " sect1\n" "chapter" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6594 +#: book.translate.xml:6577 msgid "" "Use descriptive values for xml:id names. The values must " "be unique within the entire document, not just in a single file. In the " "example, the subsection xml:id is constructed by " "appending text to the chapter xml:id. This ensures that " "the xml:ids are unique. It also helps both reader and " "anyone editing the document to see where the link is located within the " "document, similar to a directory path to a file." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6606 +#: book.translate.xml:6589 msgid "Crossreferences with xref" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 xref 交叉參照" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6608 +#: book.translate.xml:6591 msgid "" "xref provides the reader with a link to jump to another section " "of the document. The target xml:id is specified in the " "linkend attribute, and xref generates the link " "text automatically." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6615 +#: book.translate.xml:6598 msgid "xref Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "xref 範例" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6617 +#: book.translate.xml:6600 msgid "" "Assume that this fragment appears somewhere in a document that includes the " "xml:id example shown above:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6621 +#: book.translate.xml:6604 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraMore information can be found\n" " in xref linkend=\"introduction\".para\n" "\n" "paraMore specific information can be found\n" " in xref linkend=\"introduction-moredetails\".para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6627 +#: book.translate.xml:6610 msgid "" "The link text will be generated automatically, looking like " "(emphasized text indicates the link text):" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: blockquote/para -#: book.translate.xml:6632 +#: book.translate.xml:6615 msgid "" "More information can be found in Chapter 1, Introduction." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: blockquote/para -#: book.translate.xml:6635 +#: book.translate.xml:6618 msgid "" "More specific information can be found in Section 1.1, More " "Details." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6641 +#: book.translate.xml:6624 msgid "" "The link text is generated automatically from the chapter and section number " "and title elements." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6650 +#: book.translate.xml:6633 msgid "" "The link element described here allows the writer to define the link text. " "When link text is used, it is very important to be descriptive to give the " "reader an idea of where the link goes. Remember that DocBook can be rendered " "to multiple types of media. The reader might be looking at a printed book or " "other form of media where there are no links. If the link text is not " "descriptive enough, the reader might not be able to locate the linked " "section." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6659 +#: book.translate.xml:6642 msgid "" "The xlink:href attribute is the URL of " "the page, and the content of the element is the text that will be displayed " "for the user to activate." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6664 +#: book.translate.xml:6647 msgid "" "In many situations, it is preferable to show the actual URL rather than text. This can be done by leaving out the element text " "entirely." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6669 +#: book.translate.xml:6652 msgid "link to a FreeBSD Documentation Web Page Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "link 到 FreeBSD 說明文件網頁範例" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6672 +#: book.translate.xml:6655 msgid "" "Link to the book or article URL entity. To link to a " "specific chapter in a book, add a slash and the chapter file name, followed " "by an optional anchor within the chapter. For articles, link to the article " "URL entity, followed by an optional anchor within the " "article. URL entities can be found in doc/share/" "xml/urls.ent." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6681 +#: book.translate.xml:6664 msgid "Usage for FreeBSD book links:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6683 +#: book.translate.xml:6666 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraRead the link\n" " xlink:href=\"&url.books.handbook;/svn.html#svn-intro\"SVN\n" " introductionlink, then pick the nearest mirror from\n" " the list of link\n" " xlink:href=\"&url.books.handbook;/svn.html#svn-mirrors\"Subversion\n" " mirror siteslink.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6692 +#: book.translate.xml:6675 msgid "" "Read the SVN introduction, then pick the nearest " "mirror from the list of Subversion mirror sites." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6697 +#: book.translate.xml:6680 msgid "Usage for FreeBSD article links:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6699 +#: book.translate.xml:6682 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraRead this\n" " link xlink:href=\"&url.articles.bsdl-gpl;\"article\n" " about the BSD licenselink, or just the\n" " link xlink:href=\"&url.articles.bsdl-gpl;#intro\"introductionlink.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6706 +#: book.translate.xml:6689 msgid "" "Read this article about the BSD license, or just the introduction." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6712 +#: book.translate.xml:6695 msgid "link to a FreeBSD Web Page Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "link 到 FreeBSD 網頁範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6716 +#: book.translate.xml:6699 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraOf course, you could stop reading this document and go to the\n" " link xlink:href=\"&url.base;/index.html\"FreeBSD home pagelink instead.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6721 +#: book.translate.xml:6704 msgid "" "Of course, you could stop reading this document and go to the FreeBSD home page instead." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:6727 +#: book.translate.xml:6710 msgid "link to an External Web Page Example" -msgstr "" +msgstr "link 到外部網頁範例" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6732 +#: book.translate.xml:6715 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraWikipedia has an excellent reference on\n" " link\n" " xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table\"GUID\n" " Partition Tableslink.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6739 +#: book.translate.xml:6722 msgid "" "Wikipedia has an excellent reference on GUID Partition Tables." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6742 +#: book.translate.xml:6725 msgid "The link text can be omitted to show the actual URL:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6745 +#: book.translate.xml:6728 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraWikipedia has an excellent reference on\n" " GUID Partition Tables: link\n" " xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table\"link.para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6749 +#: book.translate.xml:6732 msgid "" "The same link can be entered using shorter notation instead of a separate " "ending tag:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:6752 +#: book.translate.xml:6735 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraWikipedia has an excellent reference on\n" " GUID Partition Tables: link\n" " xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table\".para" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6756 +#: book.translate.xml:6739 msgid "The two methods are equivalent. Appearance:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:6758 +#: book.translate.xml:6741 msgid "" "Wikipedia has an excellent reference on GUID Partition Tables: http://en." "wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title -#: book.translate.xml:6798 +#: book.translate.xml:6781 msgid "Style Sheets" -msgstr "" +msgstr "樣式表" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para -#: book.translate.xml:6800 +#: book.translate.xml:6783 msgid "" "XML is concerned with content, and says nothing about how " "that content should be presented to the reader or rendered on paper. " "Multiple style sheet languages have been developed to " "describe visual layout, including Extensible Stylesheet Language " "Transformation (XSLT), Document Style Semantics and " "Specification Language (DSSSL), and Cascading Style " "Sheets (CSS)." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para -#: book.translate.xml:6809 +#: book.translate.xml:6792 msgid "" "The FDP documents use XSLT stylesheets " "to transform DocBook into XHTML, and then CSS formatting is applied to the XHTML pages. " "Printable output is currently rendered with legacy DSSSL " "stylesheets, but this will probably change in the future." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:6818 +#: book.translate.xml:6801 msgid "CSS" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:6820 +#: book.translate.xml:6803 msgid "" "Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) are a mechanism for " "attaching style information (font, weight, size, color, and so forth) to " "elements in an XHTML document without abusing " "XHTML to do so." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:6827 +#: book.translate.xml:6810 msgid "The DocBook Documents" -msgstr "" +msgstr "DocBook 文件" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:6829 +#: book.translate.xml:6812 msgid "" "The FreeBSD XSLT and DSSSL stylesheets " "refer to docbook.css, which is expected to be present " "in the same directory as the XHTML files. The project-" "wide CSS file is copied from doc/share/misc/" "docbook.css when documents are converted to XHTML, and is installed automatically." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title -#: book.translate.xml:6874 +#: book.translate.xml:6857 msgid "Translations" msgstr "翻譯" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para -#: book.translate.xml:6876 +#: book.translate.xml:6859 msgid "" "This is the FAQ for people translating the FreeBSD documentation (FAQ, " "Handbook, tutorials, manual pages, and others) to different languages." msgstr "" -"本章是翻譯 FreeBSD 文件(包含：FAQ, Handbook, tutorials, manual pages等)的常見" -"問題(FAQ)。" +"本章節是供要翻譯 FreeBSD 說明文件 (常見問答集 (FAQ)、使用手冊 (Handbook)、教" +"學 (Tutorial)、操作手冊 (Manual page) 等) 到各種語言的常見問答集 (FAQ)。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para -#: book.translate.xml:6880 +#: book.translate.xml:6863 msgid "" "It is very heavily based on the translation FAQ from " "the FreeBSD German Documentation Project, originally written by Frank " "Gründer elwood@mc5sys.in-berlin.de and translated back to " "English by Bernd Warken bwarken@mayn.de." msgstr "" -"本文件 主要 是以 FreeBSD 德文翻譯計劃的翻譯 FAQ 為母本" -"而來的， 原始撰稿者為 Frank Gründer elwood@mc5sys.in-berlin.de，並由 Bernd Warken bwarken@mayn.de 再翻譯回英文版。" +"本文件 主要 是以 FreeBSD 德文說明文件計劃的翻譯常見問答" +"集為母本而來的， 原始撰稿者為 Frank Gründer elwood@mc5sys.in-berlin." +"de，並由 Bernd Warken bwarken@mayn.de 再翻譯回英文版。" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para -#: book.translate.xml:6886 +#: book.translate.xml:6869 msgid "" "The FAQ is maintained by the Documentation Engineering Team " "doceng@FreeBSD.org." -msgstr "本 FAQ 是由文件工程團隊 doceng@FreeBSD.org 所維護。" +msgstr "" +"本常見問答集是由文件工程團隊 Documentation Engineering Team " +"doceng@FreeBSD.org 所維護。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:6891 +#: book.translate.xml:6874 msgid "What do i18n and l10n mean?" -msgstr "i18n 跟 l10n 是什麼呢？" +msgstr "i18n 與 l10n 代表的是什麼意思？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6896 +#: book.translate.xml:6879 msgid "" "i18n means internationalization and " "l10n means localization. They are just a " "convenient shorthand." msgstr "" -"i18n 是 internationalization 而 " -"l10n 是 localization。這些都是為了書寫方便" -"而用的簡寫。" +"i18n 指的是國際化 (Internationalization) " +"而 l10n 指的是在地化 (Localization)。這些都" +"是為了書寫方便而用的簡寫。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6901 +#: book.translate.xml:6884 msgid "" "i18n can be read as i followed by 18 " "letters, followed by n. Similarly, l10n is " "l followed by 10 letters, followed by n." msgstr "" "i18n 就是開頭為 i 後面有 18 個字母，最後接 " "n。同樣地， l10n 是開頭為 l 後" "面有 10 個字母，最後接 n。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:6910 +#: book.translate.xml:6893 msgid "Is there a mailing list for translators?" -msgstr "有專門給譯者參與討論的 mailing list 嗎？" +msgstr "有給翻譯人員參與討論的郵遞論壇 (Mailing list) 嗎？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6914 +#: book.translate.xml:6897 msgid "" "Yes. Different translation groups have their own mailing lists. The list of " "translation projects has more information about the mailing lists and " "web sites run by each translation project. In addition there is " "freebsd-translators@freebsd.org for general translation " "discussion." msgstr "" -"有的，不同的語系翻譯者都各自有自屬的 mailing lists。這份 翻譯計劃清單 有" "列出各翻譯計劃的詳細 mailing lists 及相關網站。此外，有一般翻譯討論的" "freebsd-translators@freebsd.org郵件論壇。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:6926 +#: book.translate.xml:6909 msgid "Are more translators needed?" msgstr "需要更多人一起參與翻譯嗎？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6930 +#: book.translate.xml:6913 msgid "" "Yes. The more people work on translation the faster it gets done, and the " "faster changes to the English documentation are mirrored in the translated " "documents." msgstr "" -"當然囉，越多人參與翻譯，那麼就能夠越快翻完，而且英文版文件若有增減、更新的" -"話， 各翻譯版也可以儘快同步囉。" +"當然囉，越多人參與翻譯，那麼就能夠越快翻完，而且英文版說明文件若有增減、更新" +"的話， 各翻譯版也可以儘快同步囉。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6935 +#: book.translate.xml:6918 msgid "You do not have to be a professional translator to be able to help." msgstr "不一定得是專業譯者，才能參與翻譯的。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:6942 +#: book.translate.xml:6925 msgid "What languages do I need to know?" msgstr "有要求哪些語言能力呢" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6946 +#: book.translate.xml:6929 msgid "" "Ideally, you will have a good knowledge of written English, and obviously " "you will need to be fluent in the language you are translating to." msgstr "" "理論上，必須要對英文非常熟稔，而且很明顯地，對想翻譯的語言必須要能運用自如。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6950 +#: book.translate.xml:6933 msgid "" "English is not strictly necessary. For example, you could do a Hungarian " "translation of the FAQ from the Spanish translation." msgstr "" -"英文也並非一定要會的。比如說，可以把西班牙文(Spanish)的 FAQ 翻譯為匈牙利文" +"英文也並非一定要會的。比如說，可以把西班牙文 (Spanish) 的 FAQ 翻譯為匈牙利文 " "(Hungarian)。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:6958 +#: book.translate.xml:6941 msgid "What software do I need to know?" msgstr "該學會哪些程式的使用呢？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6962 +#: book.translate.xml:6945 msgid "" "It is strongly recommended that you maintain a local copy of the FreeBSD " "Subversion repository (at least the documentation part). This can be done by " "running:" msgstr "" -"強烈建議在自己機器上也建立 FreeBSD Subversion repository 的備份(至少文件部" -"分)，這可以執行：" +"強烈建議在自己機器上也建立 FreeBSD Subversion 檔案庫的備份 (至少要有說明文件" +"的部分)，這可以執行：" #. (itstool) path: answer/screen -#: book.translate.xml:6966 +#: book.translate.xml:6949 #, no-wrap msgid "% svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head/ head" msgstr "% svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head/ head" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6968 +#: book.translate.xml:6951 msgid "" "svn.FreeBSD.org is a " "public SVN server. Verify the server certificate from the " "list of Subversion mirror sites." msgstr "" -"svn.FreeBSD.org是公共的 " -"SVN 伺服器。可以從Subversion 鏡相站清單檢查認證的伺服器。" +"svn.FreeBSD.org 是公共" +"的 SVN 伺服器。可以從 Subversion 鏡像站 清單檢查認證的伺服器。" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:6975 +#: book.translate.xml:6958 msgid "" "This will require the devel/subversion package to be " "installed." -msgstr "這需要安裝devel/subversion 套件。" +msgstr "這需要安裝 devel/subversion 套件。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6979 +#: book.translate.xml:6962 msgid "" "You should be comfortable using svn. This will " "allow you to see what has changed between different versions of the files " "that make up the documentation." msgstr "" -"你可以很自在地使用svn。他可以讓你察看文件檔案不同" -"版本之間的修改差異。" +"你可以很自在地使用 svn。他可以讓你察看說明文件檔案" +"不同版本之間的修改差異。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:6984 +#: book.translate.xml:6967 msgid "" "For example, to view the differences between revisions r33733 and r33734 of en_US.ISO8859-1/books/" "fdp-primer/book.xml, run:" msgstr "" -"例如你要看en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml 版本" -"r33733 和 r33734 的差異，請執行：" +"例如你要看 en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml 版" +"本r33733 和 r33734 的差異，請執行：" #. (itstool) path: answer/screen -#: book.translate.xml:6989 +#: book.translate.xml:6972 #, no-wrap msgid "% svn diff -r33733:33734 en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml" msgstr "% svn diff -r33733:33734 en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:6995 +#: book.translate.xml:6978 msgid "How do I find out who else might be translating to the same language?" msgstr "要怎麼找出來還有誰要跟我一起翻譯的呢？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7000 +#: book.translate.xml:6983 msgid "" "The Documentation Project translations page lists the translation " "efforts that are currently known about. If others are already working on " "translating documentation to your language, please do not duplicate their " "efforts. Instead, contact them to see how you can help." msgstr "" -"文件計" -"劃的翻譯 列了目前已知的各翻譯者成果 ，如果已經有其他人也在做跟你一樣" -"的翻譯工作，那麼請不要重複浪費人力， 請與他們聯繫看看還有哪些地方可以幫上忙" -"的。" +"說明文" +"件計劃翻譯頁 列了目前已知的各翻譯者成果 ，如果已經有其他人也在做跟你" +"一樣的翻譯工作，那麼請不要重複浪費人力， 請與他們聯繫看看還有哪些地方可以幫上" +"忙的。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7007 +#: book.translate.xml:6990 msgid "" "If no one is listed on that page as translating for your language, then send " "a message to the FreeBSD documentation project mailing list in " "case someone else is thinking of doing a translation, but has not announced " "it yet." msgstr "" "若上面並未列出你母語的翻譯，或是也有人要翻譯但還未公開宣布的話，那麼就寄信到 " "FreeBSD documentation project 郵遞論壇 。" +"\">FreeBSD 說明文件計劃郵遞論壇 。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:7016 +#: book.translate.xml:6999 msgid "No one else is translating to my language. What do I do?" msgstr "都沒人翻譯為我所使用的語言，該怎麼辦？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7021 +#: book.translate.xml:7004 msgid "" "Congratulations, you have just started the FreeBSD your-" "language-here Documentation Translation Project. " "Welcome aboard." msgstr "" -"恭喜啊，你剛好踏上 FreeBSD 你的母語 文件翻" -"譯計劃的啟程之路，歡迎上船。" +"恭喜啊，你剛好踏上 FreeBSD 您的語言 說明文" +"件翻譯計劃的啟程之路，歡迎登船。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7026 +#: book.translate.xml:7009 msgid "" "First, decide whether or not you have got the time to spare. Since you are " "the only person working on your language at the moment it is going to be " "your responsibility to publicize your work and coordinate any volunteers " "that might want to help you." msgstr "" "首先呢，先判斷是否有妥善規劃時間，因為你只有一個人在翻而已， 因此，相關翻譯成" "果的公布、與其他可能會幫忙的志工們聯繫這些工作都是你的職責所在。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7032 +#: book.translate.xml:7015 msgid "" "Write an email to the Documentation Project mailing list, announcing that " "you are going to translate the documentation, so the Documentation Project " "translations page can be maintained." msgstr "" -"寫信到 FreeBSD documentation project 郵遞論壇 向大家宣布你正準備要翻譯，然後" -"文件計劃的翻譯部分就會更新相關資料" +"寫信到文件計劃郵遞論壇 (Documentation Project mailing list) 向大家宣布你正準" +"備要翻譯，然後文件計劃的翻譯部分就會更新相關資料。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7037 +#: book.translate.xml:7020 msgid "" "If there is already someone in your country providing FreeBSD mirroring " "services you should contact them and ask if you can have some webspace for " "your project, and possibly an email address or mailing list services." msgstr "" -"若你的國家已經有人提供 FreeBSD 的 mirror(映設) 服務的話，那麼就先跟他們聯" -"繫， 並詢問你是否在上面可以有網頁空間來放相關計劃資料， 以及是否可以有提供 " -"email 帳號或 mailing list 服務。" +"若你的國家已經有人提供 FreeBSD 的鏡像站 (Mirror) 服務的話，那麼就先跟他們聯" +"繫， 並詢問你是否在上面可以有網頁空間來放相關計劃資料，以及是否可以有提供電子" +"郵件帳號或郵遞論壇服務。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7042 +#: book.translate.xml:7025 msgid "" "Then pick a document and start translating. It is best to start with " "something fairly small—either the FAQ, or one of the tutorials." msgstr "" "然後，就開始翻文件囉，一開始翻譯的時候，先找些篇幅較短的文件會比較容易些 —— " "像是 FAQ 啦，或是如何上手之類的說明文章。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:7050 +#: book.translate.xml:7033 msgid "I have translated some documentation, where do I send it?" -msgstr "已經翻好一些文件了，該寄到哪呢？" +msgstr "已經翻好一些說明文件了，該寄到哪呢？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7055 +#: book.translate.xml:7038 msgid "" "That depends. If you are already working with a translation team (such as " "the Japanese team, or the German team) then they will have their own " "procedures for handling submitted documentation, and these will be outlined " "on their web pages." msgstr "" -"這要看情況而定。 若你是在翻譯團隊內做的話(像是日本、德國)， 他們會有自己內部" -"流程來決定翻譯文件怎麼送，這些大致流程會在他們網頁上面有寫。" +"這要看情況而定。若你是在翻譯團隊內做的話 (像是日本團隊、德國團隊)， 他們會有" +"自己內部流程來決定翻譯文件怎麼送，這些大致流程會在他們網頁上面有寫。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7061 +#: book.translate.xml:7044 msgid "" "If you are the only person working on a particular language (or you are " "responsible for a translation project and want to submit your changes back " "to the FreeBSD project) then you should send your translation to the FreeBSD " "project (see the next question)." msgstr "" -"若你是某語系的唯一翻譯者(或你是負責某翻譯計劃，並想把成果回饋給 FreeBSD 計" +"若你是某語系的唯一翻譯者 (或你是負責某翻譯計劃，並想把成果回饋給 FreeBSD 計" "劃) ，那麼你就應該把自己的翻譯成果寄給 FreeBSD 計劃。(細節請看下個問題)" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:7071 +#: book.translate.xml:7054 msgid "" "I am the only person working on translating to this language, how do I " "submit my translation?" msgstr "我是該語系的唯一翻譯者，該怎麼把翻譯成果寄出去呢？" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:7076 +#: book.translate.xml:7059 msgid "" "We are a translation team, and want to submit documentation that our members " "have translated for us." msgstr "我們是翻譯團隊，該怎麼把我們成員翻譯成果寄出去呢？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7082 +#: book.translate.xml:7065 msgid "" "First, make sure your translation is organized properly. This means that it " "should drop into the existing documentation tree and build straight away." msgstr "" "首先，請先確定你的翻譯成果組織條理分明，並可正確編譯，也就是說： 把它擺到現有" -"文件架構內是可以正確編譯成功的。" +"說明文件樹內是可以正確編譯成功的。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7086 +#: book.translate.xml:7069 msgid "" "Currently, the FreeBSD documentation is stored in a top level directory " "called head/. Directories below this are named " "according to the language code they are written in, as defined in ISO639 " "(/usr/share/misc/iso639 on a version of FreeBSD newer " "than 20th January 1999)." msgstr "" -"目前，FreeBSD 文件都是放在最上層的 head/ 目錄內。 而該" -"目錄下的則依其語系來做分類命名的，依照 ISO639 定義(在比比 1999/01/20 還新的 " -"FreeBSD 版本的/usr/share/misc/iso639 )。" +"目前，FreeBSD 說明文件都是放在最上層的 head/ 目錄內。而" +"該目錄下的則根據其 ISO639 所定義的語系代碼來做分類命名的 (在 1999/1/20 之後" +"的 FreeBSD 版本中的 /usr/share/misc/iso639)。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7093 +#: book.translate.xml:7076 msgid "" "If your language can be encoded in different ways (for example, Chinese) " "then there should be directories below this, one for each encoding format " "you have provided." msgstr "" -"若你這個語系可能會有不同編碼方式(像是：中文) 那麼就應該會像下面這樣，來依你所" -"使用的編碼方式細分" +"若你這個語系可能會有不同編碼方式 (像是：中文) 那麼就應該會像下面這樣，來依你" +"所使用的編碼方式細分。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7097 +#: book.translate.xml:7080 msgid "Finally, you should have directories for each document." msgstr "最後，你應該建立好各文件的目錄了。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7100 +#: book.translate.xml:7083 msgid "For example, a hypothetical Swedish translation might look like:" -msgstr "舉例來說，假設有瑞典文(Swedish)版的翻譯，那麼應該會長像：" +msgstr "舉例來說，假設有瑞典文 (Swedish) 版的翻譯，那麼應該會長像：" #. (itstool) path: answer/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:7103 +#: book.translate.xml:7086 #, no-wrap msgid "" "head/\n" " sv_SE.ISO8859-1/\n" " Makefile\n" " htdocs/\n" " docproj/\n" " books/\n" " faq/\n" " Makefile\n" " book.xml" msgstr "" "head/\n" " sv_SE.ISO8859-1/\n" " Makefile\n" " htdocs/\n" " docproj/\n" " books/\n" " faq/\n" " Makefile\n" " book.xml" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7113 +#: book.translate.xml:7096 msgid "" "sv_SE.ISO8859-1 is the name of the translation, in " "lang.encoding form. Note the two Makefiles, which will be used to " "build the documentation." msgstr "" -"sv_SE.ISO8859-1是依照 語系(lang).編碼(encoding) 的規則來建" -"立的譯名。 請注意：其中有兩個 Makefiles 檔，它們是用來建構文件的。" +"sv_SE.ISO8859-1是依照 語系 (Lang).編碼 (Encoding) 的規則來建" +"立的譯名。 請注意：其中有兩個 Makefile 檔，它們是用來建置說明文件的。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7119 +#: book.translate.xml:7102 msgid "" "Use tar1 and gzip1 to compress up your " "documentation, and send it to the project." msgstr "" "然後請用 tar1 與 gzip1 來把你的翻譯文件壓縮起" +"refentrytitle>1 來把你的說明文件壓縮起" "來，並寄到本計劃來。" #. (itstool) path: answer/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7122 +#: book.translate.xml:7105 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd doc\n" "% tar cf swedish-docs.tar sv_SE.ISO8859-1\n" "% gzip -9 swedish-docs.tar" msgstr "" "% cd doc\n" "% tar cf swedish-docs.tar sv_SE.ISO8859-1\n" "% gzip -9 swedish-docs.tar" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7126 +#: book.translate.xml:7109 msgid "" "Put swedish-docs.tar.gz somewhere. If you do not have " "access to your own webspace (perhaps your ISP does not let you have any) " "then you can email Documentation Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org, and arrange to email the files when it is convenient." msgstr "" "接著，把 swedish-docs.tar.gz 放到網頁空間上，若你沒有自" -"己網頁空間的話(ISP不提供) ，那麼可以該檔寄到 Documentation Engineering Team " -"doceng@FreeBSD.org 來。" +"己網頁空間的話(ISP不提供) ，那麼可以該檔寄到文件工程團隊 Documentation " +"Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org 來。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7132 +#: book.translate.xml:7115 msgid "" "Either way, you should use Bugzilla to submit a report indicating that you " "have submitted the documentation. It would be very helpful if you could get " "other people to look over your translation and double check it first, since " "it is unlikely that the person committing it will be fluent in the language." msgstr "" -"還有，記得用 Bugzilla 提交一個報告以通知大家；你已經寄出翻譯文件了， 還有，" -"若有人可以幫忙檢閱、複審文件的話，對翻譯品質較好， 因為這也有助於提升翻譯品質" -"的流暢度。" +"還有，記得用 Bugzilla 提交一個回報來通知大家你已經提交說明文件了， 還有，若" +"有人可以幫忙檢閱、複審文件的話，對翻譯品質較好， 因為這也有助於提升翻譯品質的" +"流暢度。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7139 +#: book.translate.xml:7122 msgid "" "Someone (probably the Documentation Project Manager, currently Documentation " "Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org) will then take your " "translation and confirm that it builds. In particular, the following things " "will be looked at:" msgstr "" -"最後，會有人(可能是文件計劃總管，或是 Documentation Engineering Team " -"doceng@FreeBSD.org 成員) 會檢閱你的翻譯文件，並確認是否可正常" -"編譯。此外，他們會特別注意下列幾點：" +"最後，會有人 (可能是文件計劃管理者，或是文件工程團隊 Documentation " +"Engineering Team doceng@FreeBSD.org 成員) 會檢閱你的翻譯文件，" +"並確認是否可正常編譯。此外，他們會特別注意下列幾點：" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7146 +#: book.translate.xml:7129 msgid "Do all your files use RCS strings (such as \"ID\")?" msgstr "你的檔案是否都有用 RCS tag (像是 \"ID\" 之類的)？" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7151 +#: book.translate.xml:7134 msgid "" "Does make all in the sv_SE.ISO8859-1 " "directory work correctly?" msgstr "" "sv_SE.ISO8859-1 是否可以順利make all " "編譯呢？" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7157 +#: book.translate.xml:7140 msgid "Does make install work correctly?" msgstr "make install 是否結果有正確" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7162 +#: book.translate.xml:7145 msgid "" "If there are any problems then whoever is looking at the submission will get " "back to you to work them out." msgstr "若有問題的話，那麼檢閱者會叮嚀你，來讓這些翻譯成果可以正確使用。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7165 +#: book.translate.xml:7148 msgid "" "If there are no problems your translation will be committed as soon as " "possible." -msgstr "若沒問題的話，那麼就會很快把你的翻譯成果 commit 進去了。" +msgstr "若沒問題的話，那麼就會很快把你的翻譯成果提交。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:7172 +#: book.translate.xml:7155 msgid "Can I include language or country specific text in my translation?" msgstr "可以加入某語系或某國家才有的東西到翻譯內容內嗎？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7177 +#: book.translate.xml:7160 msgid "We would prefer that you did not." msgstr "我們希望不要這麼做。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7179 +#: book.translate.xml:7162 msgid "" "For example, suppose that you are translating the Handbook to Korean, and " "want to include a section about retailers in Korea in your Handbook." msgstr "" -"舉例來說，假設你正準備把 Handbook 翻譯為韓文版， 並希望把韓國零售商也加到你翻" -"譯的 Handbook 韓文版內。" +"舉例來說，假設你正準備把使用手冊 (Handbook) 翻譯為韓文版， 並希望把韓國零售商" +"也加到你翻譯的韓文版使用手冊內。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7183 +#: book.translate.xml:7166 msgid "" "There is no real reason why that information should not be in the English " "(or German, or Spanish, or Japanese, or …) versions as well. It is feasible " "that an English speaker in Korea might try to pick up a copy of FreeBSD " "whilst over there. It also helps increase FreeBSD's perceived presence " "around the globe, which is not a bad thing." msgstr "" "我們想不出來有啥原因，為什麼不把這些資訊提供給英文版呢？(或是德文、西班牙文、" "日文等 …) 因為，有可能英語讀者跑去韓國時，會想買 FreeBSD 相關產品。 此外，這" "也可以提升 FreeBSD 的可見度，很顯然的，這並不是件壞事啊。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7191 +#: book.translate.xml:7174 msgid "" "If you have country specific information, please submit it as a change to " "the English Handbook (using Bugzilla) and then translate the change back to " "your language in the translated Handbook." msgstr "" -"若你有某國才有的資料，請(用 Bugzilla )提供給英文版 Handbook 以作為修訂 ，然" -"後再把英文版的修訂部分，翻為你要翻譯的 Handbook 吧。" +"若你有某國才有的資料，請提供給英文版使用手冊以作為修訂 (用 Bugzilla)，然後再" +"把英文版的修訂部分翻為你要翻譯的使用手冊吧。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7196 +#: book.translate.xml:7179 msgid "Thanks." msgstr "謝謝。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:7202 +#: book.translate.xml:7185 msgid "How should language specific characters be included?" msgstr "要怎麼把該語系特有的字元寫進去翻譯內容呢？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7207 +#: book.translate.xml:7190 msgid "" "Non-ASCII characters in the documentation should be included using SGML " "entities." msgstr "" -"文件內所有的非 ASCII(Non-ASCII) 字元，都要使用 SGML entities 才能寫進去。" +"說明文件內所有的非 ASCII (Non-ASCII) 的字元，都要使用 SGML entities 才能寫進" +"去。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7210 +#: book.translate.xml:7193 msgid "" "Briefly, these look like an ampersand (&), the name of the entity, and a " "semi-colon (;)." msgstr "" -"簡單來說，長相一開頭會是 and 符號(&)，然後是該 entity 名稱，最後接上分號" -"(;)。" +"簡單來說，長相一開頭會是 and 符號 (&)，然後是該 Entity 名稱，最後接上分" +"號 (;)。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7213 +#: book.translate.xml:7196 msgid "" "The entity names are defined in ISO8879, which is in the ports tree as " "textproc/iso8879." msgstr "" -"這些 entity 名稱都是 ISO8879 所制訂的，而 port tree 內則 textproc/" +"這些 Entity 名稱都是 ISO8879 所制訂的，其在 Port 樹內的 textproc/" "iso8879。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7216 +#: book.translate.xml:7199 msgid "A few examples include:" msgstr "以下舉一些例子：" #. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle -#: book.translate.xml:7219 +#: book.translate.xml:7202 msgid "Entity" -msgstr "Entity名稱" +msgstr "Entity 名稱" #. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle -#: book.translate.xml:7221 +#: book.translate.xml:7204 msgid "Appearance" -msgstr "實際樣子" +msgstr "外觀" #. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg -#: book.translate.xml:7226 +#: book.translate.xml:7209 msgid "&eacute;" msgstr "&eacute;" #. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg -#: book.translate.xml:7227 +#: book.translate.xml:7210 msgid "é" msgstr "é" #. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg -#: book.translate.xml:7228 +#: book.translate.xml:7211 msgid "Small e with an acute accent" -msgstr "小 e，並帶尖、重音(acute accent)" +msgstr "小 e，並帶尖、重音 (Acute accent)" #. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg -#: book.translate.xml:7232 +#: book.translate.xml:7215 msgid "&Eacute;" msgstr "&Eacute;" #. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg -#: book.translate.xml:7233 +#: book.translate.xml:7216 msgid "É" msgstr "É" #. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg -#: book.translate.xml:7234 +#: book.translate.xml:7217 msgid "Large E with an acute accent" -msgstr "大 E，並帶尖、重音(acute accent)" +msgstr "大 E，並帶尖、重音 (Acute accent)" #. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg -#: book.translate.xml:7238 +#: book.translate.xml:7221 msgid "&uuml;" msgstr "&uuml;" #. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg -#: book.translate.xml:7239 +#: book.translate.xml:7222 msgid "ü" msgstr "ü" #. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg -#: book.translate.xml:7240 +#: book.translate.xml:7223 msgid "Small u with an umlaut" -msgstr "小 u，並帶日耳曼語系中的母音變化(umlaut)" +msgstr "小 u，並帶日耳曼語系中的母音變化 (Umlaut)" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7244 +#: book.translate.xml:7227 msgid "" "After you have installed the iso8879 port, the files in /usr/local/" "share/xml/iso8879 contain the complete list." msgstr "" -"在裝了 iso8879 這個 port 之後，就可以在 /usr/local/share/xml/" +"在裝了 iso8879 這個 Port 之後，就可以在 /usr/local/share/xml/" "iso8879 找到這些的詳細列表。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:7252 +#: book.translate.xml:7235 msgid "Addressing the reader" msgstr "如何稱呼讀者呢？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7256 +#: book.translate.xml:7239 msgid "" "In the English documents, the reader is addressed as you, " "there is no formal/informal distinction as there is in some languages." msgstr "" "在英文文件內，讀者都是以 you 來稱呼，而有些語言並沒有正式/非正" "式的區隔。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7260 +#: book.translate.xml:7243 msgid "" "If you are translating to a language which does distinguish, use whichever " "form is typically used in other technical documentation in your language. If " "in doubt, use a mildly polite form." msgstr "" -"若你所要翻的語言可以區別這些差異，那麼請用該語系在一般技術文件上所使用的稱呼" -"吧。 如果容易造成困惑的話，那麼請改用較中性的稱呼來取代。" +"若你所要翻的語言可以區別這些差異，那麼請用該語系在一般技術說明文件上所使用的" +"稱呼吧。 如果容易造成困惑的話，那麼請改用較中性的稱呼來取代。" #. (itstool) path: question/para -#: book.translate.xml:7269 +#: book.translate.xml:7252 msgid "Do I need to include any additional information in my translations?" msgstr "翻譯成果內要不要附上一些其他訊息呢？" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7274 +#: book.translate.xml:7257 msgid "Yes." msgstr "要。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7276 +#: book.translate.xml:7259 msgid "" "The header of the English version of each document will look something like " "this:" msgstr "每份英文版原稿的開頭，通常會有像下面的內容：" #. (itstool) path: answer/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:7279 +#: book.translate.xml:7262 +#, no-wrap msgid "" "<!--\n" " The FreeBSD Documentation Project\n" "\n" " $FreeBSD$\n" "-->" msgstr "" -"<!--\n" -" The FreeBSD Documentation Project\n" -"\n" -" $FreeBSD$\n" -"-->" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7285 +#: book.translate.xml:7268 msgid "" "The exact boilerplate may change, but it will always include a $FreeBSD$ " "line and the phrase The FreeBSD Documentation Project. " -"Note that the $FreeBSD$ part is expanded automatically by Subversion, so it " +"Note that the $FreeBSD part is expanded automatically by Subversion, so it " "should be empty (just $FreeBSD$) for new files." msgstr "" -"實際上的內容可能稍有不同，但每份原稿都會附上 $FreeBSD$ 這一行以及" -"The FreeBSD Documentation Project 宣告。 請注意：$FreeBSD$ 開頭的這行是會由 Subversion 隨著每次異動而自動更改的， 所以，新檔案的話請保持" -"原狀(也就是只要寫 $FreeBSD$ 就好了)。" +"實際上的內容可能稍有不同，但每份原稿都會附上 $FreeBSD$ 這一行以及 " +"The FreeBSD Documentation Project 宣告。 請注意：$FreeBSD" +"$ 開頭的這行是會由 Subversion 隨著每次異動而自動更改的，所以新檔案的話請保持" +"原狀 (也就是只要寫 $FreeBSD$ 就好了)。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7293 +#: book.translate.xml:7276 msgid "" "Your translated documents should include their own $FreeBSD$ line, and " "change the FreeBSD Documentation Project line to " "The FreeBSD language Documentation " "Project." msgstr "" "翻譯文件中，必須都要有 $FreeBSD$ 這行，並且把 FreeBSD " -"Documentation Project 這行改為 The FreeBSD language Documentation Project。" +"Documentation Project 這行改為 The FreeBSD " +"language Documentation Project。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7299 +#: book.translate.xml:7282 msgid "" "In addition, you should add a third line which indicates which revision of " "the English text this is based on." msgstr "" "此外，還必須加上第三行來指出你所翻譯的，到底是以英文版原稿的哪一版本為母本所" "做的翻譯。" #. (itstool) path: answer/para -#: book.translate.xml:7302 +#: book.translate.xml:7285 msgid "So, the Spanish version of this file might start:" -msgstr "因此呢，西班牙文版(Spanish)的檔案開頭應該是長像這樣：" +msgstr "因此呢，西班牙文版 (Spanish) 的檔案開頭應該是長像這樣：" #. (itstool) path: answer/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:7304 +#: book.translate.xml:7287 +#, no-wrap msgid "" "<!--\n" " The FreeBSD Spanish Documentation Project\n" "\n" " $FreeBSD$\n" " Original revision: r38674\n" "-->" msgstr "" -"<!--\n" -" The FreeBSD Spanish Documentation Project\n" -"\n" -" $FreeBSD$\n" -" Original revision: r38674\n" -"-->" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title -#: book.translate.xml:7322 +#: book.translate.xml:7305 msgid "PO Translations" msgstr "PO 翻譯" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7327 +#: book.translate.xml:7310 msgid "" "The GNU gettext system offers translators " "an easy way to create and maintain translations of documents. Translatable " "strings are extracted from the original document into a PO (Portable Object) file. Translated versions of the strings are " "entered with a separate editor. The strings can be used directly or built " "into a complete translated version of the original document." msgstr "" "GNU gettext 系統提供翻譯者一個簡單的方" -"法來建立和維護文件的翻譯。翻譯的字串從原始文件題取出來到POPO (Portable Object) 檔。字串的翻譯用另外的編輯器輸入。翻譯的字串可以" "直接使用，或是編譯成原始文件的完整翻譯版本。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7340 +#: book.translate.xml:7323 msgid "" "The procedure shown in is assumed " "to have already been performed, but the TRANSLATOR option " "must be enabled in the textproc/docproj " "port. If that option was not enabled, display the options menu and enable " "it, then reinstall the port:" msgstr "" -"在 的步驟還必須打開 textproc/docproj port TRANSLATOR 選項。" -"如果沒有打開這個選項，請打開選項後，重新安裝 port。" +"我們會假設您已做過在 中的步驟，除此" +"之外還必須打開 textproc/docproj Port 中的 " +"TRANSLATOR 選項。如果沒有打開這個選項，請打開選項後重新安" +"裝 Port。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7348 +#: book.translate.xml:7331 #, no-wrap msgid "" "# cd /usr/ports/textproc/docproj\n" "# make config\n" "# make clean deinstall install clean" msgstr "" "# cd /usr/ports/textproc/docproj\n" "# make config\n" "# make clean deinstall install clean" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7352 +#: book.translate.xml:7335 msgid "" "This example shows the creation of a Spanish translation of the short Leap Seconds article." msgstr "" -"這個範例示範如何建立Leap Seconds 短文的西班牙文翻譯" +"這個範例示範如何建立 Leap Seconds 短文的西班牙文翻譯。" #. (itstool) path: procedure/title -#: book.translate.xml:7357 +#: book.translate.xml:7340 msgid "Install a PO Editor" msgstr "安裝 PO 編輯器" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7360 +#: book.translate.xml:7343 msgid "" "A PO editor is needed to edit translation files. This " "example uses editors/poedit." msgstr "" -"編輯翻譯檔案需要PO編輯器。這個範例使用PO 編輯器。這個範例使用 editors/poedit。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7364 +#: book.translate.xml:7347 #, no-wrap msgid "" "# cd /usr/ports/editors/poedit\n" "# make install clean" msgstr "" "# cd /usr/ports/editors/poedit\n" "# make install clean" #. (itstool) path: procedure/title -#: book.translate.xml:7370 +#: book.translate.xml:7353 msgid "Initial Setup" msgstr "初始設定" #. (itstool) path: procedure/para -#: book.translate.xml:7372 +#: book.translate.xml:7355 msgid "" "When a new translation is first created, the directory structure and " "Makefile must be created or copied from the English " "original:" msgstr "" "第一次建立新的翻譯時，目錄結構和 Makefile 必須建立或是從" "英文版複製過來。" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7377 +#: book.translate.xml:7360 msgid "" "Create a directory for the new translation. The English article source is in " "~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/. The " "Spanish translation will go in ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-" "seconds/. The path is the same except for the name of the " "language directory." msgstr "" "建立新翻譯的目錄。英文文章原始碼位於 ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/" "articles/leap-seconds/ 。西班牙文翻譯將會放在 ~/doc/" "es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/ 。除了語系目錄的名稱外，其" "他路徑相同。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7385 +#: book.translate.xml:7368 #, no-wrap msgid "% svn mkdir --parents ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/" msgstr "% svn mkdir --parents ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7389 +#: book.translate.xml:7372 msgid "" "Copy the Makefile from the original document into the " "translation directory:" msgstr "從原始文件處將 Makefile 複製到翻譯目錄。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7392 +#: book.translate.xml:7375 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/Makefile \\\n" " ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/" msgstr "" "% svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/Makefile \\\n" " ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/" #. (itstool) path: procedure/title -#: book.translate.xml:7398 +#: book.translate.xml:7381 msgid "Translation" msgstr "翻譯" #. (itstool) path: procedure/para -#: book.translate.xml:7400 +#: book.translate.xml:7383 msgid "" "Translating a document consists of two steps: extracting translatable " "strings from the original document, and entering translations for those " "strings. These steps are repeated until the translator feels that enough of " "the document has been translated to produce a usable translated document." msgstr "" "翻譯文件公有兩個步驟：將可翻譯的字串從原始文件提去出來，然後翻譯這些字串。重" "複這些步驟，直到翻譯者認為文件的翻譯部份已經足夠用來產生可讀的翻譯文件。" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7408 +#: book.translate.xml:7391 msgid "" "Extract the translatable strings from the original English version into a " "PO file:" msgstr "從英文的原始文件提取字串到 PO 檔：" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7411 +#: book.translate.xml:7394 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/\n" "% make po" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/\n" "% make po" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7416 +#: book.translate.xml:7399 msgid "" "Use a PO editor to enter translations in the PO file. There are several different editors available. " "poedit from editors/poedit is shown here." msgstr "" "使用 PO 編輯器將翻譯輸入 PO 檔。有幾個" "不同的編輯器可以使用。這裡用的是 editors/poedit 的 poedit 。" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7422 +#: book.translate.xml:7405 msgid "" "The PO file name is the two-character language code " "followed by an underline and a two-character region code. For Spanish, the " "file name is es_ES.po." msgstr "" "PO 檔名是兩個字元的語系碼後面接底線和兩個字元的區域碼。以" "西班牙語來說，檔名是 es_ES.po 。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7427 book.translate.xml:7891 +#: book.translate.xml:7410 book.translate.xml:7874 #, no-wrap msgid "% poedit es_ES.po" msgstr "% poedit es_ES.po" #. (itstool) path: procedure/title -#: book.translate.xml:7432 +#: book.translate.xml:7415 msgid "Generating a Translated Document" msgstr "產生翻譯文件" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7435 +#: book.translate.xml:7418 msgid "Generate the translated document:" msgstr "產生翻譯文件" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7437 +#: book.translate.xml:7420 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/\n" "% make tran" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/\n" "% make tran" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7440 +#: book.translate.xml:7423 msgid "" "The name of the generated document matches the name of the English original, " "usually article.xml for articles or book.xml for books." msgstr "" "產生的文件名稱與英文原始文件名稱相符，文章通常是 article.xml ，書籍是 book.xml 。" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7447 +#: book.translate.xml:7430 msgid "" "Check the generated file by rendering it to HTML and " "viewing it with a web browser:" msgstr "" "可以轉換成 HTML 來檢查產生的檔案，並用瀏覽器來察看。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7451 +#: book.translate.xml:7434 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% make FORMATS=html\n" "% firefox article.html" msgstr "" "% make FORMATS=html\n" "% firefox article.html" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:7458 +#: book.translate.xml:7441 msgid "Creating New Translations" msgstr "建立新翻譯" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7460 +#: book.translate.xml:7443 msgid "" "The first step to creating a new translated document is locating or creating " "a directory to hold it. FreeBSD puts translated documents in a subdirectory " "named for their language and region in the format " "lang_REGION. lang is a two-character lowercase " "code. It is followed by an underscore character and then the two-character " "uppercase REGION code." msgstr "" "建立新翻譯文件的第一步是找到或建立一個目錄來放它。FreeBSD 將翻譯文件放在子目" -"錄，用語系和區域以語系_區域" -"來命名。語系 是小寫的兩個" -"字元碼。接著是底線和兩個字元的大寫 REGION 碼。" +"錄，用語系和區域以 語系 (lang)_區域 (REGION) 來命名。" +"語系 (lang) 是小寫的兩個字元碼，接著是底線和兩個字" +"元的大寫 REGION 碼。" #. (itstool) path: table/title -#: book.translate.xml:7471 +#: book.translate.xml:7454 msgid "Language Names" msgstr "語系名稱" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7476 +#: book.translate.xml:7459 msgid "Language" msgstr "語言" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7477 +#: book.translate.xml:7460 msgid "Region" msgstr "地區" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7478 +#: book.translate.xml:7461 msgid "Translated Directory Name" msgstr "翻譯目錄名稱" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7479 +#: book.translate.xml:7462 msgid "PO File Name" msgstr "PO 檔名稱" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7480 +#: book.translate.xml:7463 msgid "Character Set" msgstr "字元集" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7486 +#: book.translate.xml:7469 msgid "English" msgstr "英文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7487 +#: book.translate.xml:7470 msgid "United States" msgstr "美國" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7488 +#: book.translate.xml:7471 msgid "en_US.ISO8859-1" msgstr "en_US.ISO8859-1" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7489 +#: book.translate.xml:7472 msgid "en_US.po" msgstr "en_US.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7490 book.translate.xml:7506 book.translate.xml:7514 -#: book.translate.xml:7530 book.translate.xml:7538 book.translate.xml:7586 -#: book.translate.xml:7594 book.translate.xml:7610 +#: book.translate.xml:7473 book.translate.xml:7489 book.translate.xml:7497 +#: book.translate.xml:7513 book.translate.xml:7521 book.translate.xml:7569 +#: book.translate.xml:7577 book.translate.xml:7593 msgid "ISO 8859-1" msgstr "ISO 8859-1" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7494 +#: book.translate.xml:7477 msgid "Bengali" msgstr "孟加拉文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7495 +#: book.translate.xml:7478 msgid "Bangladesh" msgstr "孟加拉" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7496 +#: book.translate.xml:7479 msgid "bn_BD.UTF-8" msgstr "bn_BD.UTF-8" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7497 +#: book.translate.xml:7480 msgid "bn_BD.po" msgstr "bn_BD.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7498 book.translate.xml:7570 book.translate.xml:7578 -#: book.translate.xml:7642 book.translate.xml:7650 +#: book.translate.xml:7481 book.translate.xml:7553 book.translate.xml:7561 +#: book.translate.xml:7625 book.translate.xml:7633 msgid "UTF-8" msgstr "UTF-8" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7502 +#: book.translate.xml:7485 msgid "Danish" msgstr "丹麥文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7503 +#: book.translate.xml:7486 msgid "Denmark" msgstr "丹麥" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7504 +#: book.translate.xml:7487 msgid "da_DK.ISO8859-1" msgstr "da_DK.ISO8859-1" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7505 +#: book.translate.xml:7488 msgid "da_DK.po" msgstr "da_DK.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7510 +#: book.translate.xml:7493 msgid "German" msgstr "德文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7511 +#: book.translate.xml:7494 msgid "Germany" msgstr "德國" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7512 +#: book.translate.xml:7495 msgid "de_DE.ISO8859-1" msgstr "de_DE.ISO8859-1" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7513 +#: book.translate.xml:7496 msgid "de_DE.po" msgstr "de_DE.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7518 +#: book.translate.xml:7501 msgid "Greek" msgstr "希臘文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7519 +#: book.translate.xml:7502 msgid "Greece" msgstr "希臘" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7520 +#: book.translate.xml:7503 msgid "el_GR.ISO8859-7" msgstr "el_GR.ISO8859-7" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7521 +#: book.translate.xml:7504 msgid "el_GR.po" msgstr "el_GR.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7522 +#: book.translate.xml:7505 msgid "ISO 8859-7" msgstr "ISO 8859-7" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7526 +#: book.translate.xml:7509 msgid "Spanish" msgstr "西班牙文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7527 +#: book.translate.xml:7510 msgid "Spain" msgstr "西班牙" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7528 +#: book.translate.xml:7511 msgid "es_ES.ISO8859-1" msgstr "es_ES.ISO8859-1" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7529 +#: book.translate.xml:7512 msgid "es_ES.po" msgstr "es_ES.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7534 +#: book.translate.xml:7517 msgid "French" msgstr "法文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7535 +#: book.translate.xml:7518 msgid "France" msgstr "法國" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7536 +#: book.translate.xml:7519 msgid "fr_FR.ISO8859-1" msgstr "fr_FR.ISO8859-1" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7537 +#: book.translate.xml:7520 msgid "fr_FR.po" msgstr "fr_FR.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7542 +#: book.translate.xml:7525 msgid "Hungarian" msgstr "匈牙利文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7543 +#: book.translate.xml:7526 msgid "Hungary" msgstr "匈牙利" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7544 +#: book.translate.xml:7527 msgid "hu_HU.ISO8859-2" msgstr "hu_HU.ISO8859-2" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7545 +#: book.translate.xml:7528 msgid "hu_HU.po" msgstr "hu_HU.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7546 book.translate.xml:7602 book.translate.xml:7626 +#: book.translate.xml:7529 book.translate.xml:7585 book.translate.xml:7609 msgid "ISO 8859-2" msgstr "ISO 8859-2" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7550 +#: book.translate.xml:7533 msgid "Italian" msgstr "義大利文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7551 +#: book.translate.xml:7534 msgid "Italy" msgstr "義大利" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7552 +#: book.translate.xml:7535 msgid "it_IT.ISO8859-15" msgstr "it_IT.ISO8859-15" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7553 +#: book.translate.xml:7536 msgid "it_IT.po" msgstr "it_IT.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7554 +#: book.translate.xml:7537 msgid "ISO 8859-15" msgstr "ISO 8859-15" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7558 +#: book.translate.xml:7541 msgid "Japanese" msgstr "日文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7559 +#: book.translate.xml:7542 msgid "Japan" msgstr "日本" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7560 +#: book.translate.xml:7543 msgid "ja_JP.eucJP" msgstr "ja_JP.eucJP" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7561 +#: book.translate.xml:7544 msgid "ja_JP.po" msgstr "ja_JP.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7562 +#: book.translate.xml:7545 msgid "EUC JP" msgstr "EUC JP" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7566 +#: book.translate.xml:7549 msgid "Korean" msgstr "韓文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7567 +#: book.translate.xml:7550 msgid "Korea" msgstr "韓國" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7568 +#: book.translate.xml:7551 msgid "ko_KR.UTF-8" msgstr "ko_KR.UTF-8" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7569 +#: book.translate.xml:7552 msgid "ko_KR.po" msgstr "ko_KR.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7574 +#: book.translate.xml:7557 msgid "Mongolian" msgstr "蒙古文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7575 +#: book.translate.xml:7558 msgid "Mongolia" msgstr "蒙古" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7576 +#: book.translate.xml:7559 msgid "mn_MN.UTF-8" msgstr "mn_MN.UTF-8" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7577 +#: book.translate.xml:7560 msgid "mn_MN.po" msgstr "mn_MN.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7582 +#: book.translate.xml:7565 msgid "Dutch" msgstr "荷蘭文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7583 +#: book.translate.xml:7566 msgid "Netherlands" msgstr "荷蘭" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7584 +#: book.translate.xml:7567 msgid "nl_NL.ISO8859-1" msgstr "nl_NL.ISO8859-1" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7585 +#: book.translate.xml:7568 msgid "nl_NL.po" msgstr "nl_NL.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7590 +#: book.translate.xml:7573 msgid "Norwegian" msgstr "挪威文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7591 +#: book.translate.xml:7574 msgid "Norway" msgstr "挪威" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7592 +#: book.translate.xml:7575 msgid "no_NO.ISO8859-1" msgstr "no_NO.ISO8859-1" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7593 +#: book.translate.xml:7576 msgid "no_NO.po" msgstr "no_NO.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7598 +#: book.translate.xml:7581 msgid "Polish" msgstr "波蘭文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7599 +#: book.translate.xml:7582 msgid "Poland" msgstr "波蘭" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7600 +#: book.translate.xml:7583 msgid "pl_PL.ISO8859-2" msgstr "pl_PL.ISO8859-2" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7601 +#: book.translate.xml:7584 msgid "pl_PL.po" msgstr "pl_PL.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7606 +#: book.translate.xml:7589 msgid "Portuguese" msgstr "葡萄牙文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7607 +#: book.translate.xml:7590 msgid "Brazil" msgstr "巴西" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7608 +#: book.translate.xml:7591 msgid "pt_BR.ISO8859-1" msgstr "pt_BR.ISO8859-1" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7609 +#: book.translate.xml:7592 msgid "pt_BR.po" msgstr "pt_BR.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7614 +#: book.translate.xml:7597 msgid "Russian" msgstr "俄文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7615 +#: book.translate.xml:7598 msgid "Russia" msgstr "俄羅斯" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7616 +#: book.translate.xml:7599 msgid "ru_RU.KOI8-R" msgstr "ru_RU.KOI8-R" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7617 +#: book.translate.xml:7600 msgid "ru_RU.po" msgstr "ru_RU.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7618 +#: book.translate.xml:7601 msgid "KOI8-R" msgstr "KOI8-R" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7622 +#: book.translate.xml:7605 msgid "Serbian" msgstr "賽爾維亞" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7623 +#: book.translate.xml:7606 msgid "Serbia" msgstr "賽爾維亞文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7624 +#: book.translate.xml:7607 msgid "sr_YU.ISO8859-2" msgstr "sr_YU.ISO8859-2" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7625 +#: book.translate.xml:7608 msgid "sr_YU.po" msgstr "sr_YU.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7630 +#: book.translate.xml:7613 msgid "Turkish" msgstr "土耳其文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7631 +#: book.translate.xml:7614 msgid "Turkey" msgstr "土耳其" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7632 +#: book.translate.xml:7615 msgid "tr_TR.ISO8859-9" msgstr "tr_TR.ISO8859-9" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7633 +#: book.translate.xml:7616 msgid "tr_TR.po" msgstr "tr_TR.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7634 +#: book.translate.xml:7617 msgid "ISO 8859-9" msgstr "ISO 8859-9" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7638 book.translate.xml:7646 +#: book.translate.xml:7621 book.translate.xml:7629 msgid "Chinese" msgstr "中文" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7639 +#: book.translate.xml:7622 msgid "China" msgstr "中國" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7640 +#: book.translate.xml:7623 msgid "zh_CN.UTF-8" msgstr "zh_CN.UTF-8" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7641 +#: book.translate.xml:7624 msgid "zh_CN.po" msgstr "zh_CN.po" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7647 +#: book.translate.xml:7630 msgid "Taiwan" msgstr "台灣" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7648 +#: book.translate.xml:7631 msgid "zh_TW.UTF-8" msgstr "zh_TW.UTF-8" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:7649 +#: book.translate.xml:7632 msgid "zh_TW.po" msgstr "zh_TW.po" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7656 +#: book.translate.xml:7639 msgid "" "The translations are in subdirectories of the main documentation directory, " "here assumed to be ~/doc/ as shown in . For example, German translations are located in " "~/doc/de_DE.ISO8859-1/, and French translations are in " "~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/." msgstr "" -"翻譯位於主要文件目錄的子目錄，這裡假設如 所示，是 ~/doc/。例如德文位於 ~/doc/" +"翻譯位於主要說明文件目錄的子目錄，這裡假設如 所示，是 ~/doc/。例如德文位於 ~/doc/" "de_DE.ISO8859-1/， 法文位於 ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7665 +#: book.translate.xml:7648 msgid "" "Each language directory contains separate subdirectories named for the type " "of documents, usually articles/ and books/." msgstr "" "每個語系目錄包含不同文件類型的子目錄，通常是 articles/ " "和 books/。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7670 +#: book.translate.xml:7653 msgid "" "Combining these directory names gives the complete path to an article or " "book. For example, the French translation of the NanoBSD article is in " "~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/, and the " "Mongolian translation of the Handbook is in ~/doc/mn_MN.UTF-8/" "books/handbook/." msgstr "" "將目錄名稱組合起來就是文章或書的完整路徑。例如，NanoBSD 文章的法語翻譯在 " "~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/ 。而使用手冊的蒙" "古文翻譯在~/doc/mn_MN.UTF-8/books/handbook/ 。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7677 +#: book.translate.xml:7660 msgid "" "A new language directory must be created when translating a document to a " "new language. If the language directory already exists, only a subdirectory " "in the articles/ or books/ " "directory is needed." msgstr "" "當翻譯到一個新語系時必須建立一個新的語系目錄。如果語系目錄已經存在，那只需要" "有 articles/ 或 books/ 的子目錄。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7683 +#: book.translate.xml:7666 msgid "" "FreeBSD documentation builds are controlled by a Makefile in the same directory. With simple articles, the " "Makefile can often just be copied verbatim from the " "original English directory. The translation process combines multiple " "separate book.xml and chapter.xml " "files in books into a single file, so the Makefile for " "book translations must be copied and modified." msgstr "" -"FreeBSD 文件的編譯是由同一個目錄的 Makefile 控制。簡單的" -"文章可以從原始的英語目錄直接複製 Makefile 過來。書籍的翻" -"譯流程結合多個獨立的 book.xml 和 chapter.xml 成為一個檔案， 所以書籍翻譯的 Makefile 必須複" -"製並修改。" +"FreeBSD 說明文件的編譯是由同一個目錄的 Makefile 控制。簡" +"單的文章可以從原始的英語目錄直接複製 Makefile 過來。書籍" +"的翻譯流程結合多個獨立的 book.xml 和 chapter." +"xml 成為一個檔案， 所以書籍翻譯的 Makefile 必" +"須複製並修改。" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:7694 +#: book.translate.xml:7677 msgid "Creating a Spanish Translation of the Porter's Handbook" msgstr "建立 Porter 手冊的西班牙語翻譯" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:7697 +#: book.translate.xml:7680 msgid "" "Create a new Spanish translation of the Porter's Handbook. The " "original is a book in ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook/" "." msgstr "" -"建立Porter 手冊的西班牙文翻譯。原文是位於 ~/doc/" +"建立 Porter 手冊 的西班牙文翻譯。原文是位於 ~/doc/" "en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook/ 的書籍。" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7704 +#: book.translate.xml:7687 msgid "" "The Spanish language books directory ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/ already exists, so only a new subdirectory for the Porter's " "Handbook is needed:" msgstr "" "西班牙文 books 目錄 ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/ 已經存" "在，所以只要建立 Porter 手冊的子目錄：" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7708 +#: book.translate.xml:7691 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/\n" "% svn mkdir porters-handbook\n" "A porters-handbook" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/\n" "% svn mkdir porters-handbook\n" "A porters-handbook" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7714 +#: book.translate.xml:7697 msgid "Copy the Makefile from the original book:" msgstr "從原始文件的目錄複製 Makefile ：" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7717 +#: book.translate.xml:7700 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook\n" "% svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook/Makefile .\n" "A Makefile" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook\n" "% svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook/Makefile .\n" "A Makefile" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7721 +#: book.translate.xml:7704 msgid "" "Modify the contents of the Makefile to only expect a " "single book.xml:" msgstr "" "修改 Makefile 內容以產生單一的 book.xml：" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:7725 +#: book.translate.xml:7708 +#, no-wrap msgid "" "#\n" "# $FreeBSD$\n" "#\n" "# Build the FreeBSD Porter's Handbook.\n" "#\n" "\n" "MAINTAINER=doc@FreeBSD.org\n" "\n" "DOC?= book\n" "\n" "FORMATS?= html-split\n" "\n" "INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz\n" "INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=\n" "\n" "# XML content\n" "SRCS= book.xml\n" "\n" "# Images from the cross-document image library\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/1.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/2.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/3.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/4.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/5.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/6.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/7.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/8.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/9.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/10.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/11.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/12.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/13.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/14.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/15.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/16.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/17.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/18.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/19.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/20.png\n" "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/21.png\n" "\n" "URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..\n" "DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..\n" "\n" ".include \"${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk\"" msgstr "" -"#\n" -"# $FreeBSD$\n" -"#\n" -"# Build the FreeBSD Porter's Handbook。\n" -"#\n" -"\n" -"MAINTAINER=doc@FreeBSD.org\n" -"\n" -"DOC?= book\n" -"\n" -"FORMATS?= html-split\n" -"\n" -"INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz\n" -"INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=\n" -"\n" -"# XML content\n" -"SRCS= book.xml\n" -"\n" -"# Images from the cross-document image library\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/1.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/2.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/3.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/4.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/5.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/6.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/7.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/8.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/9.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/10.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/11.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/12.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/13.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/14.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/15.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/16.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/17.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/18.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/19.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/20.png\n" -"IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/21.png\n" -"\n" -"URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..\n" -"DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..\n" -"\n" -".include \"${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk\"" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7771 +#: book.translate.xml:7754 msgid "" "Now the document structure is ready for the translator to begin translating " "with make po." msgstr "" "現在文件結構已經準備好讓翻譯者執行 make po 開始翻譯。" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:7779 +#: book.translate.xml:7762 msgid "" "Creating a French Translation of the PGP Keys Article" msgstr "建立 PGP 金鑰文章的法語翻譯。" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:7782 +#: book.translate.xml:7765 msgid "" "Create a new French translation of the PGP Keys article. The original is an article in ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/" "articles/pgpkeys/." msgstr "" "建立 PGP 金鑰文章的法文翻譯。原文是位於 " +"pgpkeys\">PGP 金鑰文章 的法文翻譯。原文是位於 " "~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys/ 的文章。" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7789 +#: book.translate.xml:7772 msgid "" "The French language article directory ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/" "articles/ already exists, so only a new subdirectory for the " "PGP Keys article is needed:" msgstr "" -"法文 article 目錄 ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/ 已經" -"存在，所以只要建立 PGP 金鑰文章的子目錄：" +"法文文章目錄 ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/ 已經存在，" +"所以只要建立 PGP 金鑰文章的子目錄：" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7793 +#: book.translate.xml:7776 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/\n" "% svn mkdir pgpkeys\n" "A pgpkeys" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/\n" "% svn mkdir pgpkeys\n" "A pgpkeys" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7799 +#: book.translate.xml:7782 msgid "Copy the Makefile from the original article:" msgstr "從原始文件的目錄複製 Makefile ：" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7802 +#: book.translate.xml:7785 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys\n" "% svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys/Makefile .\n" "A Makefile" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys\n" "% svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys/Makefile .\n" "A Makefile" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7806 +#: book.translate.xml:7789 msgid "" "Check the contents of the Makefile. Because this is a " "simple article, in this case the Makefile can be used " "unchanged. The $FreeBSD...$ version string on the second " "line will be replaced by the version control system when this file is " "committed." msgstr "" "檢查 Makefile 的內容。因為這是簡單的文章，此例的 " "Makefile 不用修改。第二行的 $FreeBSD...$ 版本字串將會在檔案提交時被版本控制系統替換掉。" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:7813 +#: book.translate.xml:7796 +#, no-wrap msgid "" "#\n" "# $FreeBSD$\n" "#\n" "# Article: PGP Keys\n" "\n" "DOC?= article\n" "\n" "FORMATS?= html\n" "WITH_ARTICLE_TOC?= YES\n" "\n" "INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz\n" "INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=\n" "\n" "SRCS= article.xml\n" "\n" "# To build with just key fingerprints, set FINGERPRINTS_ONLY.\n" "\n" "URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..\n" "DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..\n" "\n" ".include \"${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk\"" msgstr "" -"#\n" -"# $FreeBSD$\n" -"#\n" -"# Article：PGP Keys\n" -"\n" -"DOC?= article\n" -"\n" -"FORMATS?= html\n" -"WITH_ARTICLE_TOC?= YES\n" -"\n" -"INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz\n" -"INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=\n" -"\n" -"SRCS= article.xml\n" -"\n" -"# To build with just key fingerprints, set FINGERPRINTS_ONLY。\n" -"\n" -"URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..\n" -"DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..\n" -"\n" -".include \"${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk\"" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7835 +#: book.translate.xml:7818 msgid "" "With the document structure complete, the PO file can be " "created with make po." msgstr "" "文章結構處理好後， 可以執行建立 make po 建立 " "PO 檔。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:7844 +#: book.translate.xml:7827 msgid "Translating" msgstr "翻譯" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7846 +#: book.translate.xml:7829 msgid "" "The gettext system greatly reduces the number of " "things that must be tracked by a translator. Strings to be translated are " "extracted from the original document into a PO file. Then " "a PO editor is used to enter the translated versions of " "each string." msgstr "" -"gettext系統大幅減少翻譯者要追蹤的事情。 字串從原始" -"文件提取到PO 檔。再用 PO 檔編輯器輸入字" -"串的翻譯。" +"gettext 系統大幅減少翻譯者要追蹤的事情。 字串從原" +"始文件提取到 PO 檔。再用 PO 檔編輯器輸" +"入字串的翻譯。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7853 +#: book.translate.xml:7836 msgid "" "The FreeBSD PO translation system does not overwrite " "PO files, so the extraction step can be run at any time " "to update the PO file." msgstr "" "FreeBSD PO 翻譯系統不會覆蓋掉 PO 檔。所" "以提取步驟可以在任何時候重複執行來更新 PO 檔。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7858 +#: book.translate.xml:7841 msgid "" "A PO editor is used to edit the file. editors/poedit is shown in these examples because it is simple " "and has minimal requirements. Other PO editors offer " "features to make the job of translating easier. The Ports Collection offers " "several of these editors, including devel/" "gtranslator." msgstr "" "用 PO 檔編輯器來編輯檔案。此例是用 editors/poedit，因為它很簡單而且系統需求低。其他的 PO 檔編輯器提供一些特點，能使翻譯工作更輕鬆。Ports 裡有數個編輯器，包" -"括 devel/gtranslator 。" +"acronym> 檔編輯器提供一些特點，能使翻譯工作更輕鬆。Port 套件集裡有數個編輯" +"器，包括 devel/gtranslator 。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:7866 +#: book.translate.xml:7849 msgid "" "It is important to preserve the PO file. It contains all " "of the work that translators have done." msgstr "保留 PO 檔是很重要的。它包含所有的翻譯成果。" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:7870 +#: book.translate.xml:7853 msgid "Translating the Porter's Handbook to Spanish" msgstr "翻譯 Porter 手冊到西班牙文" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:7872 +#: book.translate.xml:7855 msgid "Enter Spanish translations of the contents of the Porter's Handbook." msgstr "輸入 Porter 手冊的西班牙文內容" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7877 +#: book.translate.xml:7860 msgid "" "Change to the Spanish Porter's Handbook directory and update the " "PO file. The generated PO file is " "called es_ES.po as shown in ." msgstr "" "切換到西班牙文 Porter 手冊的目錄並更新 PO 檔。產生的 " "PO 檔如 所示，名叫 es_ES.po 。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:7883 +#: book.translate.xml:7866 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook\n" "% make po" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook\n" "% make po" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:7888 +#: book.translate.xml:7871 msgid "Enter translations using a PO editor:" msgstr "使用 PO 檔編輯器輸入翻譯：" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:7898 +#: book.translate.xml:7881 msgid "Tips for Translators" msgstr "給翻譯者的提示" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:7901 book.translate.xml:7907 +#: book.translate.xml:7884 book.translate.xml:7890 msgid "Preserving XML Tags" msgstr "保留 XML 標籤" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:7903 +#: book.translate.xml:7886 msgid "" "Preserve XML tags that are shown in the English original." -msgstr "" +msgstr "保留在英文原文的 XML 標籤。" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:7909 +#: book.translate.xml:7892 msgid "English original:" msgstr "英文原文：" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:7911 +#: book.translate.xml:7894 #, no-wrap msgid "If acronymNTPacronym is not being used" msgstr "If acronymNTPacronym is not being used" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:7913 +#: book.translate.xml:7896 msgid "Spanish translation:" msgstr "西班牙文翻譯：" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:7915 +#: book.translate.xml:7898 #, no-wrap msgid "Si acronymNTPacronym no se utiliza" msgstr "Si acronymNTPacronym no se utiliza" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:7920 +#: book.translate.xml:7903 msgid "Preserving Spaces" msgstr "保留空白" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:7922 +#: book.translate.xml:7905 msgid "" "Preserve existing spaces at the beginning and end of strings to be " "translated. The translated version must have these spaces also." -msgstr "保留要翻譯字串前後的空白。翻譯的版本也要有這些空白。" +msgstr "保留要翻譯字串前後的空白，翻譯過的版本也需要有這些空白。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:7928 +#: book.translate.xml:7911 msgid "Verbatim Tags" msgstr "不要翻譯的標籤" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:7930 +#: book.translate.xml:7913 msgid "The contents of some tags should be copied verbatim, not translated:" msgstr "有些標籤的內容要一字不差地保留，不要翻譯。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7935 +#: book.translate.xml:7918 msgid "citerefentry" msgstr "citerefentry" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7939 +#: book.translate.xml:7922 msgid "command" msgstr "command" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7943 +#: book.translate.xml:7926 msgid "filename" msgstr "filename" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7947 +#: book.translate.xml:7930 msgid "literal" msgstr "literal" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7951 +#: book.translate.xml:7934 msgid "manvolnum" msgstr "manvolnum" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7955 +#: book.translate.xml:7938 msgid "orgname" msgstr "orgname" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7959 +#: book.translate.xml:7942 msgid "package" msgstr "package" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7963 +#: book.translate.xml:7946 msgid "programlisting" msgstr "programlisting" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7967 +#: book.translate.xml:7950 msgid "prompt" msgstr "prompt" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7971 +#: book.translate.xml:7954 msgid "refentrytitle" msgstr "refentrytitle" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7975 +#: book.translate.xml:7958 msgid "screen" msgstr "screen" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7979 +#: book.translate.xml:7962 msgid "userinput" msgstr "userinput" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:7983 +#: book.translate.xml:7966 msgid "varname" msgstr "varname" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:7989 +#: book.translate.xml:7972 msgid "$FreeBSD$ Strings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "$FreeBSD$ 字串" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:7992 -#, fuzzy +#: book.translate.xml:7975 msgid "" "The $FreeBSD$ version strings used in files require special handling. In " "examples like , these " "strings are not meant to be expanded. The English documents use " "&dollar; entities to avoid including actual literal " "dollar signs in the file:" msgstr "" -"檔案裡的 $FreeBSD$ 版本字串需要特別處理。例如 裡，這些字串不是要被展開 (expanded)。英文文" -"件使用 &dollar; entities 來避免使用實際的金錢符號。" +"在檔案中使用到的 $FreeBSD$ 版本字串都需要特別處理，例如在 ，使用這些字串的用意並非要展開成版本。英文的" +"說明文件會使用 &dollar; Entity 來避免在檔案中用到錢字" +"符號：" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:7999 book.translate.xml:8017 +#: book.translate.xml:7982 book.translate.xml:8000 #, no-wrap msgid "&dollar;FreeBSD&dollar;" msgstr "&dollar;FreeBSD&dollar;" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8001 +#: book.translate.xml:7984 msgid "" "The &dollar; entities are not seen as dollar signs by " "the version control system and so the string is not expanded into a version " "string." msgstr "" "版本控制符號不會把 &dollar; entities 看成金錢符號，所" "以不會把字串展開成版本字串。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8005 +#: book.translate.xml:7988 msgid "" "When a PO file is created, the &dollar; entities used in examples are replaced with actual dollar signs. " "The resulting literal $FreeBSD$ string will be wrongly " "expanded by the version control system when the file is committed." msgstr "" -"當 PO 檔建立後，範例中的 &dollar; " -"entities 被實際的金錢符號取代。當檔案提交時，產生的 $FreeBSD$ 將會被版本控制系統展開。" +"當 PO 檔建立之後，在範例中使用到的 &dollar; Entity 會被取代成實際的錢字符號，這會使的 $FreeBSD$ 字串在提交時錯誤的被版本控制系統展開成版本字串。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8012 +#: book.translate.xml:7995 msgid "" "The same technique as used in the English documents can be used in the " "translation. The &dollar; is used to replace the " "dollar sign in the translation entered into the PO editor:" msgstr "" -"英文文件用的相同技術可以被用在翻譯上。翻譯時用 &dollar; 來取代金錢符號，輸入到 PO 檔編輯器：" +"在英文文件上使用的方法也可以用在翻譯上，翻譯時在 PO 編輯" +"器用 &dollar; 來取代金錢符號：" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:8060 +#: book.translate.xml:8043 msgid "Building a Translated Document" msgstr "編譯翻譯的文件" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8062 +#: book.translate.xml:8045 msgid "" "A translated version of the original document can be created at any time. " "Any untranslated portions of the original will be included in English in the " "resulting document. Most PO editors have an indicator " "that shows how much of the translation has been completed. This makes it " "easy for the translator to see when enough strings have been translated to " "make building the final document worthwhile." msgstr "" "原文的翻譯版本可以在任何時候被建立。未翻譯的部份會以英文呈獻。大部份 " "PO 編輯器有指標可以顯示翻譯完成度。這讓翻譯者更容易看翻譯" "好的字串是否足夠來編譯最終的文件。" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:8072 +#: book.translate.xml:8055 msgid "Building the Spanish Porter's Handbook" msgstr "編譯西班牙文 Porter 手冊" #. (itstool) path: example/para -#: book.translate.xml:8074 +#: book.translate.xml:8057 msgid "" "Build and preview the Spanish version of the Porter's Handbook that was " "created in an earlier example." msgstr "編譯和預覽之前範例翻譯的西班牙文版 Porter 手冊" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:8079 +#: book.translate.xml:8062 msgid "" "Build the translated document. Because the original is a book, the generated " "document is book.xml." msgstr "" -"編譯翻譯好的文件。因為原文是書籍，所以產生的文件是book.xmlbook.xml。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8083 +#: book.translate.xml:8066 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook\n" "% make tran" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook\n" "% make tran" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:8088 +#: book.translate.xml:8071 msgid "" "Render the translated book.xml to HTML and view it with Firefox. This is the " "same procedure used with the English version of the documents, and other " "FORMATS can be used here in the same way. See ." msgstr "" -"轉換翻譯好的book.xml成HTML並用" -"Firefox來瀏覽。這和英文版是相同的步驟，其他 " -"FORMATS 也可以這樣做。請見book.xml 成 HTML 並用 " +"Firefox 來瀏覽。這和英文版是相同的步驟，其他 " +"FORMATS 也可以這樣做。請見 。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8095 +#: book.translate.xml:8078 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% make FORMATS=html\n" "% firefox book.html" msgstr "" "% make FORMATS=html\n" "% firefox book.html" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:8103 +#: book.translate.xml:8086 msgid "Submitting the New Translation" msgstr "提交新翻譯" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8105 +#: book.translate.xml:8088 msgid "" "Prepare the new translation files for submission. This includes adding the " "files to the version control system, setting additional properties on them, " "then creating a diff for submission." msgstr "" "準備要提交的新翻譯。這包含新增檔案到版本控制系統，對檔案設定額外的屬性，並建" "立 diff 來提交。" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8110 +#: book.translate.xml:8093 msgid "" "The diff files created by these examples can be attached to a documentation bug report or code review." msgstr "" "範例中產生的 diff 檔可以被附加到 documentation bug report 或 code review 。" +"bugzilla/enter_bug.cgi?product=Documentation\">文件問題回報 (Documentation " +"bug report) 或 程式" +"碼審查 (Code review) 。" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:8116 +#: book.translate.xml:8099 msgid "Spanish Translation of the NanoBSD Article" msgstr "NanoBSD 文章的西班牙文翻譯" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:8120 book.translate.xml:8187 +#: book.translate.xml:8103 book.translate.xml:8170 msgid "" "Add a FreeBSD version string comment as the first line of the PO file:" msgstr "增加 FreeBSD 版本字串註解到 PO 檔的第一行：" #. (itstool) path: step/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8123 book.translate.xml:8190 +#: book.translate.xml:8106 book.translate.xml:8173 #, no-wrap msgid "#$FreeBSD$" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:8127 book.translate.xml:8194 +#: book.translate.xml:8110 book.translate.xml:8177 msgid "" "Add the Makefile, the PO file, and " "the generated XML translation to version control:" msgstr "" "增加 Makefile 、PO 檔和產生的 " "XML 翻譯到版本控制系統：" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8132 +#: book.translate.xml:8115 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/\n" "% ls\n" "Makefile\tarticle.xml\tes_ES.po\n" "% svn add Makefile article.xml es_ES.po\n" "A Makefile\n" "A article.xml\n" "A es_ES.po" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/\n" "% ls\n" "Makefile\tarticle.xml\tes_ES.po\n" "% svn add Makefile article.xml es_ES.po\n" "A Makefile\n" "A article.xml\n" "A es_ES.po" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:8142 book.translate.xml:8209 +#: book.translate.xml:8125 book.translate.xml:8192 msgid "" "Set the Subversion svn:keywords properties on these files to FreeBSD=%H so " "$FreeBSD$ strings are expanded into the path, revision, " "date, and author when committed:" msgstr "" -"設定這些檔案的 Subversion svn:keywords 屬性到 FreeBSD=%H，讓提交時 $FreeBSD$ 字串可以被展開成路徑、版本、日期和作者。" +"在這些檔案設定 Subversion svn:keywords 屬性為 FreeBSD=%H 讓 $FreeBSD$ 字串可以在提交時被展開成為路徑、修訂、日期以及作者：" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8150 +#: book.translate.xml:8133 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% svn propset svn:keywords FreeBSD=%H Makefile article.xml es_ES.po\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'Makefile'\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'article.xml'\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'es_ES.po'" msgstr "" "% svn propset svn:keywords FreeBSD=%H Makefile article.xml es_ES.po\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'Makefile'\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'article.xml'\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'es_ES.po'" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:8157 +#: book.translate.xml:8140 msgid "" "Set the MIME types of the files. These are text/" "xml for books and articles, and text/x-gettext-" "translation for the PO file." msgstr "" -"設定檔案的MIME 類型。書籍和文章是 text/xmlMIME 類型。書籍和文章是 text/xml ，PO 檔是 text/x-gettext-translation 。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8163 +#: book.translate.xml:8146 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% svn propset svn:mime-type text/x-gettext-translation es_ES.po\n" "property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'es_ES.po'\n" "% svn propset svn:mime-type text/xml article.xml\n" "property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'article.xml'" msgstr "" "% svn propset svn:mime-type text/x-gettext-translation es_ES.po\n" "property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'es_ES.po'\n" "% svn propset svn:mime-type text/xml article.xml\n" "property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'article.xml'" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:8170 +#: book.translate.xml:8153 msgid "" "Create a diff of the new files from the ~/doc/ base " "directory so the full path is shown with the filenames. This helps " "committers identify the target language directory." msgstr "" "從 ~/doc/ 建立這些新檔案的 diff，讓檔名顯示完整的路徑。" "這可以幫助提交者辨識目標語系目錄。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8175 +#: book.translate.xml:8158 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc\n" "svn diff es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/ > /tmp/es_nanobsd.diff" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc\n" "svn diff es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/ > /tmp/es_nanobsd.diff" #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:8182 +#: book.translate.xml:8165 msgid "" "Korean UTF-8 Translation of the Explaining-BSD Article" msgstr "Explaining-BSD 文章的韓文 UTF-8 翻譯" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8199 +#: book.translate.xml:8182 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc/ko_KR.UTF-8/articles/explaining-bsd/\n" "% ls\n" "Makefile\tarticle.xml\tko_KR.po\n" "% svn add Makefile article.xml ko_KR.po\n" "A Makefile\n" "A article.xml\n" "A ko_KR.po" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc/ko_KR.UTF-8/articles/explaining-bsd/\n" "% ls\n" "Makefile\tarticle.xml\tko_KR.po\n" "% svn add Makefile article.xml ko_KR.po\n" "A Makefile\n" "A article.xml\n" "A ko_KR.po" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8216 +#: book.translate.xml:8199 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% svn propset svn:keywords FreeBSD=%H Makefile article.xml ko_KR.po\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'Makefile'\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'article.xml'\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'ko_KR.po'" msgstr "" "% svn propset svn:keywords FreeBSD=%H Makefile article.xml ko_KR.po\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'Makefile'\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'article.xml'\n" "property 'svn:keywords' set on 'ko_KR.po'" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:8223 +#: book.translate.xml:8206 msgid "" "Set the MIME types of the files. Because these files use " "the UTF-8 character set, that is also specified. To " "prevent the version control system from mistaking these files for binary " "data, the fbsd:notbinary property is also set:" msgstr "" "設定檔案的 MIME 類型。因為這些檔案使用 UTF-8 字元集，這也需要指定。為了防止版本控制系統將這些檔案誤認為二進位資" "料，fbsd:notbinary 屬性也需要設定。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8230 +#: book.translate.xml:8213 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% svn propset svn:mime-type 'text/x-gettext-translation; charset=UTF-8' ko_KR.po\n" "property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'ko_KR.po'\n" "% svn propset fbsd:notbinary yes ko_KR.po\n" "property 'fbsd:notbinary' set on 'ko_KR.po'\n" "% svn propset svn:mime-type 'text/xml; charset=UTF-8' article.xml\n" "property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'article.xml'\n" "% svn propset fbsd:notbinary yes article.xml\n" "property 'fbsd:notbinary' set on 'article.xml'" msgstr "" "% svn propset svn:mime-type 'text/x-gettext-translation；charset=UTF-8' ko_KR.po\n" "property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'ko_KR.po'\n" "% svn propset fbsd:notbinary yes ko_KR.po\n" "property 'fbsd:notbinary' set on 'ko_KR.po'\n" "% svn propset svn:mime-type 'text/xml；charset=UTF-8' article.xml\n" "property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'article.xml'\n" "% svn propset fbsd:notbinary yes article.xml\n" "property 'fbsd:notbinary' set on 'article.xml'" #. (itstool) path: step/para -#: book.translate.xml:8241 +#: book.translate.xml:8224 msgid "" "Create a diff of these new files from the ~/doc/ base " "directory:" msgstr "從 ~/doc/ 建立這些新檔案的 diff。" #. (itstool) path: step/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8244 +#: book.translate.xml:8227 #, no-wrap msgid "" "% cd ~/doc\n" "svn diff ko_KR.UTF-8/articles/explaining-bsd > /tmp/ko-explaining.diff" msgstr "" "% cd ~/doc\n" "svn diff ko_KR.UTF-8/articles/explaining-bsd > /tmp/ko-explaining.diff" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title -#: book.translate.xml:8285 +#: book.translate.xml:8268 msgid "Writing Style" msgstr "寫作風格" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:8288 +#: book.translate.xml:8271 msgid "Tips" msgstr "叮嚀" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8290 +#: book.translate.xml:8273 msgid "" "Technical documentation can be improved by consistent use of several " "principles. Most of these can be classified into three goals: be " "clear, be complete, and be " "concise. These goals can conflict with each other. Good writing " "consists of a balance between them." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8299 +#: book.translate.xml:8282 msgid "Be Clear" -msgstr "" +msgstr "要明瞭" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8301 +#: book.translate.xml:8284 msgid "" "Clarity is extremely important. The reader may be a novice, or reading the " "document in a second language. Strive for simple, uncomplicated text that " "clearly explains the concepts." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8306 +#: book.translate.xml:8289 msgid "" "Avoid flowery or embellished speech, jokes, or colloquial expressions. Write " "as simply and clearly as possible. Simple text is easier to understand and " "translate." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8310 +#: book.translate.xml:8293 msgid "" "Keep explanations as short, simple, and clear as possible. Avoid empty " "phrases like in order to, which usually just means to. Avoid potentially patronizing words like basically. " "Avoid Latin terms like i.e. or cf., which may " "be unknown outside of academic or scientific groups." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8318 +#: book.translate.xml:8301 msgid "" "Write in a formal style. Avoid addressing the reader as you. " "For example, say copy the file to /tmp " "rather than you can copy the file to /tmp." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8324 +#: book.translate.xml:8307 msgid "" "Give clear, correct, tested examples. A trivial example " "is better than no example. A good example is better yet. Do not give bad " "examples, identifiable by apologies or sentences like but really it " "should never be done that way. Bad examples are worse than no " "examples. Give good examples, because even when warned not to use " "the example as shown, the reader will usually just use the " "example as shown." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8333 +#: book.translate.xml:8316 msgid "" "Avoid weasel words like should, " "might, try, or could. These " "words imply that the speaker is unsure of the facts, and create doubt in the " "reader." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8339 +#: book.translate.xml:8322 msgid "" "Similarly, give instructions as imperative commands: not you should " "do this, but merely do this." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8345 +#: book.translate.xml:8328 msgid "Be Complete" -msgstr "" +msgstr "要完整" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8347 +#: book.translate.xml:8330 msgid "" "Do not make assumptions about the reader's abilities or skill level. Tell " "them what they need to know. Give links to other documents to provide " "background information without having to recreate it. Put yourself in the " "reader's place, anticipate the questions they will ask, and answer them." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8356 +#: book.translate.xml:8339 msgid "Be Concise" -msgstr "" +msgstr "要簡潔" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8358 +#: book.translate.xml:8341 msgid "" "While features should be documented completely, sometimes there is so much " "information that the reader cannot easily find the specific detail needed. " "The balance between being complete and being concise is a challenge. One " "approach is to have an introduction, then a quick start " "section that describes the most common situation, followed by an in-depth " "reference section." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:8369 +#: book.translate.xml:8352 msgid "Guidelines" -msgstr "" +msgstr "準則" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8371 +#: book.translate.xml:8354 msgid "" "To promote consistency between the myriad authors of the FreeBSD " "documentation, some guidelines have been drawn up for authors to follow." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:8377 +#: book.translate.xml:8360 msgid "Use American English Spelling" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用美式英語拼寫" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8380 +#: book.translate.xml:8363 msgid "" "There are several variants of English, with different spellings for the same " "word. Where spellings differ, use the American English variant. " "color, not colour, rationalize, " "not rationalise, and so on." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: note/para -#: book.translate.xml:8387 +#: book.translate.xml:8370 msgid "" "The use of British English may be accepted in the case of a contributed " "article, however the spelling must be consistent within the whole document. " "The other documents such as books, web site, manual pages, etc. will have to " "use American English." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:8397 +#: book.translate.xml:8380 msgid "Do not use contractions" -msgstr "" +msgstr "不要使用縮寫式" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8400 +#: book.translate.xml:8383 msgid "" "Do not use contractions. Always spell the phrase out in full. Don't " "use contractions is wrong." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8404 +#: book.translate.xml:8387 msgid "" "Avoiding contractions makes for a more formal tone, is more precise, and is " "slightly easier for translators." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:8411 +#: book.translate.xml:8394 msgid "Use the serial comma" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用逗號串行" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8414 +#: book.translate.xml:8397 msgid "" "In a list of items within a paragraph, separate each item from the others " "with a comma. Separate the last item from the others with a comma and the " "word and." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8419 +#: book.translate.xml:8402 msgid "For example:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: blockquote/para -#: book.translate.xml:8422 +#: book.translate.xml:8405 msgid "This is a list of one, two and three items." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8425 +#: book.translate.xml:8408 msgid "" "Is this a list of three items, one, two, and " "three, or a list of two items, one and " "two and three?" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8430 +#: book.translate.xml:8413 msgid "It is better to be explicit and include a serial comma:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: blockquote/para -#: book.translate.xml:8434 +#: book.translate.xml:8417 msgid "This is a list of one, two, and three items." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:8440 +#: book.translate.xml:8423 msgid "Avoid redundant phrases" -msgstr "" +msgstr "避免多餘的語句" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8443 +#: book.translate.xml:8426 msgid "" "Do not use redundant phrases. In particular, the command, " "the file, and man command are often redundant." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8447 +#: book.translate.xml:8430 msgid "For example, commands:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: informalexample/para -#: book.translate.xml:8450 +#: book.translate.xml:8433 msgid "Wrong: Use the svn command to update sources." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: informalexample/para -#: book.translate.xml:8455 +#: book.translate.xml:8438 msgid "Right: Use svn to update sources." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8459 +#: book.translate.xml:8442 msgid "Filenames:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: informalexample/para -#: book.translate.xml:8462 +#: book.translate.xml:8445 msgid "Wrong: … in the filename /etc/rc.local…" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: informalexample/para -#: book.translate.xml:8467 +#: book.translate.xml:8450 msgid "Right: … in /etc/rc.local…" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8471 +#: book.translate.xml:8454 msgid "" "Manual page references (the second example uses citerefentry with " "the &man.csh.1; entity):." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: informalexample/para -#: book.translate.xml:8476 +#: book.translate.xml:8459 msgid "Wrong: See man csh for more information." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: informalexample/para -#: book.translate.xml:8481 +#: book.translate.xml:8464 msgid "" "Right: See csh1." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term -#: book.translate.xml:8487 +#: book.translate.xml:8470 msgid "Two spaces between sentences" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在句子之間空兩個空白" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8490 +#: book.translate.xml:8473 msgid "" "Always use two spaces between sentences, as it improves readability and " "eases use of tools such as Emacs." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8494 +#: book.translate.xml:8477 msgid "" "A period and spaces followed by a capital letter does not always mark a new " "sentence, especially in names. Jordan K. Hubbard is a good " "example. It has a capital H following a period and a " "space, and is certainly not a new sentence." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8503 +#: book.translate.xml:8486 msgid "" "For more information about writing style, see Elements of Style, by William Strunk." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:8508 +#: book.translate.xml:8491 msgid "Style Guide" msgstr "風格指南" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8510 +#: book.translate.xml:8493 msgid "" "To keep the source for the documentation consistent when many different " "people are editing it, please follow these style conventions." msgstr "" -"由於文件是由眾多作者所維護，為了保持寫作風格的一貫性， 請遵守下列撰寫風格慣" -"例。" +"由於說明文件是由眾多作者所維護，為了保持寫作風格的一貫性， 請遵守下列撰寫風格" +"慣例。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8515 +#: book.translate.xml:8498 msgid "Letter Case" msgstr "大小寫" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8517 +#: book.translate.xml:8500 msgid "" "Tags are entered in lower case, para, not " "PARA." msgstr "" "Tag 的部份都是用小寫字母，譬如是用 para ，而非PARA。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8520 +#: book.translate.xml:8503 msgid "" "Text that appears in SGML contexts is generally written in upper case, " "<!ENTITY…>, and <!DOCTYPE…>, not <!entity…> and " "<!doctype…>." msgstr "" "而 SGML 內文則是用大寫字母表示，像是： <!ENTITY…> " "及 <!DOCTYPE…>， 而不是 " "<!entity…> 及 <!doctype…>。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8531 +#: book.translate.xml:8514 msgid "" "Acronyms should be defined the first time they appear in a document, as in: " "Network Time Protocol (NTP). After the " "acronym has been defined, use the acronym alone unless it makes more sense " "contextually to use the whole term. Acronyms are usually defined only once " "per chapter or per document." msgstr "" "縮寫字(acronym)通常在書中第一次提到時，必須同時列出完整拼法， 比如：" "Network Time Protocol (NTP)。 定義縮寫字之" "後，應該儘量只使用該縮寫字(而非完整詞彙， 除非使用完整詞彙可以更能表達語意)來" "表達即可。 通常每本書只會第一次提到時，才會列出完整詞彙， 但若您高興也可以在" "每章第一次提到時又列出完整詞彙。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8539 +#: book.translate.xml:8522 msgid "All acronyms should be enclosed in acronym tags." msgstr "所有縮寫要包在acronym標籤內。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8544 +#: book.translate.xml:8527 msgid "Indentation" msgstr "縮排" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8546 +#: book.translate.xml:8529 msgid "" "The first line in each file starts with no indentation, " "regardless of the indentation level of the file which " "might contain the current file." msgstr "無論檔案縮排設定為何， 每個檔案的第一行都不縮排。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8550 +#: book.translate.xml:8533 msgid "" "Opening tags increase the indentation level by two spaces. Closing tags " "decrease the indentation level by two spaces. Blocks of eight spaces at the " "start of a line should be replaced with a tab. Do not use spaces in front of " "tabs, and do not add extraneous whitespace at the end of a line. Content " "within elements should be indented by two spaces if the content runs over " "more than one line." msgstr "" "未完的標籤會以多兩個空白來增加縮排， 結尾的標籤則少兩個空白來縮減縮排。 若已" "達 8 個空白，則以 tab 取代之。 此外，在 tab 前面不要再用空白，也不要在每行後" "面加上空白。 每個 tag 的內文若超過一行的話，則接下來的就多兩個空白以做縮排。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8558 +#: book.translate.xml:8541 msgid "For example, the source for this section looks like this:" msgstr "舉個例子，這節所用的寫法大致是下面這樣：" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8561 +#: book.translate.xml:8544 #, no-wrap msgid "" "chapter\n" " title...title\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " title...title\n" "\n" " sect2\n" " titleIndentationtitle\n" "\n" " paraThe first line in each file starts with no indentation,\n" "\temphasisregardlessemphasis of the indentation level of\n" "\tthe file which might contain the current file.para\n" "\n" " ...\n" " sect2\n" " sect1\n" "chapter" msgstr "" "chapter\n" " title...title\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " title...title\n" "\n" " sect2\n" " titleIndentationtitle\n" "\n" " paraThe first line in each file starts with no indentation,\n" "\temphasisregardlessemphasis of the indentation level of\n" "\tthe file which might contain the current file。para\n" "\n" " ...\n" " sect2\n" " sect1\n" "chapter" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8579 +#: book.translate.xml:8562 msgid "" "Tags containing long attributes follow the same rules. Following the " "indentation rules in this case helps editors and writers see which content " "is inside the tags:" msgstr "" "有長屬性的標籤也是遵循一樣的原則。遵守縮排規則可以幫助編輯和作者了解哪些內容" "在標籤內：" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8584 +#: book.translate.xml:8567 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraSee the link\n" " linkend=\"gmirror-troubleshooting\"Troubleshootinglink\n" " section if there are problems booting. Powering down and\n" " disconnecting the original filenameada0filename disk\n" " will allow it to be kept as an offline backup.para\n" "\n" "paraIt is also possible to journal the boot disk of a &os;\n" " system. Refer to the article link\n" " xlink:href=\"&url.articles.gjournal-desktop;\"Implementing UFS\n" " Journaling on a Desktop PClink for detailed\n" " instructions.para" msgstr "" "paraSee the link\n" " linkend=\"gmirror-troubleshooting\"Troubleshootinglink\n" " section if there are problems booting. Powering down and\n" " disconnecting the original filenameada0filename disk\n" " will allow it to be kept as an offline backup.para\n" "\n" "paraIt is also possible to journal the boot disk of a &os;\n" " system. Refer to the article link\n" " xlink:href=\"&url.articles.gjournal-desktop;\"Implementing UFS\n" " Journaling on a Desktop PClink for detailed\n" " instructions.para" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8596 +#: book.translate.xml:8579 msgid "" "When an element is too long to fit on the remainder of a line without " "wrapping, moving the start tag to the next line can make the source easier " "to read. In this example, the systemitem element has been " "moved to the next line to avoid wrapping and indenting:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8602 +#: book.translate.xml:8585 #, no-wrap msgid "" "paraWith file flags, even\n" " systemitem class=\"username\"rootsystemitem can be\n" " prevented from removing or altering files.para" msgstr "" "paraWith file flags, even\n" " systemitem class=\"username\"rootsystemitem can be\n" " prevented from removing or altering files。para" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8606 +#: book.translate.xml:8589 msgid "" "Configurations to help various text editors conform to these guidelines can " "be found in ." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8612 +#: book.translate.xml:8595 msgid "Tag Style" msgstr "標籤風格" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title -#: book.translate.xml:8615 +#: book.translate.xml:8598 msgid "Tag Spacing" -msgstr "標籤空行" +msgstr "標籤間距" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:8617 +#: book.translate.xml:8600 msgid "" "Tags that start at the same indent as a previous tag should be separated by " "a blank line, and those that are not at the same indent as a previous tag " "should not:" -msgstr "同一縮排等級的標籤要以空一行來做區隔，而不同縮排等級的則不必。 比如：" +msgstr "同一縮排階層的標籤要以空一行來做區隔，而不同縮排階層的則不必。 比如：" #. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8622 +#: book.translate.xml:8605 #, no-wrap msgid "" "article lang='en'\n" " articleinfo\n" " titleNIStitle\n" "\n" " pubdateOctober 1999pubdate\n" "\n" " abstract\n" " para...\n" "\t...\n" "\t...para\n" " abstract\n" " articleinfo\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " title...title\n" "\n" " para...para\n" " sect1\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " title...title\n" "\n" " para...para\n" " sect1\n" "article" msgstr "" "article lang='en'\n" " articleinfo\n" " titleNIStitle\n" "\n" " pubdateOctober 1999pubdate\n" "\n" " abstract\n" " para...\n" "\t...\n" "\t...para\n" " abstract\n" " articleinfo\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " title...title\n" "\n" " para...para\n" " sect1\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " title...title\n" "\n" " para...para\n" " sect1\n" "article" #. (itstool) path: sect3/title -#: book.translate.xml:8651 +#: book.translate.xml:8634 msgid "Separating Tags" -msgstr "標籤的分行" +msgstr "分隔標籤" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:8653 +#: book.translate.xml:8636 msgid "" "Tags like itemizedlist which will always have further tags inside " "them, and in fact do not take character data themselves, are always on a " "line by themselves." msgstr "" "像是 itemizedlist 這類的標籤事實上本身不含任何文字資料，必須得由其" "他標籤來補充內文。 這類的標籤會獨用一整行。" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:8658 +#: book.translate.xml:8641 msgid "" "Tags like para and term do not need other tags to " "contain normal character data, and their contents begin immediately after " "the tag, on the same line." msgstr "" "另外，像是 para 及 term 這類的標籤並不需搭配其他標籤， " "就可附上文字資料，並且在標籤後面的同一行內即可立即寫上這" "些內文。" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:8663 +#: book.translate.xml:8646 msgid "The same applies to when these two types of tags close." msgstr "當然，這兩類的標籤結尾時也是跟上面道理相同。" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:8666 +#: book.translate.xml:8649 msgid "This leads to an obvious problem when mixing these tags." msgstr "不過，當上述這兩種標籤混用時，會有很明顯的困擾。" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:8669 +#: book.translate.xml:8652 msgid "" "When a starting tag which cannot contain character data directly follows a " "tag of the type that requires other tags within it to use character data, " "they are on separate lines. The second tag should be properly indented." msgstr "" "當第一類標籤的後面接上第二類標籤的話， 那麼要把這兩類標籤各自分行來寫。 後者" "標籤的段落， 也是需要做適當縮排調整。" #. (itstool) path: sect3/para -#: book.translate.xml:8674 +#: book.translate.xml:8657 msgid "" "When a tag which can contain character data closes directly after a tag " "which cannot contain character data closes, they co-exist on the same line." msgstr "而第二類標籤結尾時，可以與第一類標籤的結尾放在同一行。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8681 +#: book.translate.xml:8664 msgid "Whitespace Changes" -msgstr "空白的更改" +msgstr "空白變更" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8683 +#: book.translate.xml:8666 msgid "" "Do not commit changes to content at the same time as changes to " "formatting." msgstr "" -"在提交修改時，請別在修改內容的同時， 也一起更改編排格式。。" +"在提交修改時，請別在修改內容的同時也一起更改編排格式。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8687 +#: book.translate.xml:8670 msgid "" "When content and whitespace changes are kept separate, translation teams can " "easily see whether a change was content that must be translated or only " "whitespace." msgstr "" -"如此一來，像是 Handbook 翻譯團隊才能迅速找出你改了哪些內容， 而不用費心思去判" -"斷該行的改變，是由於格式重排或者內容異動。" +"如此一來，像是翻譯團隊才能迅速找出你改了哪些內容， 而不用費心思去判斷該行的改" +"變，是由於格式重排或者內容異動。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8691 +#: book.translate.xml:8674 msgid "" "For example, if two sentences have been added to a paragraph so that the " "line lengths now go over 80 columns, first commit the change with the too-" "long lines. Then fix the line wrapping, and commit this second change. In " "the commit message for the second change, indicate that this is a whitespace-" "only change that can be ignored by translators." msgstr "" "舉例說明，若要在某段加上兩個句子，如此一來該段落的某行勢必會超出 80 縱列，這" "時請先 commmit 修改。 接著，再修飾過長行落的換行，然後再次 commit 之。 而第二" "次的 commit 紀錄，請明確說明這只是 whitespace-only (修改空白而已) 的更改，如" "此一來，翻譯團隊就可以忽略第二次 commit 了 。" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8701 +#: book.translate.xml:8684 msgid "Non-Breaking Space" -msgstr "Nonbreaking space" +msgstr "不斷行空白" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8703 +#: book.translate.xml:8686 msgid "" "Avoid line breaks in places where they look ugly or make it difficult to " "follow a sentence. Line breaks depend on the width of the chosen output " "medium. In particular, viewing the HTML documentation with a text browser " "can lead to badly formatted paragraphs like the next one:" msgstr "" "請避免一些情況下的斷行：造成版面醜醜的、或是須連貫表達的同一句子。 斷行的情況" -"會隨所閱讀的工具不同而有所不同。 尤其是透過純文字瀏覽器來看 HTML 時會更明顯看" -"到類似下面這樣不好的編排段落：" +"會隨所閱讀的工具不同而有所不同。 尤其是透過純文字瀏覽器來看 HTML 說明文件時會" +"更明顯看到類似下面這樣不好的編排段落：" #. (itstool) path: sect2/literallayout -#: book.translate.xml:8709 +#: book.translate.xml:8692 #, no-wrap msgid "" "Data capacity ranges from 40 MB to 15\n" "GB. Hardware compression …" msgstr "" "Data capacity ranges from 40 MB to 15\n" "GB。 Hardware compression …" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8712 +#: book.translate.xml:8695 msgid "" "The general entity &nbsp; prohibits line breaks " "between parts belonging together. Use non-breaking spaces in the following " "places:" msgstr "" "請使用 &nbsp; 以避免同句子之間的斷行， 以下示範如何使" -"用 nonbreaking spaces：" +"用不斷行空白：" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8718 +#: book.translate.xml:8701 msgid "between numbers and units:" msgstr "在數字與單位之間：" #. (itstool) path: listitem/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8719 +#: book.translate.xml:8702 #, no-wrap msgid "57600&nbsp;bps" msgstr "57600&nbsp;bps" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8723 +#: book.translate.xml:8706 msgid "between program names and version numbers:" msgstr "在程式名稱與版號之間：" #. (itstool) path: listitem/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8724 +#: book.translate.xml:8707 #, no-wrap msgid "&os;&nbsp;9.2" msgstr "&os;&nbsp;9.2" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:8728 +#: book.translate.xml:8711 msgid "" "between multiword names (use with caution when applying this to more than " "3-4 word names like The FreeBSD Brazilian Portuguese Documentation " "Project):" msgstr "" -"multiword 之間 (使用時請小心，像是 The FreeBSD Brazilian Portuguese " -"Documentation Project 這類由三到四個字所組成的， 則不用加。)：" +"多個單字的名稱之間 (在套用到如 The FreeBSD Brazilian Portuguese " +"Documentation Project 這種由三到四個字所組成的名稱時請小心)：" #. (itstool) path: listitem/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8732 +#: book.translate.xml:8715 #, no-wrap msgid "Sun&nbsp;Microsystems" msgstr "Sun&nbsp;Microsystems" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:8739 +#: book.translate.xml:8722 msgid "Word List" msgstr "詞彙表" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8741 +#: book.translate.xml:8724 msgid "" "This list of words shows the correct spelling and capitalization when used " "in FreeBSD documentation. If a word is not on this list, ask about it on the " "FreeBSD documentation project mailing list." msgstr "" "以下詞彙表列出使用在 FreeBSD 文件的正確拼法和大小寫。 若找不到要找的詞彙，請" "詢問 FreeBSD documentation project mailing list 。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8749 +#: book.translate.xml:8732 msgid "Word" -msgstr "Word" +msgstr "字詞" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8750 +#: book.translate.xml:8733 msgid "XML Code" -msgstr "XML Code" +msgstr "XML 程式碼" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8751 +#: book.translate.xml:8734 msgid "Notes" -msgstr "Notes" +msgstr "備註" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8757 +#: book.translate.xml:8740 msgid "CD-ROM" msgstr "CD-ROM" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8759 +#: book.translate.xml:8742 msgid "" "acronymCD-ROMacronym" msgstr "" "acronymCD-ROMacronym" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8763 +#: book.translate.xml:8746 msgid "DoS (Denial of Service)" msgstr "DoS (Denial of Service)" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8764 +#: book.translate.xml:8747 msgid "" "acronymDoSacronym" msgstr "" "acronymDoSacronym" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8768 +#: book.translate.xml:8751 msgid "email" msgstr "email" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8772 +#: book.translate.xml:8755 msgid "file system" msgstr "file system" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8776 +#: book.translate.xml:8759 msgid "IPsec" msgstr "IPsec" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8780 +#: book.translate.xml:8763 msgid "Internet" msgstr "Internet" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8784 +#: book.translate.xml:8767 msgid "manual page" msgstr "manual page" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8788 +#: book.translate.xml:8771 msgid "mail server" msgstr "mail server" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8792 +#: book.translate.xml:8775 msgid "name server" msgstr "name server" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8796 +#: book.translate.xml:8779 msgid "Ports Collection" msgstr "Ports Collection" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8800 +#: book.translate.xml:8783 msgid "read-only" msgstr "read-only" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8804 +#: book.translate.xml:8787 msgid "Soft Updates" msgstr "Soft Updates" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8808 +#: book.translate.xml:8791 msgid "stdin" msgstr "stdin" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8809 +#: book.translate.xml:8792 msgid "" "varnamestdinvarname" msgstr "" "varnamestdinvarname" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8813 +#: book.translate.xml:8796 msgid "stdout" msgstr "stdout" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8814 +#: book.translate.xml:8797 msgid "" "varnamestdoutvarname" msgstr "" "varnamestdoutvarname" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8818 +#: book.translate.xml:8801 msgid "stderr" msgstr "stderr" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8819 +#: book.translate.xml:8802 msgid "" "varnamestderrvarname" msgstr "" "varnamestderrvarname" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8823 +#: book.translate.xml:8806 msgid "Subversion" msgstr "Subversion" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8825 +#: book.translate.xml:8808 msgid "" "applicationSubversionapplication" msgstr "" "applicationSubversionapplication" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8826 +#: book.translate.xml:8809 msgid "" "Do not refer to the Subversion application as SVN in " "upper case. To refer to the command, use commandsvncommand." msgstr "" -"不要用大寫SVN來表示 Subversion應用程式。以commandsvncommand來表示指令。" +"不要用大寫 SVN 來表示 Subversion 應用程式。若要表示指令，" +"請使用 commandsvncommand。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8837 +#: book.translate.xml:8820 msgid "userland" msgstr "userland" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8839 +#: book.translate.xml:8822 msgid "things that apply to user space, not the kernel" -msgstr "指user space，不是核心。" +msgstr "指那些要會用在使用者空間 (User space) 而非核心的東西。" #. (itstool) path: row/entry -#: book.translate.xml:8844 +#: book.translate.xml:8827 msgid "web server" msgstr "web server" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title -#: book.translate.xml:8883 +#: book.translate.xml:8866 msgid "Editor Configuration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "編輯器設定" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para -#: book.translate.xml:8885 +#: book.translate.xml:8868 msgid "" "Adjusting text editor configuration can make working on document files " "quicker and easier, and help documents conform to FDP " "guidelines." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:8890 +#: book.translate.xml:8873 msgid "Vim" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8892 +#: book.translate.xml:8875 msgid "" "Install from editors/vim or editors/vim-lite, then follow the configuration instructions in ." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8898 book.translate.xml:9002 +#: book.translate.xml:8881 book.translate.xml:9060 msgid "Use" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8900 +#: book.translate.xml:8883 msgid "" "Press P to reformat paragraphs or text that has been " "selected in Visual mode. Press T to replace groups of eight " "spaces with a tab." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/title -#: book.translate.xml:8906 book.translate.xml:8973 +#: book.translate.xml:8890 book.translate.xml:9031 msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "設置" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8908 +#: book.translate.xml:8892 msgid "" "Edit ~/.vimrc, adding these lines to the end of the " "file:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8911 +#: book.translate.xml:8895 #, no-wrap msgid "" "if has(\"autocmd\")\n" " au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sgml,*.ent,*.xsl,*.xml call Set_SGML()\n" " au BufNewFile,BufRead *.[1-9] call ShowSpecial()\n" "endif \" has(autocmd)\n" "\n" "function Set_Highlights()\n" " \"match ExtraWhitespace /^\\s* \\s*\\|\\s\\+$/\n" " highlight default link OverLength ErrorMsg\n" " match OverLength /\\%71v.\\+/\n" " return 0\n" "endfunction\n" "\n" "function ShowSpecial()\n" " setlocal list listchars=tab:>>,trail:*,eol:$\n" " hi def link nontext ErrorMsg\n" " return 0\n" "endfunction \" ShowSpecial()\n" "\n" "function Set_SGML()\n" " setlocal number\n" " syn match sgmlSpecial \"&[^;]*;\"\n" " setlocal syntax=sgml\n" " setlocal filetype=xml\n" " setlocal shiftwidth=2\n" " setlocal textwidth=70\n" " setlocal tabstop=8\n" " setlocal softtabstop=2\n" " setlocal formatprg=\"fmt -p\"\n" " setlocal autoindent\n" " setlocal smartindent\n" " \" Rewrap paragraphs\n" " noremap P gqj\n" " \" Replace spaces with tabs\n" " noremap T :s/ /\\t/<CR>\n" " call ShowSpecial()\n" " call Set_Highlights()\n" " return 0\n" "endfunction \" Set_SGML()" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:8953 +#: book.translate.xml:8937 msgid "Emacs" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8955 +#: book.translate.xml:8939 msgid "" -"Install from editors/emacs or editors/xemacs." +"Install from editors/emacs or editors/emacs-" +"devel." msgstr "" -#. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8959 -msgid "Edit ~/.emacs, adding this line:" +#. (itstool) path: sect2/title +#: book.translate.xml:8943 +msgid "Validation" +msgstr "檢驗" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/para +#: book.translate.xml:8945 +msgid "" +"Emacs's nxml-mode uses compact relax NG schemas for validating XML. A " +"compact relax NG schema for FreeBSD's extension to DocBook 5.0 is included " +"in the documentation repository. To configure nxml-mode to validate using " +"this schema, create ~/.emacs.d/schema/schemas.xml and " +"add these lines to the file:" msgstr "" -#. (itstool) path: sect1/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8962 +#. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting +#: book.translate.xml:8953 #, no-wrap -msgid "(add-hook 'nxml-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)" +msgid "" +"locatingRules xmlns=\"http://thaiopensource.com/ns/locating-rules/1.0\"\n" +" documentElement localName=\"section\" typeId=\"DocBook\"\n" +" documentElement localName=\"chapter\" typeId=\"DocBook\"\n" +" documentElement localName=\"article\" typeId=\"DocBook\"\n" +" documentElement localName=\"book\" typeId=\"DocBook\"\n" +" typeId id=\"DocBook\" uri=\"/usr/local/share/xml/docbook/5.0/rng/docbook.rnc\"\n" +"locatingRules" msgstr "" -#. (itstool) path: sect1/title +#. (itstool) path: sect2/title +#: book.translate.xml:8964 +msgid "Automated Proofreading with Flycheck and Igor" +msgstr "使用 Flycheck 和 Igor 自動化校對" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/para #: book.translate.xml:8966 +msgid "" +"The Flycheck package is available from Milkypostman's Emacs Lisp Package " +"Archive (MELPA). If MELPA is not " +"already in Emacs's packages-archives, it can be added by evaluating" +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting +#: book.translate.xml:8971 +#, no-wrap +msgid "(add-to-list 'package-archives '(\"melpa\" . \"http://stable.melpa.org/packages/\") t)" +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/para +#: book.translate.xml:8973 +msgid "" +"Add the line to Emacs's initialization file (one of ~/.emacs, ~/.emacs.el, or ~.emacs.d/init.el) to make this change permanent." +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/para +#: book.translate.xml:8979 +msgid "To install Flycheck, evaluate" +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting +#: book.translate.xml:8981 +#, no-wrap +msgid "(package-install 'flycheck)" +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/para +#: book.translate.xml:8983 +msgid "" +"Create a Flycheck checker for textproc/igor by evaluating" +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting +#: book.translate.xml:8986 +#, no-wrap +msgid "" +"(flycheck-define-checker igor\n" +" \"FreeBSD Documentation Project sanity checker.\n" +"\n" +"See URLs http://www.freebsd.org/docproj/ and\n" +"http://www.freshports.org/textproc/igor/.\"\n" +" :command (\"igor\" \"-X\" source-inplace)\n" +" :error-parser flycheck-parse-checkstyle\n" +" :modes (nxml-mode)\n" +" :standard-input t)\n" +"\n" +" (add-to-list 'flycheck-checkers 'igor 'append)" +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/para +#: book.translate.xml:8998 +msgid "" +"Again, add these lines to Emacs's initialization file to make the changes " +"permanent." +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/title +#: book.translate.xml:9003 +msgid "FreeBSD Documentation Specific Settings" +msgstr "FreeBSD 說明文件特定的設定" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/para +#: book.translate.xml:9005 +msgid "" +"To apply settings specific to the FreeBSD documentation project, create " +".dir-locals.el in the root directory of the " +"documentation repository and add these lines to the file:" +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting +#: book.translate.xml:9010 +#, no-wrap +msgid "" +";;; Directory Local Variables\n" +";;; For more information see (info \"(emacs) Directory Variables\")\n" +"\n" +"((nxml-mode\n" +" (eval . (turn-on-auto-fill))\n" +" (fill-column . 70)\n" +" (eval . (require 'flycheck))\n" +" (eval . (flycheck-mode 1))\n" +" (flycheck-checker . igor)\n" +" (eval . (add-to-list 'rng-schema-locating-files \"~/.emacs.d/schema/schemas.xml\"))))" +msgstr "" + +#. (itstool) path: sect1/title +#: book.translate.xml:9024 msgid "nano" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/para -#: book.translate.xml:8968 +#: book.translate.xml:9026 msgid "" "Install from editors/nano or editors/nano-devel." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8975 +#: book.translate.xml:9033 msgid "" "Copy the sample XML syntax highlight file to the user's " "home directory:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8978 +#: book.translate.xml:9036 #, no-wrap msgid "% cp /usr/local/share/nano/xml.nanorc ~/.nanorc" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8980 +#: book.translate.xml:9038 msgid "Add these lines to the new ~/.nanorc." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:8983 +#: book.translate.xml:9041 #, no-wrap msgid "" "syntax \"xml\" \"\\.([jrs]html?|xml|xslt?)$\"\n" "# trailing whitespace\n" "color ,blue \"[[:space:]]+$\"\n" "# multiples of eight spaces at the start a line\n" "# (after zero or more tabs) should be a tab\n" "color ,blue \"^([TAB]*[ ]{8})+\"\n" "# tabs after spaces\n" "color ,yellow \"( )+TAB\"\n" "# highlight indents that have an odd number of spaces\n" "color ,red \"^(([ ]{2})+|(TAB+))*[ ]{1}[^ ]{1}\"\n" "# lines longer than 70 characters\n" "color ,yellow \"^(.{71})|(TAB.{63})|(TAB{2}.{55})|(TAB{3}.{47}).+$\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:8996 +#: book.translate.xml:9054 msgid "Process the file to create embedded tabs:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/screen -#: book.translate.xml:8998 +#: book.translate.xml:9056 #, no-wrap msgid "% perl -i'' -pe 's/TAB/\\t/g' ~/.nanorc" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:9004 +#: book.translate.xml:9062 msgid "Specify additional helpful options when running the editor:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/screen -#: book.translate.xml:9007 +#: book.translate.xml:9065 #, no-wrap msgid "% nano -AKipwz -r 70 -T8 chapter.xml" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:9009 +#: book.translate.xml:9067 msgid "" "Users of csh1 can define an alias in ~/.cshrc to automate these options:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:9013 +#: book.translate.xml:9071 #, no-wrap msgid "alias nano \"nano -AKipwz -r 70 -T8\"" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/para -#: book.translate.xml:9015 +#: book.translate.xml:9073 msgid "After the alias is defined, the options will be added automatically:" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect2/screen -#: book.translate.xml:9018 +#: book.translate.xml:9076 #, no-wrap msgid "% nano chapter.xml" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: chapter/title -#: book.translate.xml:9056 +#: book.translate.xml:9114 msgid "See Also" msgstr "他山之石" #. (itstool) path: chapter/para -#: book.translate.xml:9058 +#: book.translate.xml:9116 msgid "" "This document is deliberately not an exhaustive discussion of XML, the DTDs " "listed, and the FreeBSD Documentation Project. For more information about " "these, you are encouraged to see the following web sites." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:9064 +#: book.translate.xml:9122 msgid "The FreeBSD Documentation Project" -msgstr "FreeBSD 文件計劃" +msgstr "FreeBSD 說明文件計劃" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:9068 +#: book.translate.xml:9126 msgid "" "The FreeBSD " "Documentation Project web pages" msgstr "" -"FreeBSD 文件計劃網" -"頁" +"FreeBSD 說明文件計" +"劃網頁" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:9073 +#: book.translate.xml:9131 msgid "" "The FreeBSD Handbook" msgstr "" "FreeBSD 使用手冊" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:9080 +#: book.translate.xml:9138 msgid "XML" msgstr "XML" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:9084 +#: book.translate.xml:9142 msgid "" "W3C's XML page SGML/XML web " "page" msgstr "" "W3C's XML 網頁 SGML/XML 網頁" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:9091 +#: book.translate.xml:9149 msgid "HTML" msgstr "HTML" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:9095 +#: book.translate.xml:9153 msgid "" "The World Wide Web Consortium" msgstr "全球資訊網協會" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:9100 +#: book.translate.xml:9158 msgid "" "The HTML 4.0 " "specification" msgstr "" "The HTML 4.0 規格表" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title -#: book.translate.xml:9107 +#: book.translate.xml:9165 msgid "DocBook" msgstr "DocBook" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:9111 +#: book.translate.xml:9169 msgid "" "The DocBook " "Technical Committee, maintainers of the DocBook DTD" msgstr "" "The DocBook 技術委員" "會， DocBook DTD的維護者" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:9117 +#: book.translate.xml:9175 msgid "" "DocBook: The Definitive Guide, the online documentation for the DocBook DTD" msgstr "" "DocBook：The Definitive Guide， DocBook DTD的線上文件。" +"link>， DocBook DTD 的線上說明文件。" #. (itstool) path: listitem/para -#: book.translate.xml:9123 +#: book.translate.xml:9181 msgid "" "The DocBook Open " "Repository contains DSSSL stylesheets and other resources for people " "using DocBook" msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: appendix/para -#: book.translate.xml:9169 +#: book.translate.xml:9227 msgid "" "These examples are not exhaustive—they do not contain all the elements that " "might be desirable to use, particularly in a document's front matter. For " "more examples of DocBook markup, examine the XML source " "for this and other documents available in the Subversion doc repository, or available online starting " "at http://svnweb.FreeBSD." "org/doc/." msgstr "" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:9178 book.translate.xml:9181 +#: book.translate.xml:9236 book.translate.xml:9239 msgid "DocBook book" msgstr "DocBook book" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:9183 +#: book.translate.xml:9241 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN\"\n" "\t\"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd\">\n" "\n" "book xmlns=\"http://docbook.org/ns/docbook\"\n" " xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" version=\"5.0\"\n" " xml:lang=\"en\"\n" "\n" " info\n" " titleAn Example Booktitle\n" "\n" " author\n" " personname\n" " firstnameYour first namefirstname\n" " surnameYour surnamesurname\n" " personname\n" "\n" " affiliation\n" "\taddress\n" "\t emailfoo@example.comemail\n" "\taddress\n" " affiliation\n" " author\n" "\n" " copyright\n" " year2000year\n" " holderCopyright string hereholder\n" " copyright\n" "\n" " abstract\n" " paraIf your book has an abstract then it should go here.para\n" " abstract\n" " info\n" "\n" " preface\n" " titlePrefacetitle\n" "\n" " paraYour book may have a preface, in which case it should be placed\n" " here.para\n" " preface\n" "\n" " chapter\n" " titleMy First Chaptertitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is the first chapter in my book.para\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " titleMy First Sectiontitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is the first section in my book.para\n" " sect1\n" " chapter\n" "book" msgstr "" "<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN\"\n" "\t\"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd\">\n" "\n" "book xmlns=\"http://docbook.org/ns/docbook\"\n" " xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" version=\"5.0\"\n" " xml:lang=\"en\"\n" "\n" " info\n" " titleAn Example Booktitle\n" "\n" " author\n" " personname\n" " firstnameYour first namefirstname\n" " surnameYour surnamesurname\n" " personname\n" "\n" " affiliation\n" "\taddress\n" "\t emailfoo@example.comemail\n" "\taddress\n" " affiliation\n" " author\n" "\n" " copyright\n" " year2000year\n" " holderCopyright string hereholder\n" " copyright\n" "\n" " abstract\n" " paraIf your book has an abstract then it should go here。para\n" " abstract\n" " info\n" "\n" " preface\n" " titlePrefacetitle\n" "\n" " paraYour book may have a preface, in which case it should be placed\n" " here。para\n" " preface\n" "\n" " chapter\n" " titleMy First Chaptertitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is the first chapter in my book。para\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " titleMy First Sectiontitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is the first section in my book。para\n" " sect1\n" " chapter\n" "book" #. (itstool) path: sect1/title #. (itstool) path: example/title -#: book.translate.xml:9239 book.translate.xml:9242 +#: book.translate.xml:9297 book.translate.xml:9300 msgid "DocBook article" msgstr "DocBook article" #. (itstool) path: example/programlisting -#: book.translate.xml:9244 +#: book.translate.xml:9302 #, no-wrap msgid "" "<!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN\"\n" "\t\"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd\">\n" "\n" "article xmlns=\"http://docbook.org/ns/docbook\"\n" " xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" version=\"5.0\"\n" " xml:lang=\"en\"\n" "\n" " info\n" " titleAn Example Articletitle\n" "\n" " author\n" " personname\n" " firstnameYour first namefirstname\n" " surnameYour surnamesurname\n" " personname\n" "\n" " affiliation\n" "\taddress\n" "\t emailfoo@example.comemail\n" "\taddress\n" " affiliation\n" " author\n" "\n" " copyright\n" " year2000year\n" " holderCopyright string hereholder\n" " copyright\n" "\n" " abstract\n" " paraIf your article has an abstract then it should go here.para\n" " abstract\n" " info\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " titleMy First Sectiontitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is the first section in my article.para\n" "\n" " sect2\n" " titleMy First Sub-Sectiontitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is the first sub-section in my article.para\n" " sect2\n" " sect1\n" "article" msgstr "" "<!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN\"\n" "\t\"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd\">\n" "\n" "article xmlns=\"http://docbook.org/ns/docbook\"\n" " xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" version=\"5.0\"\n" " xml:lang=\"en\"\n" "\n" " info\n" " titleAn Example Articletitle\n" "\n" " author\n" " personname\n" " firstnameYour first namefirstname\n" " surnameYour surnamesurname\n" " personname\n" "\n" " affiliation\n" "\taddress\n" "\t emailfoo@example.comemail\n" "\taddress\n" " affiliation\n" " author\n" "\n" " copyright\n" " year2000year\n" " holderCopyright string hereholder\n" " copyright\n" "\n" " abstract\n" " paraIf your article has an abstract then it should go here。para\n" " abstract\n" " info\n" "\n" " sect1\n" " titleMy First Sectiontitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is the first section in my article。para\n" "\n" " sect2\n" " titleMy First Sub-Sectiontitle\n" "\n" " paraThis is the first sub-section in my article。para\n" " sect2\n" " sect1\n" "article" #~ msgid "" -#~ "$FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 48972 " -#~ "2016-06-21 01:19:43Z kevlo $ Strings" +#~ "$FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 " +#~ "08:47:50Z rcyu $" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "$FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 48972 " -#~ "2016-06-21 01:19:43Z kevlo $ 字串" +#~ "$FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 " +#~ "08:47:50Z rcyu $" -#~ msgid "#$FreeBSD$" -#~ msgstr "#$FreeBSD$" +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Several environment variables control which parts of the the web site are " +#~ "built or installed, and to which directories." +#~ msgstr "有些環境變數控制網站的建構或安裝，和裝到哪個目錄" + +#~ msgid "XML Generic Comment" +#~ msgstr "XML 通用註解" + +#~ msgid "Erroneous XML Comments" +#~ msgstr "錯誤的 XML 註解" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "book\n" +#~ " info\n" +#~ " titleYour Title Heretitle\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " author\n" +#~ " personname\n" +#~ " firstnameYour first " +#~ "namefirstname\n" +#~ " surnameYour surnamesurname\n" +#~ " personname\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " affiliation\n" +#~ "\taddress\n" +#~ " emailYour email " +#~ "addressemail\n" +#~ "\taddress\n" +#~ " affiliation\n" +#~ " author\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " copyright\n" +#~ " year1998year\n" +#~ " holder role=\"mailto:your " +#~ "email address\"Your nameholder\n" +#~ " copyright\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " releaseinfo$FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/" +#~ "books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $releaseinfo\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " abstract\n" +#~ " paraInclude an abstract " +#~ "of the book's contents here.para\n" +#~ " abstract\n" +#~ " info\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " …\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "book" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "<!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based " +#~ "Extension//EN\"\n" +#~ "\t\"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd\">\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "article xmlns=\"http://docbook.org/ns/docbook\"\n" +#~ " xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" version=\"5.0\"\n" +#~ " xml:lang=\"en\"\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " info\n" +#~ " titleAn Example Articletitle\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " author\n" +#~ " personname\n" +#~ " firstnameYour first namefirstname\n" +#~ " surnameYour surnamesurname\n" +#~ " personname\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " affiliation\n" +#~ "\taddress\n" +#~ "\t emailfoo@example.comemail\n" +#~ "\taddress\n" +#~ " affiliation\n" +#~ " author\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " copyright\n" +#~ " year2000year\n" +#~ " holderCopyright string hereholder\n" +#~ " copyright\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " abstract\n" +#~ " paraIf your article has an abstract " +#~ "then it should go here。para\n" +#~ " abstract\n" +#~ " info\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " sect1\n" +#~ " titleMy First Sectiontitle\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " paraThis is the first section in my " +#~ "article。para\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " sect2\n" +#~ " titleMy First Sub-Sectiontitle\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " paraThis is the first sub-section in " +#~ "my article。para\n" +#~ " sect2\n" +#~ " sect1\n" +#~ "article" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "article\n" +#~ " info\n" +#~ " titleYour title heretitle\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " author\n" +#~ " personname\n" +#~ "\tfirstnameYour first namefirstname\n" +#~ "\tsurnameYour surnamesurname\n" +#~ " personname\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " affiliation\n" +#~ "\taddress\n" +#~ "\t emailYour email addressemailaddress\n" +#~ "\taddress\n" +#~ " affiliation\n" +#~ " author\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " copyright\n" +#~ " year1998year\n" +#~ " holder role=\"mailto:your " +#~ "email address\"Your nameholder\n" +#~ " copyright\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " releaseinfo$FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/" +#~ "books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $releaseinfo\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " abstract\n" +#~ " paraInclude an abstract " +#~ "of the article's contents here.para\n" +#~ " abstract\n" +#~ " info\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " …\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "article" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "<!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC \"-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based " +#~ "Extension//EN\"\n" +#~ "\t\"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd\">\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "article xmlns=\"http://docbook.org/ns/docbook\"\n" +#~ " xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" version=\"5.0\"\n" +#~ " xml:lang=\"en\"\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " info\n" +#~ " titleAn Example Articletitle\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " author\n" +#~ " personname\n" +#~ " firstnameYour first namefirstname\n" +#~ " surnameYour surnamesurname\n" +#~ " personname\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " affiliation\n" +#~ "\taddress\n" +#~ "\t emailfoo@example.comemail\n" +#~ "\taddress\n" +#~ " affiliation\n" +#~ " author\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " copyright\n" +#~ " year2000year\n" +#~ " holderCopyright string hereholder\n" +#~ " copyright\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " abstract\n" +#~ " paraIf your article has an abstract " +#~ "then it should go here。para\n" +#~ " abstract\n" +#~ " info\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " sect1\n" +#~ " titleMy First Sectiontitle\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " paraThis is the first section in my " +#~ "article。para\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " sect2\n" +#~ " titleMy First Sub-Sectiontitle\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " paraThis is the first sub-section in " +#~ "my article。para\n" +#~ " sect2\n" +#~ " sect1\n" +#~ "article" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "<!--\n" +#~ " The FreeBSD Documentation Project\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 " +#~ "2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $\n" +#~ "-->" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "<!--\n" +#~ " The FreeBSD Documentation Project\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 " +#~ "2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $\n" +#~ "-->" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "The exact boilerplate may change, but it will always include a $FreeBSD: " +#~ "head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 08:47:50Z " +#~ "rcyu $ line and the phrase The FreeBSD Documentation Project. Note that the $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW." +#~ "po 49764 2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $ part is expanded automatically by " +#~ "Subversion, so it should be empty (just $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW." +#~ "UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $) for new files." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "實際上的內容可能稍有不同，但每份原稿都會附上 $FreeBSD$ 這一" +#~ "行以及The FreeBSD Documentation Project 宣告。 請注意：" +#~ "$FreeBSD$ 開頭的這行是會由 Subversion 隨著每次異動而自動更改" +#~ "的， 所以，新檔案的話請保持原狀(也就是只要寫 $FreeBSD$ 就好" +#~ "了)。" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Your translated documents should include their own $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW." +#~ "UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $ line, " +#~ "and change the FreeBSD Documentation Project line to " +#~ "The FreeBSD language Documentation " +#~ "Project." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "翻譯文件中，必須都要有 $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW." +#~ "po 49764 2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $ 這行，並且把 FreeBSD " +#~ "Documentation Project 這行改為 The FreeBSD " +#~ "language Documentation Project。" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "<!--\n" +#~ " The FreeBSD Spanish Documentation Project\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 " +#~ "2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $\n" +#~ " Original revision: r38674\n" +#~ "-->" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "<!--\n" +#~ " The FreeBSD Spanish Documentation Project\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ " $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 " +#~ "2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $\n" +#~ " Original revision: r38674\n" +#~ "-->" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "# $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 " +#~ "08:47:50Z rcyu $\n" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "# Build the FreeBSD Porter's Handbook.\n" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "MAINTAINER=doc@FreeBSD.org\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "DOC?= book\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "FORMATS?= html-split\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz\n" +#~ "INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "# XML content\n" +#~ "SRCS= book.xml\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "# Images from the cross-document image library\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/1.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/2.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/3.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/4.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/5.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/6.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/7.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/8.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/9.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/10.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/11.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/12.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/13.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/14.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/15.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/16.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/17.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/18.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/19.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/20.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/21.png\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..\n" +#~ "DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ ".include \"${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk\"" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "# $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 " +#~ "08:47:50Z rcyu $\n" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "# Build the FreeBSD Porter's Handbook。\n" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "MAINTAINER=doc@FreeBSD.org\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "DOC?= book\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "FORMATS?= html-split\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz\n" +#~ "INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "# XML content\n" +#~ "SRCS= book.xml\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "# Images from the cross-document image library\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/1.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/2.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/3.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/4.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/5.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/6.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/7.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/8.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/9.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/10.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/11.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/12.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/13.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/14.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/15.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/16.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/17.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/18.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/19.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/20.png\n" +#~ "IMAGES_LIB+= callouts/21.png\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..\n" +#~ "DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ ".include \"${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk\"" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "# $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 " +#~ "08:47:50Z rcyu $\n" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "# Article: PGP Keys\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "DOC?= article\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "FORMATS?= html\n" +#~ "WITH_ARTICLE_TOC?= YES\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz\n" +#~ "INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "SRCS= article.xml\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "# To build with just key fingerprints, set FINGERPRINTS_ONLY.\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..\n" +#~ "DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ ".include \"${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk\"" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "# $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 " +#~ "08:47:50Z rcyu $\n" +#~ "#\n" +#~ "# Article：PGP Keys\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "DOC?= article\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "FORMATS?= html\n" +#~ "WITH_ARTICLE_TOC?= YES\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz\n" +#~ "INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "SRCS= article.xml\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "# To build with just key fingerprints, set FINGERPRINTS_ONLY。\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ "URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..\n" +#~ "DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..\n" +#~ "\n" +#~ ".include \"${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk\"" + +#, fuzzy +#~ msgid "" +#~ "The $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 " +#~ "08:47:50Z rcyu $ version strings used in files require special handling. " +#~ "In examples like , " +#~ "these strings are not meant to be expanded. The English documents use " +#~ "&dollar; entities to avoid including actual " +#~ "literal dollar signs in the file:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "檔案裡的 $FreeBSD$ 版本字串需要特別處理。例如 裡，這些字串不是要被展開 " +#~ "(expanded)。英文文件使用 &dollar; entities 來避免使" +#~ "用實際的金錢符號。" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "When a PO file is created, the &dollar; entities used in examples are replaced with actual dollar signs. " +#~ "The resulting literal $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-" +#~ "primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $ string will " +#~ "be wrongly expanded by the version control system when the file is " +#~ "committed." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "當 PO 檔建立後，範例中的 &dollar; entities 被實際的金錢符號取代。當檔案提交時，產生的 " +#~ "$FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 2016-12-26 " +#~ "08:47:50Z rcyu $ 將會被版本控制系統展開。" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Set the Subversion svn:keywords properties on these files to FreeBSD=%H so " +#~ "$FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 " +#~ "2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $ strings are expanded into the path, " +#~ "revision, date, and author when committed:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "設定這些檔案的 Subversion svn:" +#~ "keywords 屬性到 FreeBSD=%H，讓提交時 " +#~ "$FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/zh_TW.po 49764 " +#~ "2016-12-26 08:47:50Z rcyu $ 字串可以被展開成路徑、版本、日期和作" +#~ "者。"